bun=new Array(434);
dai=new Array(434);
body=new Array(434);

body[0]='00-001.htm';
dai[0]='';
bun[0]='';

body[1]='01-001.htm';
dai[1]='EXTERIOR';
bun[1]='EXTERIOREXTERIOR This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the exterior of the machine. Tap the name to make its details pop up. The indicators of the operation panel may differ depending on the country and region.&times;Automatic document feederThis automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time. -AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times;Front cover (upper)Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge or to remove misfed paper in the paper pass unit.&times;Status indicator*The status of the machine is indicated. -STATUS INDICATORS&times;Front cover (lower) Open this cover to switch the main power switch to &quot;On&quot; or &quot;Off&quot; or to clean the main charger of the photoconductive drum. -TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE - TONER CARTRIDGE - Cleaning the las&times;Output tray (centre tray)* Printed paper is output into this tray.&times;Operation panel This panel hosts the [POWER] button, [Power Save] button/indicator and touch panel. Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions. -OPERATION PANEL&times;Right tray* As required, paper can be output into the right tray.&times;Finisher* This staples and outputs paper.&times;Saddle finisher* This staples and folds paper. &times;Curl correction unit* This corrects curls in printed paper.&times;Punch module* This punches holes in paper.&times;USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).&times;Keyboard Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can be stored under the operation panel. -NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS&times;Tray 1 Store paper in this tray. Up to 1,200 sheets can be stored. -TRAY 1/2&times;Tray 2 Store paper in this tray. Up to 800 sheets can be stored. -TRAY 1/2&times;Tray 3 Store paper in this tray. Up to 500 sheets can be stored. -TRAY 3/4&times;Tray 4 Store paper in this tray. Up to 500 sheets can be stored. -TRAY 3/4&times;Tray 5 (MX-LC12)* Store paper in this tray. Up to 3,500 sheets can be stored. -LARGE CAPACITY TRAY&times;Tray 5 (MX-LCX3 N)* Store paper in this tray. Up to 3,000 sheets can be stored. -LARGE CAPACITY TRAY&times;Bypass tray* Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, pull out the extension guide. -BYPASS-TRAY&times;Trimming module* This trims the excess of saddle-stitched output. &times;Large capacity trays* Store paper in this tray. Up to 2,500 sheets can be stored in each tray. -LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS&times;Bypass tray* Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, pull out the extension guide.&times;Inserter* Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher or saddle finisher to staple, punch or fold the paper.&times;Folding unit* This folds and outputs paper.&times;Paper cart* This is a cart that is installed in the high capacity stacker. It is useful when you carry a large number of output sheets.&times;High capacity stacker* This unit is useful when you output a large number of copies. A maximum of 5,000 sheets of paper can be output.You can also connect two units. -HIGH CAPACITY STACKER * Optional. Back to top ';
 body[2]='01-002.htm';
dai[2]='UPPER SIDE';
bun[2]='UPPER SIDEUPPER SIDE This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the upper side of the machine.Tap the name to make its details pop up. &times;Document feeding coverOpen this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.&times;Original guidesAdjust these guides to the width of the original to ensure that the original is correctly scanned.-AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times;Document feeder traySet the original in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.-AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER&times;Original exit trayThe original is discharged to this tray after scanning.&times;Scanning areaOriginals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.-SCANNING AREA&times;Original size detectorThis unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.-DOCUMENT GLASS&times;Document glassTo scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, place them on this glass.-DOCUMENT GLASS Back to top ';
 body[3]='01-003.htm';
dai[3]='SIDE AND BACK';
bun[3]='SIDE AND BACKSIDE AND BACK This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the side and back of the machine. Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).&times;USB port (B type) A computer can be connected to this connector so that the machine can be used as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).&times;LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN cable.&times;Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 3 m(118&quot;) in lBack to top ';
 body[4]='01-004.htm';
dai[4]='INTERIOR';
bun[4]='INTERIORINTERIOR This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts inside the machine. Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Toner cartridge This cartridge contains toner. When the toner in a cartridge runs out, the cartridge of the colour that ran out must be replaced. -TONER CARTRIDGE&times;Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper. The fusing unit is hot. Exercise care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed.&times;Transfer belt This belt takes the image formed with toner off the photoconductive unit and transfers the image onto paper. Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may cause a defective image.&times;Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed.&times;Paper reversing section cover This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Main power switch Use this switch to turn on the machine\'s power. -TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&times;Waste toner box This box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. -WASTE TONER BOX A service technician collects replaced waste toner boxs.&times;Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.Back to top ';
 body[5]='01-005.htm';
dai[5]='OPERATION PANEL';
bun[5]='OPERATION PANELOPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Touch panel Messages and keys appear on the touch panel display. Operate the machine by directly tapping the displayed keys. -HOW TO TOUCH THE PANEL&times;Main power indicator This lamp lights up when the machine\'s main power switch is in the &quot;&quot; position. -TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&times;[POWER] button Use this button to turn the machine\'s power on and off. -TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&times;[Power Save] button/indicatorUse this button to set the machine to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer for energy saving.When this button is held down, the machine enters auto power shut-off mode.The [Power Save] button blinks when the machine is in Auto Power Shut&times;[Home Screen] button/indicator Use this button to display the home screen. -HOME SCREEN&times;USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).[Home Screen] button, [Power Save] button or the touch panelThe [Home Screen] button and [Power Save] button are electrostatic touch keys.Use your finger to touch the [Home Screen] button, [Power Save] button or the touch panel.If you use a pen or other tool to touch the button or the touch panel, it may not operate properly.Risk of malfunctioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories.Do not touch the touch panel while it is starting up. If you touch the touch panel, the machine may not operate correctly.Example: When touch panel is starting upWhen the main power switch or [POWER] button are ON.When waking up from Auto Power Shut-Off The angle of the touch panel can be adjusted. Back to top ';
 body[6]='01-006.htm';
dai[6]='TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE';
bun[6]='TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINETURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINEOverview This section describes how to turn on/off the machine\'s power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [POWER] button on the operation panel.OperationTurning on the powerTurn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot; position. The power indicator on the operation panel will blink in green. The [POWER] button does not function while the main power indicator is light in green.After the main power indicator lights up green, press the [POWER] button.Turning off the powerTurn off the power by pressing the [POWER] button, then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot; position.Restarting the machineIn order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted. Restart the machine as instructed by the message on the touch panel (turn off the power by pressing the [POWER] button and then press it again to turn on the power).In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted. In some states of the machine, restarting with the [POWER] button may not make the settings take effect. In this case, turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again.When turning off the main power switch, press the [POWER] button on the operation panel and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot; position. In a sudden case of main power outage, turn the power for the machine back on and then turn it off iTurn off both the [POWER] button and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.Back to top';
 body[7]='01-008.htm';
dai[7]='HOW TO TOUCH THE PANEL';
bun[7]='HOW TO TOUCH THE PANEL HOW TO TOUCH THE PANELOverviewIn addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine supports operations by long touching, flicking and sliding.Operation types TappingTouch the screen with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this operation to select or enter a key, tab or check box.Long touchingTouch the panel with your finger and hold it for a while. Use this operation to display the whole part of text on the action panel.FlickingSlide your finger on the screen and flick it lightly. Use this operation to turn the page in the preview.DraggingSlide your finger while touching the screen. Use this operation to change or delete a page in the preview.SlidingSlide your finger while touching the scroll bar tab. Use this operation to switch the list view.Double tappingTouch the screen twice. Use this operation to enlarge the image in the preview.PinchTouch the screen with two fingers and move them toward each other. This is used to reduce the browser and preview display.SpreadTouch the screen with two fingers and move them away from each other. This is used to enlarge the browser and preview display.Back to top ';
 body[8]='01-009.htm';
dai[8]='HOME SCREEN';
bun[8]='HOME SCREENHOME SCREENOverview Pressing the [Home Screen] button on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions. For procedures for adding and deleting shortcut keys, see &quot;CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN&quot;.To set the home screen for each &quot;favourite operation group list&quot;:In &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Favourite Operation Group List] → [Home Screen List]. (Administrator rights are required.) Perform this setting when user authentication is used.Icon indicating the status of the machineIconMachine statusIconMachine statusPrinter data is being processed.Enlarge display mode is enabled.Printer data is being printed.Eco mode is enabled.Send data exists.A maintenance notification is issued.OSA communication is in progress.A USB device is installed.A mirroring kit is installed.Remote operation is in progress.A mirroring kit is installed.Out of orderSingle-byte alphanumeric character entryA mirroring kit is installed.Under configurationA data security kit is installed. Back to top';
 body[9]='01-010.htm';
dai[9]='SELECTING EACH MODE';
bun[9]='SELECTING EACH MODE SELECTING EACH MODE This section explains the procedure for selecting copy, image send, or other modes.OperationChanging mode from the Home screen[Home Screen] buttonTap the mode icon.Operate for each mode.Changing mode from the mode displayTap on the mode display.Tap for any mode desired. In image send mode, tap to change mode. Operation Add a shortcut keyDelete a shortcut keyMove a shortcut keyChanging the name of a shortcut keyReturning the shortcut keys to the default layoutChanging an MFP display patternTap [Edit Home] on the action panel. If user authentication is not used, enter the administrator password.The screen changes to edit home mode. After editing the shortcut keys in the home screen, tap the [Exit home edit mode] key on the action panel. Home edit mode is exited and you return to the home screen. Add a shortcut key Tap a place without a shortcut key in home edit mode. Tap the function you want to add. A shortcut key with the added function appears in the home screen. Delete a shortcut key Tap the shortcut key you want to delete in home edit mode. Tap the [Delete Key] key on the action panel. A confirmation screen appears. Tap the [Delete] key. The selected shortcut key is deleted from the home screen.After tapping the shortcut key you want to delete in step 1, you can also delete the shortcut key by dragging it to the trash can. Move a shortcut key In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key you want to move. Tap the [Move Key] key on the action panel. Tap the place where you want to move the shortcut key. The selected shortcut key moves. Changing the name of a shortcut key In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key whose name you want to change. Tap [Change Key Name] on the action panel. The soft keyboard appears.When the external keyboard is installed, the external keyboard can be entered the text. Enter the name and tap the [OK] key. The name of the selected shortcut key changes. Returning the shortcut keys to the default layout In home edit mode, tap the [Return Layout to Factory Default] key on the action panel. A confirmation screen appears. Tap the [Reset] key. The shortcut keys return to the default layout. Changing an MFP display pattern Tap [MFP Display Pattern Setting] on the action panel If user authentication is not provided, enter the Administrator Password. Tap a display pattern to be changed This changes the display pattern of the touch panel. Back to top';
 body[10]='01-012.htm';
dai[10]='OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS';
bun[10]='OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYSOPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYSOverview This section describes keys that are frequently used in each mode.Numeric keysTap a number to enter it.To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key. Numeric keys in copy mode The arrangement of the numeric keys differs depending on the mode.[Start] key, [B/W Start] key and [Colour Start] key Tap to perform a copy or send job.Start key in image send mode In copy mode, the [B/W Start] and [Colour Start] keys are displayed.[Cancel Print] key and [Sending Cancelled] key Tap to stop the copy or send job.[CA] key Tap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode.Back to top';
 body[11]='01-013.htm';
dai[11]='OPERATING THE PREVIEW SCREEN';
bun[11]='OPERATING THE PREVIEW SCREENOPERATING THE PREVIEW SCREENOverview In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel.Keys used in the preview screenThis changes the mode to edit mode. Pages of the original can be changed, rotated, or deleted.This reduces the image.This displays the scroll bar for enlargement/reduction operations. Moving the slider to the left reduces the image, and moving the slider to the right enlarges the image.This enlarges the image.This rotates the preview image of whole page in the arrow\'s direction. The printing result is not rotated.This displays preview images of respective pages.This displays thumbnails of preview images.This displays pages in a 3D view.The display position of an image can be moved by dragging it while it is enlarged.To enlarge an image, double-tap it when the preview image is displayed by page.OperationDeleting a pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to deleteTap You can also delete the page by tapping the [Delete the Page] key on the action panel.You can also delete by dragging a page to .To undo the deletion, tap . To redo the deletion, tap .Tap the [Edit End] keyMoving a pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to moveDrag to move the page You can also move the page by tapping the [Move the Page] key on the action panel and then tapping of the destination.Tap the [Edit End] keyRotating a page 180 degreesIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to rotateDrag or to rotate the page You can also rotate the page by tapping the [Rotate 180 Degrees] key on the action panel.Tap the [Edit End] keySetting chapter insertsWhen Multi Shot or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with to the first page.In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the page you want to moveTap is displayed on the page. You can also set chapter inserts by tapping the [Specify Chapter Inserts] key on the action panel.To cancel the Chapter Inserts setting:Tap displayed on the page, or select the page and tap the [Cancel Chapter Inserts of Selected Page.] key on the action panel.Tap the [Edit End] keyInserting a blank pageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap You can also insert a blank page by tapping the [Insert Blank Page] key on the action panel.Tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank pageTap the [Edit End] keyDeleting part of the original imageIn the preview screen, tap to switch to edit modeTap the [Erase Specified Range] key on the action panelFollow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range Specify the erase range and then tap the [Execute] key. To delete the image outside the selected range, tap the [Reverse Erase Range] key on the action panel.On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.] or [Apply This Erase Position to This Page.]As necessary, repeat the steps to specify the erase range and the pages to which it is appliedTap the [Exit] keyChanging the settingsTapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the colour mode and other settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed.Back to top';
 body[12]='01-014.htm';
dai[12]='OPERATING THE ACTION PANEL';
bun[12]='OPERATING THE ACTION PANEL From the action panel, tap the desired function. If the action panel does not appear, tap the action panel tab. OPERATING THE ACTION PANELOverview Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel. Operation The functions displayed on the action panel vary depending on the mode or the functions that have been configured.If too many functions have been configured to be displayed on the action panel, you can slide the panel vertically or tap and to view all.In enlarge display mode, part of the text on the action panel may not be displayed. To display the whole text, long-touch the partially hidden key or slide the tab of the action panel to the left. To always display the action panelIn &quot;Setting mode(administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Display Action Panel as default].Back to top ';
 body[13]='01-015.htm';
dai[13]='FAVOURITE MENU';
bun[13]='FAVOURITE MENUFAVOURITE MENU When you register frequently used functions you have configured for copying or image sending in Favourite, you can quickly call them.OperationRegistering a function in FavouriteDisplay the function you frequently useTap the [Register This Function in Favourite] key on the action panelCalling a function from FavouriteTap Tap the key for the function you want to callFavourites can be registered or edited only by authenticated users and administrators.Unauthenticated users can call and use the favourites registered by administrators. Using the setting mode, you can allow or prohibit users from calling or editing favourites.To edit favourites, tap and then tap [Edit Favourite] on the action panel.Back to top';
 body[14]='01-016.htm';
dai[14]='CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR SETTINGS';
bun[14]='CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR SETTINGSCONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR SETTINGSOverviewYou can display a list of configured functions and check them. On the initial screen of each mode, tapping displays the setting confirmation screen.Back to top';
 body[15]='01-017.htm';
dai[15]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREEN';
bun[15]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREENScanner job with a timer settingJOB MANAGEMENT SCREENIn print mode, you can switch the display in the &quot;Job Queue&quot; screen between the number of printed copies and remaining copies to be printed for each job.Overview Tapping the [Job Management] key on the touch panel displays the job management screen. In the job management screen, you can check reserved jobs, the job in progress, and completed jobs. Touching the tab switches the display to the job management of thePrintLists print jobs such as copying, and printing from a PC.ScanLists send jobs of converted images for e-mail messages and FTP send jobs. File RetrieveYou can tap the [File Retrieve] tab of Job Management and open a file stored with the document filing function.File operations that can be performed are the same as the file operations of document filing.SELECTING A STORED FILE The background of the job management display changes as follows:Green: Job in progressYellow: Warming up/waitingRed: Waiting for error clearingGrey: No job The job management screen has three screens for respective job processing statuses. Tap the [Spool], [Job Queue], or [Complete] key to switch among the screens.Spool list (Only displayed when a print-from computer job is received)Lists print jobs that have been sent from a computer but not yet transferred to the machine. The jobs move to the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed.Job Queue listLists jobs in progress and in the queue for copying, printing from a computer. This list also displays jobs in progress and in the queue for sending image data converted on the machine. The jobs move to the Complete list after printing or sending is complSwitch Display Time on the action panel can be used to select [Display Required Time], [Display Finish Time], or [Display Total Time of Job].The time shown here is an approximate time. The time will vary somewhat depending on conditions of use. Complete listLists jobs that have been completely copied, printed, or sent. Changing the job order If there is a job in progress, an interrupt job can be performed, or a job can be moved down in the queue to change the job order.Tap the key of the job you want to move, and tap a key in "Order Sorting". keyMoves the selected job to the top of the queue. The current job is interrupted and the selected job starts. keyMoves the selected job up one position. When the second job from the top is selected, tapping this key interrupts the current job and starts the selected job. keyMoves the selected job down one position. keyMoves the selected job to the bottom of the queue. When a scanner job with a timer setting is selected, tapping the order change keys moves the job as follows. keyThe timer setting is canceled and the job moves to the position after the job in progress (second from top). keyThe timer setting is canceled and the job moves to the lowest position in the queue (if there are 3 jobs, the 4th position) and keysThese keys cannot be used. The jobs below cannot be moved.Job currently in progress, interrupt copy jobs, list print jobs, jobs when Passing Prohibited is set in the system settings. To switch the display between the numbers of printed copies and remaining copies to be printed for each job:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Operation] → [Switch Sets to Display Remaining/Sets or Progress/Sets]. Back to top';
 body[16]='01-018.htm';
dai[16]='NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS';
bun[16]='NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYSNAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYSOverview The soft keyboard is displayed when you register a file name, program name, folder name, or user name. The soft keyboard shown here is an image for your reference. Different keys may be enabled depending on the actual condition under which you enter characters. If &quot;External Keyboard&quot; is selected in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Set Keyboard Priority], the soft keyboard will not appear.To register words:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Soft Keyboard Template Setting], then register words.Back to top';
 body[17]='01-023.htm';
dai[17]='READING THE JOB LIST';
bun[17]='READING THE JOB LISTREADING THE JOB LISTOverviewTapping the [Job Management] key on the touch panel displays the job list. This section describes the icons displayed in the job list and messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;.Icons indicating the job type Print job (RGB/CMYK) Scan to E-mail job Scan to Network Folder job Tandem copy/print job Reprint job for a file stored by Scan to HDD Reprinting of multiple files (as grouped into a single file) OSA scan job Copy job Scan to FTP job &nbsp; &nbsp; * This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job. Messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;Job in progressDisplayStatus&quot;Printing&quot;Print job in progress&quot;Copying&quot;Copy job in progress&quot;Sending&quot;Sending&quot;Stopped&quot;The job has been stopped&quot;Toner Empty&quot;Toner Empty&quot;Paper Empty&quot;Paper Empty&quot;Jam&quot;Paper jam&quot;Waiting&quot;Waiting&quot;Warming Up&quot;Warming up&quot;Limit&quot;Having reached the account limit&quot;Error&quot;An error occurred while the job was being executedReserved jobDisplayStatus&quot;Waiting&quot;The job is waiting to be executedA day and time is displayedTimer transmission job (the specified time is displayed)Completed jobDisplayStatus&quot;OK&quot;Normal termination&quot;Send OK&quot;Transmission was completed&quot;Stopped&quot;The job was stopped&quot;NGxxxxxx&quot;Transmission / reception was not successful because a communication error occurred (a 6-digit error code appears in xxxxxx.)&quot;Error&quot;An error occurred while the job was being executed Back to top';
 body[18]='01-024.htm';
dai[18]='ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[18]='ADDRESS BOOKADDRESS BOOKOverview &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including e-mail. Registering addresses stored as &quot;Contacts&quot; as well as directly entered addresses as &quot;Group&quot; enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group.Up to 2000 entries in all can be stored for &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot;.The address book can store up to 6000 addresses.One &quot;Contacts&quot; can store up to 500 addresses.One &quot;Group&quot; can store up to 500 addresses.Back to top';
 body[19]='01-025.htm';
dai[19]='SELECTING A CONTACT';
bun[19]='SELECTING A CONTACTSELECTING A CONTACTOverview To display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the initial screen in image send mode. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon in the home screen. &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; registered are enabled for ABC sea If user authentication is enabled, registered contacts can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access.PUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSOperationSelecting &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; Tap to select &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot;. Narrowing by categoryTap the [Search by Category] key to select a category on the screen that appears. After selection, tap . The &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; in the selected category appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Search bNarrowing by job typeTap the [Search by Job Type] key to select a job type on the screen that appears. Tap the [Group] key to narrow by &quot;Group&quot;. After the settings are completed, tap . The &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; for the selected job appear on a l When the address book screen is displayed in image send mode, groups and contacts narrowed down to by the currently selected job type are displayed. For example, when the [Address Book] key is tapped on the e-mail initial screen, groups and contacts haviNarrowing by index Search by ABC to narrow down addresses. For example, tap &quot;C&quot; on the index bar to display &quot;Contacts&quot; stored with search text starting with &quot;C&quot;.Narrowing by keywordTap to display a search screen. Select a target for search, enter a keyword and then tap the [Start Search] key. The search results are listed. For example, if [Item] is [Name], search with a keyword &quot;SH&quot; lists contacts and groups starting withDisplaying in the order of search numbersTapping the [Switch Display] key displays a list in ascending order, descending order, or in the order of search numbers. The display is switched in the order of [Switch Display] (order of search numbers) → [Switch Display ▲] (ascending order according toBack to top';
 body[20]='01-026.htm';
dai[20]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY';
bun[20]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY Store new names or addresses in the address book by directly entering them.OperationFrom the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel or the [Address Control] key in the home screenTap the [Add New] key on the action panelTap the [Contacts] key to enter basic informationBe sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. If user authentication is enabled, the [Public Address Setting] tab appears. Setting address publication enables stored &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are alloPUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSTo register a category name:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting]. Tap the [Enter Address Directly] key on the action panelEnter an address by tapping the [E-mail] tabCheck [Set as Default used] to set that address as the preferred over the others if two or more addresses are stored for &quot;Contacts&quot;.To store FTP or network folder addresses through direct entry, select [Address Book] in &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;.Tap the [Add Address Below] keyTap the [Finish Direct Input.] key on the action panelTap the [End Registration] key on the action panelIf [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Back to top';
 body[21]='01-027.htm';
dai[21]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH';
bun[21]='STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHOverviewSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server.OperationFrom the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Destination] key on the action panel or the [Address Control] key in the home screenTap the [Add New] key on the action panelTap the [Contacts] key to enter basic informationBe sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you aPUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSTo register a category name:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting].Tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panelTap the LDAP server you wish to use If only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take this step. If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password and then tap the [OK] key.AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORDAfter selecting a server, tap .Tap the entry field To change the search target, tap for [Item]. You can select [Name] or [Address/Number].Enter the search condition and then tap the [Start Search] keySelect one address from the search result list and tap the [Enter] key on the action panel To check address information, select the address and tap the [Confirm Address Information] key on the action panel.Check to see that the selected address is displayed, and then tap the [Register Address Below] keyTap the [Finish Direct Input.] key on the action panelTap the [End Registration] key on the action panelIf [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Back to top';
 body[22]='01-028.htm';
dai[22]='STORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGS';
bun[22]='STORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSOverviewSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGS As a new registration, add an address you have entered via image send operations to the address book. FTP addresses cannot be stored in the address book from transmission logs.OperationIn image send mode, tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panelSelect one address you want to register in the address book from the send logs, and then tap the [New Registration with Address Book] key on the action panel When you tap [Additional Registration with Address Book] on the action panel, you can add the address to a contact stored in the address book.Tap the [Contacts] key to enter basic informationBe sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you aPUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSTo register a category name:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting].Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel The address is registered in the address book and the transmission log screen is restored. If [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.Tap the [OK] keyBack to top';
 body[23]='01-029.htm';
dai[23]='STORING GROUPS';
bun[23]='STORING GROUPSSTORING GROUPSOverview A &quot;Group&quot; can be registered by selecting addresses from those already stored as &quot;Contacts&quot;. For this kind of registration, only references to addresses already stored take place, therefore, the total number of registered addresses in OperationFrom the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel or the [Address Control] key in the home screenTap the [Add New] key on the action panelTap the [Group] key to enter basic informationTap the [Select from Address Book] key on the action panel To directly enter a new address for a &quot;Group&quot;, tap the [Enter Address Directly] key on the action panel.On the contact list, tap the &quot;Group&quot; containing the address to be registered, and then tap the [Display Details] key on the action panelTap the address to be registered in the &quot;Group&quot;, and then tap the [Execute] key You can select more than one address. The selection is cleared and the screen closes if you tap before tapping the [Execute] key.Repeat steps 5 and 6 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap the [Enter and Return.] key on the action panel.Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panelBack to top';
 body[24]='01-030.htm';
dai[24]='EDITING / DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[24]='EDITING / DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOKOverviewEDITING / DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK You can edit or delete &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot;.OperationEditing/deleting contacts and groupsFrom the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel or the [Address Control] key in the home screenSelect the &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item you wish to edit, and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel To delete a &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.When editing, you can only select one &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item at a time.When deleting, you can select more than one &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item at a time.If you have logged in as the administrator, you can delete all addresses stored in the address book by using the [Delete All] key that appears on the action panel.Editing &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot;You can change basic information such as names and categories and you can also add addresses.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING GROUPSYou can change the publicity scope.PUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERS The address type cannot be changed.Editing/deleting addressesFrom the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel or the [Address Control] key in the home screenSelect a &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item, and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel Only one contact or group can be selected. If more than one item is selected, the [Edit] key does not appear.Tap the [Registered Address Review] key on the action panelSelect an address from the list of registered addresses and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel To delete an address, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.When editing, you can only select one address at a time.When deleting, you can select more than one address at a time. To check address information, tap the [Confirm Address Information] key. You cannot edit or delete an address for a job in a job queue.Edit the address After editing, tap the [Enter and Return.] key on the action panel.Back to top';
 body[25]='01-031.htm';
dai[25]='PUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERS';
bun[25]='PUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSPUBLICIZING CONTACTS TO SPECIFIC USERSOverview If user authentication is enabled, &quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, storedScope for publicizing addressesDescriptionPublic to All&quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; are publicized to all users of the machine.User&quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; are only publicized to the user. Registered addresses are preferentially displayed as &quot;personal contacts&quot; in the user\'s address book.Organization/Group&quot;Contacts&quot; and &quot;Group&quot; are only publicized to the specified groups. For each &quot;Contacts&quot; or &quot;Group&quot; item, up to eight groups can be specified as those to whom the item is publicized.OperationLimiting the scope to the userOn the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] keyCheck that the [User List] tab is checked and your user name is selected After the settings are completed, tap . If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list.To register a user:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [User List]. Limiting the scope to the specified user groupOn the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] keyTap the [Organization/Group] tab and select a user group to which you want to publicize addresses After the settings are completed, tap .To register a user group:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Organization /Group List].Back to top';
 body[26]='01-032.htm';
dai[26]='PERIPHERAL DEVICES';
bun[26]='PERIPHERAL DEVICESLong paper feeding trayPERIPHERAL DEVICESConnection moduleOverviewHigh capacity stacker Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.Paper cartPeripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.Staple cartridge(As of March 2013)Product nameProduct numberDescriptionLarge capacity trayMX-LC12Additional tray. A maximum of 3,500 sheets of paper can be placed.MX-LCX3 NAdditional tray. A maximum of 3,000 sheets of paper can be placed.Large capacity traysMX-LC13Additional tray. A maximum of 5,000 sheets of paper can be placed.Multi bypass trayMX-MF10Additional tray. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be placed. Install this tray in the machine.MX-MF11Additional tray. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper can be placed. Install this tray on the large capacity trays. MX-LT10 When using long paper, the long paper is loaded in the bypass tray. Exit tray unitMX-TR14Output tray to be installed in the right of the machine. Paper pass unitMX-RB14This unit is required for installing large capacity trays. MX-RB17 This unit is required to facilitate connection of two large capacity trays. Exit tray cabinetMX-TU14Output tray to be installed in the centre of the machine. This unit is required when a finisher or saddle finisher is not installed.FinisherMX-FN21Output device that enables the use of the staple function and offset function. A maximum of 100 sheets of paper can be stapled.Saddle stitch finisherMX-FN22Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset function and pamphlet copy function. A maximum of 100 sheets of paper can be stapled. MX-ST10 This unit is useful when you output a large number of copies. A maximum of 5,000 sheets of paper can be output. MX-CA10 This is a cart that is installed in the high capacity stacker. It is useful when you carry a large number of output sheets.One unit of this product is supplied with MX-ST10, and this is for addition. Punch module (100-sheet punching)MX-PN13A, MX-PN13B, MX-PN13C, MX-PN13DThis unit punches holes in copies and other output. A finisher or saddle finisher is required.Trimming moduleMX-TM10This unit trims the excess portions of saddle-stitched sheets. A saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) is required.Folding unitMX-FD10This unit folds and outputs paper. A finisher (100-sheet stapling) or saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) is required.InserterMX-CF11This unit inserts covers and insertion sheets. This unit can also feed paper to a finisher (100-sheet stapling) or saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) for finishing.Curl correction unitMX-RB15This unit corrects curls in printed paper. This unit is required for installing a finisher (100-sheet stapling), saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling), folding unit, or inserter.Paper pass unitMX-RB12This unit is required for installing a finisher or saddle finisher.MX-RB13This unit is required for directly installing a finisher (100-sheet stapling) or saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) and inserter.Barcode Font KitMX-PF10Adds barcode fonts to the machine.XPS expansion kitMX-PUX1This kit can be used as an XPS compatible printer. Please consult your dealer for details.Mirroring kitMX-EB15Stores a copy of data in a separate place.Application Integration ModuleMX-AMX1The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.Enhanced compression kitMX-EB11Saves a scanned document in the High Compression PDF format. High Compression PDF results in a smaller size than regular PDF.Application Communication ModuleMX-AMX2This links the machine to an external application over a network.KeyboardMX-KB13This is a keyboard that is integrated with the machine. When not in use, it can be stored under the operation panel.Web browsing expansion kitMX-AM10Internet access is enabled for viewing Web pages.Stamp unitAR-SU1This stamps each original page after it is scanned in image send mode. An automatic document feeder is required.Stamp cartridgeAR-SV1Two Verification Stamp cartridges are included. MX-SCX2Staples paper. A finisher or saddle finisher is required.MX-SCX1Saddle stitches paper. A saddle finisher is required. Status indicator MX-SL10 NThe status of the machine is indicated.Some options may not be available in some countries and regions.Back to top';
 body[27]='01-034.htm';
dai[27]='FINISHER (100-SHEET STAPLING)';
bun[27]='FINISHER (100-SHEET STAPLING)FINISHEROverview This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper and the staple sort function that staples each set of prints.Installing an optional hole punch module allows you to punch holes in printed paper.Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Staple compilerThis temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.&times;Output trayStapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, SRA3, 13" x 19", 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; &times;Top coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Front coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam. Do not place heavy objects on the finisher or press down on the finisher (100-sheet stapling).Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.A finisher (100-sheet stapling) cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle finisher. Supplies The finisher (100-sheet stapling) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;three cartridges) MX-SCX2Replacing the cartridge When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.Open the front coverSqueeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then outRemove the empty staple cartridge When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed.Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.Install a staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.Close the front cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Discarding staple wasteWhen a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced.The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box.Follow the steps below to discard staple waste.Open the front coverGrasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple wasteDo not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers.Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag. The staples may create holes in the bag.Replace the staple waste box Make sure that the staple waste box is replaced correctly.Close the front coverBack to top ';
 body[28]='01-036.htm';
dai[28]='SADDLE FINISHER (100-SHEET STAPLING)';
bun[28]='SADDLE FINISHER (100-SHEET STAPLING)Back to top SADDLE FINISHEROverview This includes the offset function that outputs sorted sheets of paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that staples the centre of the sheets and folds the sheets in hInstalling an optional hole punch module allows you to punch holes in printed paper.Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up. &times; Staple compilerThis temporarily stacks paper to be stapled. &times; Output trayStapled and offset output is delivered to this tray.The tray is slidable. Extend the tray for printing on large-size paper (A3W, A3, B4, SRA3, 13" x 19", 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; &times; Saddle stitch traySaddle-stitched output is delivered to this tray. &times; Top coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed. &times; Front coverOpen this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam. Do not place heavy objects on the finisher or press down on the finisher (100-sheet stapling).Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the tray may move up and down.A saddle finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher. Supplies The saddle finisher requires the following staple cartridge:Finisher unitStaple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;three cartridges) MX-SCX2 Saddle stitch unitStaple cartridge (approx. 2,000 staples per cartridge&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;four cartridges) MX-SCX3 Replacing the cartridge (finisher unit)When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.Open the front coverSqueeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then outRemove the empty staple cartridge When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed.Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.Install a staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.Close the front cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacing the cartridge (saddle stitch unit) When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge.Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher. Do not replace removed output back in the output tray.Open the front coverGrasp the handle on the saddle stitch unit and pull it slowly out until it stopsLower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the left.Replace both staple cartridges. Press the lock button to open the release lever Remove the empty staple cartridge Press the lock button to open the release lever.Install a new staple cartridgePush the staple case in until it clicks into place.Press the lock button to open the release leverPush the staple case firmly back inAlign of the staple case with of the unit. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.Push the saddle stitch unit in Close the front coverMake a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.Discarding staple waste (finisher unit)When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced.The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box.Follow the steps below to discard staple waste.Open the front coverGrasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull out the box, and discard the staple wasteDo not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers.Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag. The staples may create holes in the bag.Replace the staple waste box Make sure that the staple waste box is replaced correctly.Close the front coverDiscarding paper wasteWhen folded paper is trimmed in trimmer settings, paper waste is generated. Paper waste is collected in the paper waste box. Follow the operation procedure to remove paper waste.Using the trimmer function trims a side drop at the time of folding, creating a neat finish.Open the front coverGrasp the paper waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the paper waste Discard the paper waste into a plastic bag or other container, being careful not to let any waste scatter.Gently push the box back inClose the front cover ';
 body[29]='01-038.htm';
dai[29]='PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN12A, MX-PN12B, MX-PN12C, MX-PN12D)';
bun[29]='PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN12A, MX-PN12B, MX-PN12C, MX-PN12D)PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN12A, MX-PN12B, MX-PN12C, MX-PN12D)Overview The punch module can be installed on a finisher or saddle finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. A saddle finisher or finisher is required to install the punch module.Discarding punch waste Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste.Open the front coverGrasp the punch waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter.Gently push the box back inClose the front coverBack to top';
 body[30]='01-039.htm';
dai[30]='FOLDING UNIT';
bun[30]='FOLDING UNITFOLDING UNITOverview A folding unit can be used for Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, and Half Fold.A finisher or saddle finisher is required to install the folding unit.Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Top cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Bottom cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Output tray of folding unit Folded output is delivered to this tray.Do not place heavy objects on the folding unit or press down on the folding unit.Back to top';
 body[31]='01-039a.htm';
dai[31]='INSERTER';
bun[31]='INSERTERINSERTEROverview Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher or saddle finisher to staple, punch or fold the paper. For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the inserter, see the &quot;SPECIFICATIONS OF INSERTER&quot; in the &quot;Quick Start Guide&quot;.Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up.&times;Paper tray (upper/lower)Insert paper or printed paper. A maximum of 200 sheets of paper can be loaded into each tray.&times;Bypass tray extensionExtend this when loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R.&times;Paper guidePush the lock lever to adjust to the paper size.&times;Paper insertion unit cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Paper transfer unit front cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;Paper transfer unit rear coverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed.&times;CoverOpen this cover to remove a paper misfeed.Back to top';
 body[32]='01-039a_01.htm';
dai[32]='HIGH CAPACITY STACKER';
bun[32]='HIGH CAPACITY STACKERHIGH CAPACITY STACKEROverviewA large number of copies can be output to the high capacity stacker. A maximum of 250 sheets of paper can be output to the top tray and a maximum of 5000 sheets can be output to the stacker tray. You can connect up to two high capacity stackers.When the paper size is B5, B5R, A5R or 5-1/2&quot; x 8-1/2&quot; up to 2500 sheets can be output. Do not load sheets of different sizes on the stacker tray.Function names Tap the name to make its details pop up.×Top trayA maximum of 250 sheets of paper can be output to this tray.×Stacker trayA maximum of 5000 sheets of paper can be output to this tray. Output sheets are delivered to the paper cart in the stacker tray. The paper cart helps you carry a large number of sheets.×Tray up/down buttonPress this button to remove output sheets from the stacker tray. The tray moves down to allow you to remove the paper cart.×Tray up/down indicatorThis indicator blinks while the tray is moving up or down, and lights up when the tray completes its descent. This indicator also lights up if a paper jam occurs in the stacker.×Output indicatorThis indicator blinks while output sheets are being delivered to the stacker tray.×Error indicatorThis indicator lights up when only the high capacity stacker is not able to be used due to an error, and blinks when the entire system is not able to be used. Setting additional paper output to the stacker trayIn setting mode, you can specify whether to additionally output sheets for new jobs if the stacker tray of the high capacity stacker already contains output sheets.To set additional paper output to the stacker tray, open &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, and select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Stacker Settings] → [Stack Setting for Additional Jobs].Setting automatic stacker tray switchingWhen two high capacity stackers are connected, you can specify in setting mode whether to switch to the other high capacity stacker to continue paper output if the current one becomes full.To set automatic stacker tray switching, open &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, and select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Stacker Settings] → [Auto Switching Setting].Removing output sheets from the stacker trayPress the tray down buttonThe tray up/down indicator blinks. When the tray completes its descent, the tray up/down indicator lights up. During paper output to the stacker tray, the tray does not move down even if you press the tray down button.Open the door of the stacker tray and pull out the paper cart When you are going to carry a large number of output sheets, install the paper cart paper holder to prevent the sheets from falling along the way.Remove the paper cart paper holderInstall the paper cart paper holder onto the paper cartAfter you have carried the output sheets, place the paper cart back in the stacker tray Paper cannot be output to the stacker tray unless the paper cart is placed in position in the stacker tray.Back to top';
 body[33]='01-039a_02.htm';
dai[33]='STATUS INDICATORS';
bun[33]='STATUS INDICATORSSTATUS INDICATORSOverviewThese indicators show the status of the machine. The green indicator lights up or blinks according to the job management of the machine. The red indicator lights up or blinks when an error occurs. It lights up when an error occurs but the machine is stillFunction names Tap the name to make its details pop up.×Indicator (Red)The red indicator lights up or blinks when an error occurs. ×Indicator (Green)The green indicator lights up or blinks according to the job management of the machine. In Auto Power Shut-Off mode, the status indicators go off.To change the conditions for the status indicators to light up or blink:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Status Indicator Setting]. ';
 body[34]='01-040.htm';
dai[34]='REMOTE OPERATION USING YOUR COMPUTER';
bun[34]='REMOTE OPERATION USING YOUR COMPUTER Before you can use the remote operation function, the following preparation is required.REMOTE OPERATION USING YOUR COMPUTER Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address.OverviewRemotely operate (remote operation) the machine from your computer. You can display the machine\'s operation panel on your computer\'s display to operate the machine. The remote operation function can only be used on one computer at a time.PreparationIn &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Remote Operation Settings] → [Remote Software Operation] and select [Allowed] for [Operational Authority].Connect the machine to the network.Install a VNC application software (recommended VNC software: RealVNC) in your computer.OperationStart the VNC viewerEnter the IP address of the machine in the &quot;Server&quot; entry boxClick the [OK] buttonFollow the prompts on the operation panel of the machine to permit the connection When the machine is connected to a VNC application software, appears at the top of the machine\'s touch panel. If you wish to disconnect, exit the VNC application software or tap . Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine. However, you cannot enter values in series by continuously clicking the key.To set the operational authority for the remote operation function:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Remote Operation Settings].Back to top';
 body[35]='01-041.htm';
dai[35]='APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE';
bun[35]='APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULEAPPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULEOverviewThe application communication module is a peripheral device required to use &quot;standard applications&quot; on the machine. When a previously registered standard application is selected the machine retrieves the operation screen of the standard application.To set a standard application in &quot;Setting mode&quot;:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [External Applications Settings] → [Standard Applications].OperationTap the [Sharp OSA] key in the home screen If no standard applications have been stored, the key cannot be tapped.Select a standard application If two or more standard applications have been stored, the screen for selecting a standard application will appear. Tap the standard application that you wish to use. If only one standard application has been stored, connection to the standard applicatioConnect the machine to the standard application Sharp Open Systems Architecture (OSA) is an architecture that enables (external) business applications to be directly connected to a digital mu ';
 body[36]='01-042.htm';
dai[36]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE';
bun[36]='EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULEEXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULEOverview The external account module, a peripheral device enables you to use an &quot;external account application&quot; for centralized account management of a MFP on a network.The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.An &quot;external account application&quot; can be used in &quot;external authentication mode&quot; or &quot;external count mode&quot;.When &quot;external authentication mode&quot; is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started. When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application for counts by authenticated user.When &quot;external count mode&quot; is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used. However, the exExternal account application setup After setting an external application in &quot;Setting Mode&quot;, restart the machine to enable the setting. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.To set up external account application:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [External Applications Settings] → [External Account Application Settings]. Operation in external account mode The following describes operation in the two modes for using an external account application.External authentication modeWhen the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is tapped to run a job in the job management complete scThe user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode. However, &quot;User Registration&quot;, &quot;User Count Display&quot;, &quot;User Count Reset&quot;, &quot;User Information Print&quot;, and &quot;The Number of UserThe mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.To enable external authentication mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [External Applications Settings] → [External Account Application Settings].If login fails:If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating correctly. In that case, terminate external account mode forcibly.To forcibly terminate external account mode:In &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [External Applications Settings] → [External Account Application Settings]. (Administrator rights are required.) If termination in Setting mode (Web version) fails, terminate it foExternal count modeUnlike in external authentication mode, when the machine is started in &quot;external count mode&quot;, the login screen of the external account application is not displayed after the machine has started up. Only the job result is sent to the external accTo enable external count mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [External Applications Settings] → [External Account Application Settings] → [External Account Control].Back to top';
 body[37]='01-043.htm';
dai[37]='ECO FUNCTION';
bun[37]='ECO FUNCTIONECO FUNCTIONOverviewThe Eco functions are installed on the machine to reduce power consumption. You can use a variety of Eco functions to suit the aims and needs of your application.Types of Eco functionsEco functionDescriptionEco ScanNon-printing functions can be operated while the fusing unit is kept Off.PREHEAT MODEThis mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state.AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERWhen the machine is not operated, this mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in a low power consumption state.AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODEThe machine returns from Auto Power Shut-Off when it performs a printing job. The machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off after completing the print job.The Eco function must be configured from &quot;Energy Save&quot; in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.This function can also be used to set the times for turning the power on and off to reduce power consumption. For more information, see &quot;POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING&quot;.It can control transition to Auto Power Shut-Off by creating a pattern list based on the analysis of usage of the machine. For more information, see &quot;ENERGY SAVING PATTERN LIST&quot;.Eco Setting There are three modes of &quot;Eco Setting&quot;; &quot;Normal Mode&quot;, &quot;Eco Mode&quot;, and &quot;Following the Power Management&quot;. For the Eco function, it is convenient to use &quot;Normal Mode&quot; or &quot;Eco Mode&quot; to allow simultEco functionNormal ModeEco ModeEco ScanOn(Sending Modes Only)On(All Modes Except Copy)Auto Power Shut-Off TimerChange transition time by time of day.:AutoFix transition time.:On(1min.)As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.OffOnPreheat Mode Setting1min.1min.Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat modeOnOnTo change the Eco setting:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting].Back to top';
 body[38]='01-044.htm';
dai[38]='ECO SCAN';
bun[38]='ECO SCANECO SCANOverview Non-print functions such as image sending and scan to HDD can be executed while the fusing unit is kept Off.To set Eco scan:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Eco Scan Setting].Back to top';
 body[39]='01-045.htm';
dai[39]='PREHEAT MODE';
bun[39]='PREHEAT MODEPREHEAT MODEOverview This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off TimTo set preheat mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Preheat Mode Setting]. A message appears 15 seconds before Preheat Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap [Continue]. The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time.If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters preheat mode.To set display of the message:Set in [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Display message for delay of entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shutoff] in "Setting mode (administrators) ".Back to top';
 body[40]='01-046.htm';
dai[40]='AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER';
bun[40]='AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERAUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMEROverview This mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state. Auto Power Shut-Off Timer will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing Auto Power Shut-Off Timer is also activated by holding down the [Power Save] button while the [Power Save] button is not lit. This mode is cleared when print data is being received is being output or when the [Power Save] button is pressed while it is blinking.To set Auto Power Shut-Off Timer:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Auto Power Shut-Off]. A message appears 15 seconds before Auto Power Shut-Off Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap the [Continue] button.The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal oTo set display of the message:Set in [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Display message for delay of entry into Preheat Mode / Auto Power Shutoff] in "Setting mode (administrators) ".Back to top';
 body[41]='01-047.htm';
dai[41]='AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE';
bun[41]='AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODEAS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODEOverview Printing in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer after completing the print job.To set &quot;As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode&quot;:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.].Back to top';
 body[42]='01-048.htm';
dai[42]='ENERGY SAVING PATTERN LIST';
bun[42]='ENERGY SAVING PATTERN LISTENERGY SAVING PATTERN LISTOverview This function controls transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for the use frequency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period.To configure the energy saving pattern list:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Energy Saving Pattern List].Back to top';
 body[43]='01-049.htm';
dai[43]='SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGS';
bun[43]='SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGSSPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGSOverview When you must have the machine perform exceptionally many print jobs or other special operation on a certain day, you can specify the day as a &quot;Specific Date&quot; and define an energy saving pattern only for that day. To specify operation for the specific date:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power Management Setting] → [Specific Date Operation Settings].Back to top';
 body[44]='01-050.htm';
dai[44]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING';
bun[44]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGPOWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGOverview Use this function to set the times for turning the power on and off for the machine to reduce power consumption.Setting Power ON/OFF Scheduling FunctionIn &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Energy Save] → [Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting].Back to top';
 body[45]='01-052.htm';
dai[45]='AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER';
bun[45]='AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBERAUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBEROverview The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine. When starting the machine, the login screen appears.If an incorrect user number is entered:Enter a user number again. If [A Warning when Login Fails] is enabled in the system settings, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator to check the uTo release the operation panel lock:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] to release the lock.To set [A Warning when Login Fails]:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [A Warning when Login Fails].To register a user number:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [User List]. Check with the administrator of the machine for the user number.OperationEnter your user number (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys Each entered digit will be displayed as &quot;&quot;.If the user number is 8 digits, login takes place after the user number is entered.Tap the [OK] key If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed.When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.To limit the number of pages that a user can use:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Page Limit Group List] → [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel].To hide the number of pages that can be used after login:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, disable [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login].To change the message display time:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Message Time Setting].To exit the machine operation, tap [Logout]Back to top';
 body[46]='01-053.htm';
dai[46]='AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD';
bun[46]='AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORDAUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORDOverview This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears.Different items may appear in the screen when LDAP authentication is used.When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method.If an incorrect login name or an incorrect password is entered:Enter a login name or password again. If [A Warning when Login Fails] is enabled in the system settings, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect login name or password is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine adminiTo release the operation panel lock:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel]to release the lock.To set [A Warning when Login Fails]:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [A Warning when Login Fails] → [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel].To store a user name:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [User List]. Also register detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the mOperationEnter the login nameEntering using the soft keyboard If user name registration has not been performed in setting mode, a user only using LDAP authentication should tap the [Login Name] text box and enter the login name using the soft keyboard. Selecting from a list Tap the [ LDAP authentication is used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area network).Enter the password Enter the password from the soft keyboard. If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that is stored with your LDAP server login name. Each entered character will be displayed as &quot;&quot;. After entering the password, tap the [OK] ke When registering the LDAP server, change the information for [Auth to] as required.When selecting from the User List screen:The LDAP server you are connecting to has been registered upon user registration, and so the target server to which authentication should be directed appears when the login name is selected. Go to step 3.When entering from the soft keyboard:Tap [Auth to] and select the LDAP server to log in.Tap the [OK] key If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed. To limit the number of pages that a user can use:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Page Limit Group List].To hide the number of pages that can be used after login:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, disable [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login].To change the message display time:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Message Time Setting].To exit the machine operation, tap [Logout]Back to top';
 body[47]='01-055.htm';
dai[47]='NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS';
bun[47]='NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYSNAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYSOverviewThe following shows the locations and names of paper trays.When a large capacity tray is installedWhen large capacity trays are installedWhen two large capacity trays are installed Back to top';
 body[48]='01-056.htm';
dai[48]='THE DEFINITION OF &quot;R&quot; IN PAPER SIZE';
bun[48]='THE DEFINITION OF &quot;R&quot; IN PAPER SIZETHE DEFINITION OF &quot;R&quot; IN PAPER SIZEOverview To indicate paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientation, &quot;R&quot; is added to the end of the paper size. The &quot;R&quot; indicates that the paper is set in the landscape orientation. Paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientation Paper that can only be set in the landscape orientationA4, B5, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot; A3W, A3, B4, 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;Paper set in the landscape orientationPaper set in the portrait orientationBack to top';
 body[49]='01-057.htm';
dai[49]='APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES';
bun[49]='APPLICABLE PAPER TYPESAPPLICABLE PAPER TYPESOverview This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. It also explains about the print side when loading paper into the paper tray. Heavy paper, thin paper, and other types of paper except plain paper are referred to as special media.Various type of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine.Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of Sharp standard paper.Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.The use of non-recommended or non-usable paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper, check whether printing can be performed properly.Usable paperSpecifications of plain paper, heavy paper and thin paperPlain paperSharp standard paper80&nbsp;g/m2 (21 lbs.). For paper specifications, see &quot;SHARP STANDARD PAPER SPECIFICATIONS&quot; in the &quot;Quick Start Guide&quot;.Non-Sharp standard plain paper60&nbsp;g/m2 to 105&nbsp;g/m2 (16 lbs. to 28 lbs.)Heavy paper106&nbsp;g/m2 to 300&nbsp;g/m2 (28 lbs. to 79 lbs.)Thin paper55&nbsp;g/m2 to 59&nbsp;g/m2 (13 lbs. to 16 lbs.)Recycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Types of paper that can be set in each trayTRAY 1/2Tray 3Tray 4Bypass - TrayTray 5Large capacity tray(MX-LC12 / MX-LCX3 N)LARGE CAPACITY TRAYSBypass tray(for large capacity trays)Inserter(Upper / Lower)Tray 5/7Tray 6/8Thin paper---Yes-YesYesYes-Plain paperYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesRecycled paperYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesColourYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesLetter headYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesPre-printedYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesPre-punchedYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesHeavy paper 1: 106&nbsp;g/m2 to 176&nbsp;g/m2 (28 lbs. to 46 lbs.)-YesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesHeavy paper 2: 177 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (47 lbs. to 58 lbs.)-YesYesYesYesYesYesYesYesHeavy paper 3: 221&nbsp;g/m2 to 256&nbsp;g/m2 (59 lbs. to 68 lbs.)---Yes-YesYes--Heavy paper 4: 257&nbsp;g/m2 to 300&nbsp;g/m2 (69 lbs. to 79 lbs.)---Yes-YesYes--Embossed--YesYes-YesYes--Tab paper--YesYes-YesYesYes-Transparency film--YesYes-YesYesYes-Labels--YesYes-YesYes--Glossy paper---Yes-YesYes--Envelope---Yes---Yes- Yes: Can be used-: Cannot be used For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into each tray of the machine, see &quot;MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS/COPY SPECIFICATIONS&quot; and &quot;PAPER TRAY SETTINGS&quot; in &quot;Setting mode&quot; in the &quot;Quick StartRecycled paper, coloured paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.Setting orientation of the print sideThe setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used.TrayIn normal statusWith letter head or pre-printed paper setTrays 1 - 4Facing upFacing downBypass tray , tray 5, tray 6, tray7, tray8Facing downFacing up When [Disabling of Duplex] is set for &quot;Letter Head&quot; or &quot;Pre-Printed&quot;, set the print side in the same orientation as for the ordinary operation.To set [Disabling of Duplex]:In Setting mode (administrator), select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex].Paper that cannot be usedSpecial media for an ink jet printer(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)Carbon paper or thermal paperPasted paperPaper with clipsPaper with fold marksTorn paperOil feed transparency filmThin paper less than 55&nbsp;g/m2 (13 lbs.)Heavy paper as thick as 301&nbsp;g/m2 (80 lbs.) or moreIrregularly shaped paperStapled paperDamp paperCurled paperPaper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by another printer or multifunction devicePaper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture absorptionNon-recommended paperIron-on transfer paperJapanese paperPerforated paperBack to top';
 body[50]='01-058.htm';
dai[50]='TRAY 1/2';
bun[50]='TRAY 1/2TRAY 1/2OverviewA maximum of 1,200 sheets of A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) paper can be loaded into tray 1. A maximum of 800 sheets of A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;)paper can be loaded into tray 2. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in &quot;Setting mode&quot;. An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.To check the type and size of paper:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings]. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.OperationPull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops. Keep holding the handle until the lock is released.Lift the feed roller, and place paper into the tray Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1,200 sheets for tray 1, or maximum of 800 sheets for tray 2). Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.Lower the feed roller, and gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Changing the paper sizeRemove the paper size guideWith the base of the tray pressed all the way down, hold down the hook at the bottom on the paper size guide and pull the paper size guide up slightly.Before changing the paper size of tray 2, raise the paper guide.Attach the paper size guide and transparent sheet appropriately for the size of paper to be used(1) Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the appropriate slot on the base of the tray.Align the paper size guide with the slot for the paper size to be used (indicated by the paper size mark).(2) Align the holes at the top of the paper size guide with the protrusions that secure the paper size guide. Align with the holes for the paper size to be used (indicated by the paper size mark).(3) Push in the paper guide so that it locks into place.Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the bottom locks into place. (You will hear a "click" when the hook locks.) Move the paper size guide slightly to verify that it has locked into place.When attaching the paper size guide, place the transparent sheet in direct contact with the base of the tray in the correct orientation as shown. The slot or hole with the "LT" mark is for 8-1/2" x 11" size. When attaching the paper size guide, make sure that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to the same paper size. If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding and misfeeds will result.Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the far paper guide to the paper size to be used.Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same size as the near paper guide.When removing and attaching the far paper size guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the machine.Adjusting only one paper guide may result in skewed feeding or misfeeds.Set the paper size and paper typeBe sure to set the paper size and paper type by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" → [Paper Tray Settings].If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.Back to top';
 body[51]='01-058a.htm';
dai[51]='TRAY 3/4';
bun[51]='TRAY 3/4TRAY 3/4OverviewA maximum of 500 sheets of paper from A3W to B5R (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot; to 7-1/4&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;10-1/2&quot;R) can be loaded into tray 3. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from A3W to A5R (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot; to 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;R) can be loaded into tray 4.Other than plain paper, special media such as transparency film and tab paper can be loaded into tray 4. To load tab paper, the dedicated guide must be installed. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in &quot;Setting mode&quot;. An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds.To check the type and size of paper:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings]. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.OperationPull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops. To load paper, go to step 3. Keep holding the handle until the lock is released.Adjust guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded(1) Squeeze the lock knob on guide plate A and slide to the desired paper size.(2) Squeeze the lock knob on guide plate B and slide to the desired paper size.If slid to a standard paper size, guide plate B will lock automatically.(3) For a non-standard paper size, after sliding guide plate B to the desired size, press the lock button (C). A non-standard size of paper can only be loaded in tray 4. A non-standard size of paper cannot be loaded in tray 3.Insert the paper into the tray Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets). Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Loading tab paper into tray 4Remove the tab paper guideThe guide is stored inside tray 4.Pull out the tray and install the guideAdjust the guide plates to the triangle mark position. Install the guide so that it may cover the guide plates. Adjust the guide plates in the tray to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded.Insert the tab paper into the tray Place the tab paper with the print side facing down so that the tab is to the left. See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper.Gently push the tray into the machine, and set the paper type to tab paper Using &quot;Paper Tray Settings&quot; in the system settings, set the paper type to tab paper.To set the paper type to tab paper:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings].Back to top';
 body[52]='01-059.htm';
dai[52]='LARGE CAPACITY TRAY';
bun[52]='LARGE CAPACITY TRAYLARGE CAPACITY TRAYOverview Use the large capacity tray for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray.Large capacity tray (MX-LC12) stores a maximum of 3,500 sheets of A4, B5 and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot; paper.Large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N) stores a maximum of 3,000 sheets of paper from A3W (13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;) to B5 (8-1/2&quot;11&quot;R).When changing the paper size, contact your dealer or authorised service representative. If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.To check the type of paper to be set in the tray:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings]. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.OperationLarge capacity tray (MX-LC12)Pull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops.Place the paper in the centre of the paper table Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3,500 sheets). Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.Large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N)Press the operation buttonThe operation button blinks, and the tray paper table goes down to the paper loading position. Wait until the operation button light goes off. Do not pull out the tray until the light goes off. If you pull out the tray forcibly while the button lights up or blinks, a machine failure may be resulted.Pull out the paper trayGently pull the tray out until it stops.Place the paper in the centre of the paper tableLoad the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3,000 sheets). When a certain volume of paper is loaded, the paper table automatically goes down slightly and stops. Repeat this operation in Caution:Do not insert your hand into the space inside the paper table when you load paper. Do not insert spare paper or objects into the space inside the tray.Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. The paper table goes up after the tray is pushed in. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes up. The button lights up when the paper table has gone up.Changing the paper size for the large capacity tray (MX-LCX3 N)Loosen the paper guide screwSlide the plate of the paper guideSlide the plate until the red line appears at the centre of the size window of the plate.Adjust the paper guide to the paper size that will be usedSlide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of the plate.Secure the paper guide(1) Slide the plate of the paper guide.Slide the plate until the paper size to be used appears in the size window of the plate.(2) Tighten the paper guide screw.Repeat steps 1 through 4 to adjust the far paper guide to the paper size to be usedBe sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same paper size as the near paper guide.Adjusting only one paper guide may result in skewed feeding or misfeeds.Change the right paper guide to the paper size to be used(1) While holding up the paper guide lock, slide the paper guide to the paper size to be used. (2) Release the paper guide lock.(3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right and left so that it locks into place. You will hear a &quot;click&quot; when the paper guide locks.Set the paper size and paper typeBe sure to set the paper size and paper type by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" → [Paper Tray Settings].If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.Back to top';
 body[53]='01-059a.htm';
dai[53]='LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS';
bun[53]='LARGE CAPACITY TRAYSTighten both far and near paper guide screws.LARGE CAPACITY TRAYSOverview Use the large capacity trays for outputting massive prints that cannot be processed using the regular tray. The large capacity trays store a maximum of 5,000 sheets of paper (2,500 sheets for tray 5 and 2,500 sheets for tray 6) from A3W (13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;) to B5R (7-1/4&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;10-1/2&quot;R). When changing the paper sizOther than plain paper, special media such as tab paper and transparency film can be loaded into the large capacity trays. To load tab paper, the dedicated guide must be installed.If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.To check the type of paper to be set in the tray:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings]. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.OperationPress the operation buttonThe operation button blinks, and the tray paper table goes down to the paper loading position. Wait until the operation button light goes off. Do not pull out the tray until the light goes off. If you pull out the tray forcibly while the button lights up or blinks, a machine failure may be resulted.Pull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops.Load the paper Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 2,500 sheets). Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.Gently push the paper tray into the machinePush the tray firmly all the way into the machine. The paper table goes up after the tray is pushed in. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes up. The button lights up when the paper table has gone up.Loading the tab paperRemove the tab paper guideThe guide is stored in the left side of the tray.Insert the tab paper into the trayPlace the tab paper with the print side facing down so that the tab is to the right. See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper.Place the tab paper guidePlace the guide on the top of the tab paper.Gently push the tray into the machine, and set the paper type to tab paper Using &quot;Paper Tray Settings&quot; in the system settings, set the paper type to tab paper.To set the paper type to tab paper:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings].Changing the paper sizeLoosen the paper guide screwSlide the plate of the paper guideSlide the plate until the red line appears at the centre of the size window of the plate.Both near and far plates slides when you slide one of those.Adjust the paper guide to the paper size that will be usedSlide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of the plate.Both near and far plates slides when you slide one of those.Secure the paper guide(1) Slide the plate of the paper guide.Slide the plate until the paper size to be used appears in the size window of the plate.Both near and far plates slides when you slide one of those.(2) Tighten the paper guide screw.Change the right paper guide to the paper size to be used(1) While holding the paper guide lock, slide the paper guide to the paper size to be used.(2) Release the paper guide lock. (3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right and left so that it locks into place.You will hear a &quot;click&quot; when the paper guide locks.Set the paper size and paper typeBe sure to set the paper size and paper type by selecting [System Settings] in "Setting mode" → [Paper Tray Settings].If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.Back to top';
 body[54]='01-060.htm';
dai[54]='BYPASS TRAY';
bun[54]='BYPASS TRAYBYPASS TRAYOverview Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media.A maximum of 100 sheets of paper can be loaded into the bypass tray (on the machine), or a maximum of 500 sheets can be loaded in the bypass tray (on the large capacity trays), and continuous printing is possible as is the case with other trays.For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray, see &quot;MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS/COPY SPECIFICATIONS&quot;, &quot;SPECIFICATION OF LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS&quot;, and &quot;PAPER TRAY SETTINGS&quot; in the SetWhen using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has been printed on one side, load paper one sheet at a time. Loading more than one Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.How to place the original Load paper up to A5R (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;R) size in landscape orientation.Bypass tray (on the machine)Bypass tray (on the large capacity trays)Loading tab paper When printing on tab paper, be sure to place the paper with the print side facing down.For the bypass tray (on the large capacity trays), the dedicated guide must be installed in the bypass tray guides at the rear end. The dedicated guide is in the left side of the large capacity trays.&nbsp;Bypass tray (on the machine)Bypass tray (on the large capacity trays)LeftRightUse only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.To copy onto the tabs of tab paper, [Tab Copy] in &quot;Others&quot; is useful.Inserting transparency filmUse SHARP-recommended transparency film.When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading.When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may result in curling.Loading envelopesWhen loading envelopes into the bypass tray, place them in the orientation as shown in the figure. Placing envelopesOnly the front side of envelopes can be printed on or copied to. Place the front side facing down.Envelopes can only be used in the bypass tray that attaches to the machine. (Envelopes cannot be used in the bypass tray that attaches to the large capacity trays.)Bypass tray (on the machine) Important points when using envelopesDo not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.Do not use the following envelopes:Those with a metal piece, a plastic hook or a ribbon hookThose with a string for closingThose with a windowThose with a liningThose with an uneven surface, finished with titling or embossDuplex envelopes or those with adhesive or other synthetic material for sealingHand-made envelopesThose containing air insideThose damaged with a crease, fold mark or tear Envelopes on which the corner gluing position on the back is not aligned with the corner edge should not be used as they may cause creasing.Print quality is not guaranteed on the circumference of envelope with a width of 10 mm.Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than three layers.Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes that have peel off flaps for sealing the envelopes.Important points when using embossed paperThe effect of asperity surfaces of embossed paper may affect the print quality depending on the type of embossed paper.For more information, consult the dealer or authorised service representative.OperationBypass tray (on the machine)Open the bypass tray When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, pull out the extension guide.Pull the bypass tray extension all the way out. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.Adjust the bypass tray guides to the size of paper to be loadedInsert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stopsLoad paper with the print side facing down.Do not force the paper in.If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.Bypass tray (on the large capacity trays)To replace the paper in the bypass tray, press the operation button and remove the paperThe paper table goes down. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes down. The button lights up when the paper table has gone down. Do not remove the paper until the button ceases blinking.Adjust the bypass tray guides to the size of paper to be loadedGrasp the guide lock lever to adjust the bypass tray guides to the paper size. Be sure to adjust the bypass tray guides at the rear end.When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension. Remove the bypass tray guide at the rear end and attach them to the inserter tray.Pull the bypass tray extension all the way out.When loading paper larger than A3W, or 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, remove the bypass tray guides at the rear end. Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops and adjust the right-side guideLoad paper with the print side facing up.The stack must not be higher than the indicator line.A maximum of 550 sheets of paper can be loaded into the tray.Do not force the paper in.If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.Press the operation buttonThe paper table goes up. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes up. The button lights up when the paper table has gone up.Back to top';
 body[55]='01-060_01.htm';
dai[55]='BYPASS TRAY';
bun[55]='BYPASS TRAY LOADING PAPER INTO THE LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray. Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray. Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray. Back to top ';
 body[56]='01-061.htm';
dai[56]='AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER';
bun[56]='AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDEROverview This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.Originals of different sizes can be placed together in the automatic document feeder. In that case, configure the mixed size original setting in each mode.Be sure to remove staples or paper clips, if any, before placing the originals in the automatic document feeder.If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or glue, wait until the originals are dry before placing them. Otherwise the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.Do not use the following originals. Note that using the following types of originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges on transmitted images or copy results.Transparency film or mother print paperTracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paperHeavily creased or curled originalsDamaged originals, folded originalsOriginals that have pasted sections or cut-out holesOriginals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbonWhen using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the document feeder tray. Allowed original sizesMinimum original sizeStandard size(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)210 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;148 mm (transversal)8-1/2&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;5-1/2&quot; (transversal)Non-standard size(Minimum size that can be specified manually)131 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;140 mm (transversal)5-1/8&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;5-1/2&quot; (transversal)Maximum original sizeStandard size(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)297 mm (longitudinal) × 420 mm (transversal) or A311&quot; (longitudinal) × 17&quot; (transversal)A3W cannot be used.Non-standard size(Maximum size that can be specified manually) Copy mode:297 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;432 mm (transversal)11-5/8&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; (transversal) Image send mode:297 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;1000 mm (transversal)11&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;39-3/8&quot; (transversal)When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.Copy: &quot;DIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZE&quot;IMAGE SEND: &quot;SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES&quot; Allowed original weights1-Sided scanning: 35&nbsp;g/m2 to 128&nbsp;g/m2 (9 lbs. to 34 lbs.)2-Sided scanning: 50g/m2 to 128&nbsp;g/m2 (13 lbs. to 34 lbs.)When scanning originals from 35&nbsp;g/m2 to 49&nbsp;g/m2 (9 lbs. to 14 lbs.), select &quot;Slow Scan Mode&quot; in each mode. Scanning without using &quot;Slow Scan Mode&quot; may result in original misfeeds.When &quot;Slow Scan Mode&quot; is selected, 2-sided originals cannot be scanned.OperationMake sure that there is no original on the document glassAdjust the original guides to the size of the originalPlace the original A maximum of 150 sheets of originals can be placed.Make sure the edges of the originals are even.Insert the originals with the top page facing up all the way into the document feeder tray.The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line on the document feeder tray.After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray.Back to top';
 body[57]='01-062.htm';
dai[57]='DOCUMENT GLASS';
bun[57]='DOCUMENT GLASSDOCUMENT GLASSOverview This section describes the steps to set the original on the document glass. When scanning a thick book or other thick original, push up the back of the automatic document feeder and then place the original.When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it.Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.Exercise care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.Maximum original size allowedStandard sizes 297 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;420 mm (transversal)11&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; (transversal) Non-standard size297 mm (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;432 mm (transversal)11-5/8&quot; (longitudinal)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; (transversal) When the original is a non-standard size, see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using.Copy: &quot;DIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZE&quot;IMAGE SEND: &quot;SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES&quot;OperationOpen the automatic document feederPlace the originalPlace the original with the scan side facing down.Align the top left corner of the original with back left (at the tip of the mark ) of the document glass. When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, the size can be detected easily by placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), B5 (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;), or other standard size paper on top Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection of the original size.Close the automatic document feeder If the automatic document feeder is left open while copying, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner.Back to top';
 body[58]='01-063.htm';
dai[58]='CLEANING THE MACHINE';
bun[58]='CLEANING THE MACHINECLEANING THE MACHINE To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. If coloured/white lines or misfeeds occur, clean the following parts.When dirty spots or coloured/white lines are left on scanned images:DOCUMENT GLASSDOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEETSCANNING AREAWhen paper misfeed occurs in the bypass tray:BYPASS FEED ROLLERWhen coloured lines appear:LASER UNIT Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the housing.Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the operation panel. If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface may be damaged.Back to top';
 body[59]='01-064.htm';
dai[59]='TIMING OF CLEANING';
bun[59]='TIMING OF CLEANINGTIMING OF CLEANING When dirty spots or coloured/white lines are left on scanned images, clean the following parts.When using the document glass: DOCUMENT GLASS, the document backplate sheetWhen using the automatic document feeder: the scanning areaExamples of lines in the imageAlways keep clean the document glass, document backplate sheet, and scanning area.Back to top';
 body[60]='01-065.htm';
dai[60]='DOCUMENT GLASS';
bun[60]='DOCUMENT GLASSDOCUMENT GLASS To clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.Back to top';
 body[61]='01-066.htm';
dai[61]='DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEET';
bun[61]='DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEETDOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEET To clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.Back to top';
 body[62]='01-067.htm';
dai[62]='SCANNING AREA';
bun[62]='SCANNING AREASCANNING AREATo clean this part, use the glass cleaner stored in the automatic document feeder. Replace the glass cleaner after use.OperationOpen the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleanerClean the document scanning areas of the document glass and the automatic document feeder with the glass cleaner One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder.Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder Press the switch to release the lock.Clean the scanning area in the automatic document feederClose the coverReplace the glass cleanerBack to top';
 body[63]='01-069.htm';
dai[63]='BYPASS FEED ROLLER';
bun[63]='BYPASS FEED ROLLERBYPASS FEED ROLLERIf paper misfeed frequently occur in the bypass tray, clean the bypass feed roller. Wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.OperationBypass tray (on the machine)Remove paperRemove the maintenance coverClean the bypass feed roller Install the maintenance cover after the cleaning is completed.Load the paperBypass tray (large capacity trays)Press the operation button and remove paper The paper table goes down. The operation button blinks while the paper table goes down. The button lights up when the paper table has gone down. Do not remove the paper until the button ceases blinking.Remove the maintenance coverClean the bypass feed roller Install the maintenance cover after the cleaning is completed.Load the paper and press the operation button The paper table goes up when the operation button is pressed.Back to top';
 body[64]='01-071.htm';
dai[64]='LASER UNIT';
bun[64]='LASER UNITLASER UNITOverviewWhen the laser unit becomes dirty, line patterns (coloured lines) may form in the printed image. If line patterns (coloured lines) appear, clean the laser unit.Lines (coloured lines) caused by a dirty laser unitColoured lines always appear in the same place. (The lines are never black.)Coloured lines appear in parallel with the direction of paper feeding.Coloured lines appear not only on output from a copier but also on prints from a computer. (The same lines appear on both copies and print jobs.)OperationCleaning the laser unitOpen the front cover (lower)Take out the cleaning tool for the laser unitThe cleaning tool is attached to the front cover (lower) of the machine.(1) &nbsp;Push the left-hand side of the cleaning tool to detach it from the hook(2) &nbsp;Put it over the hook to place in on the back side(3) &nbsp;Turn the cleaning tool around the boss to detach it from the right-hand hook.Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of the cleaning tool is not dirtyIf the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner from the cleaning tool and replace it with a clean one. For more information on replacing the cleaner, see &quot;Replacing the cleaner&quot;.Point the cleaner down and slowly insert the tool into the hole to be cleaned in the laser unit Be sure to point the cleaner down. Labels similar to (A) are attached to areas that require cleaning.Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the hole and then pull it back out Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.Repeat steps 4 to 5 two or three times and then remove the cleaning toolRepeat steps 4 to 6 to clean all holes (4 holes) in the laser unitThere are a total of four holes to be cleaned in the laser unit. Clean all holes.Replace the cleaning tool(1) &nbsp;Engage the cleaning tool onto the boss and turn it around it, and then put the edge (non-cleaner side) on the right-hand hook(2) &nbsp;Put the left-hand side of the cleaning tool over the hook to place it on the near side(3) &nbsp;Turn the cleaning tool onto hookClose the front coverReplacing the cleanerOpen the front cover (lower) and take out a replacement cleanerReplacement cleaners are stored in the front cover (lower). Grasp the end of the cleaner and pull it out of the cover.Remove the dirty cleaner from the tip of the cleaning tool While firmly grasping the tool where the cleaner is attached, use your other hand to press down on the hook that secures the cleaner, and remove the cleaner. Put the removed cleaner back on the inner cover. After replacing the cleaner, be sure to close the inner cover.Attach the new cleaner to the cleaning toolAlign the cleaner hook with the attachment hole in the cleaning tool. Hold the cleaner firmly and push the cleaning tool in.Back to top';
 body[65]='01-072.htm';
dai[65]='TONER CARTRIDGE';
bun[65]='TONER CARTRIDGE If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge, the following message will appear when the toner runs out.TONER CARTRIDGEOverview You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out.Replacement message When toner is running low, the message &quot;Change the toner supply&quot; appears. When this message appears in the upper section of the screen, replace the toner cartridge for the indicated colour. (Example: In copy mode)Colours that are running low or have run out of toner are indicated in ().Y: Yellow tonerM: Magenta tonerC: Cyan tonerBk: Black tonerIf any one of the toner colours runs out (including black toner), colour printing will no longer be possible. However, if the Y, M, or C toners run out but a quantity of Bk toner still remains, printing is performed in black and white.Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become light or the image blurred.Be sure to install four toner cartridges (Y/M/C/Bk).Keep used toner cartridges in a plastic bag (do not discard them). Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges.When the Home Screen or the initial copy mode screen is displayed, holding down the [Home Screen] button allows you to view the approximate amount of toner remaining (indicated in %). Before the percentage falls to &quot;0%&quot;, obtain a toner cartridgeWhen toner runs out while the home screen is displayed, the message [Toner Empty] appears in the upper right corner of the screen.Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may splatter and cause burns.Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children.If a toner cartridge is stored on end, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side.If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.OperationOpen the front cover (upper)Pull the toner cartridge toward you Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out.(Example) Replacing the yellow toner cartridge Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine.Take a new toner cartridge out of its package and shake it horizontally five or six timesSlowly insert the new toner cartridge on the levelA toner cartridge of a different colour cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same colour.Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in placeClose the front cover (upper) After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is taking place.Back to top';
 body[66]='01-073.htm';
dai[66]='WASTE TONER BOX';
bun[66]='WASTE TONER BOXWASTE TONER BOXOverview The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full, the message &quot;Please replace the waste toner box.&quot; appears. Tap the [Operation Guide] key to replace the waste toner box as instruDo not throw the waste toner box into a fire. Toner may splatter and cause burns.Store the waste toner box out of the reach of small children.Keep the removed waste toner box in a plastic bag (do not discard them). Your service technician will collect the removed waste toner box.Back to top ';
 body[67]='01-074.htm';
dai[67]='VERIFICATION STAMP CARTRIDGE';
bun[67]='VERIFICATION STAMP CARTRIDGEVERIFICATION STAMP CARTRIDGEOverviewWhen the verification stamp has become light, replace the verification stamp cartridge.If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder, replace the "Verification Stamp cartridge AR-SV1 (2 pcs included)".OperationOpen the automatic document feederRemove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feederRemove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass.Grasp the tab on the Verification Stamp unit and pull the unit outRemove Verification Stamp cartridge (A)Install a new Verification Stamp cartridgePush the Verification Stamp unit back inPush the stamp unit in until it clicks into place.Align the top left corner of the document backplate sheet with back left (at the tip of the mark) of the document glassClose the automatic document feederThe document backplate sheet on the document glass is fixed to the automatic document feeder.Make sure that the document backplate sheet is correctly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feederIf the document backplate sheet is not correctly attached, remove the document backplate sheet and then attach it correctly again.Back to top';
 body[68]='01-075.htm';
dai[68]='REMOVING MISFEEDS';
bun[68]='REMOVING MISFEEDSREMOVING MISFEEDSOverviewIf a paper misfeed occurs, the &quot;Paper Jam&quot; message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear.The fusing unit and paper output area are hot.When removing a misfeed, do not touch the fusing unit. You may burn yourself.Back to top';
 body[69]='01-076.htm';
dai[69]='BROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANEL';
bun[69]='BROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANELBROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANELOverviewWhen the [Web Browse] key is displayed on the home screen, tapping the key will allow you to access the Internet and displays Web pages on the touch panel.To enable Web page browsing, the optional Web browsing expansion kit may be required depending on your country or region, or the type of your machine. Basic Screen of a Web pageMenu ListTap to display the menu list. The following shows the items of the menu list.PrintOpens the print dialog.Depending on the Web page, part of the page may not be printed.In this case, set the [Only Display Area] checkbox to in the [Option] tab to print the display area on the touch panel.Add to FavouritesAdds the Web page currently displayed to the list of favourites.List of FavouritesDisplays the favourites list.Web pages can be selected and opened from the favourites list.HistoryDisplays the history list in the order of viewing date from oldest.Web pages can be selected and opened from the history list. Go Home PageOpens the home page.Font and MagnificationChanges the character size, the font type to be displayed, or the zoom ratio.Page InformationDisplays the information of the Web page currently displayed.Settings listTap to display the settings list. The following shows the items of the settings list. Display SettingsChanges the Web page display settings. The selected item with the checkbox set to can be displayed or enabled. The display settings of the following items can be changed.Javascript /Auto Clear *&nbsp;*With the checkbox set to , when the auto clear function is activated in the machine, the display is cleared and the screen returns to that set in [Setting mode] → [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Display Settings].Home Page SettingsChanges the home page, or selects whether to show / hide the home page at the startup of the browser.Security - CertificatesDisplays the security certificate list. A certificate can be enabled or disabled. However, when the power to the machine is turned off, all certificates became enabled. PreferenceResets all environmental settings including the favourite, history, and cookie to the factory default settings.Home Screen For the model equipped with a Web browsing kit as standard, the Web browser icon is displayed in the home screen.Viewing PDF Files When a Web page includes a link to a PDF file, you can display the PDF file by tapping the link.When you are opening an encrypted PDF file, a confirmation screen appears asking for the password entry. Note that, if you enter an incorrect password three times successively, the PDF file is blocked and cannot be opened.Menu ListTap to display the menu list. The following shows the items of the menu list.Fit WidthFits the PDF page to the width of the view area.Fit PageDisplays a whole PDF page.PrintOpens the print dialog.PropertyDisplays the PDF properties.ThumbnailWhen a PDF page is zoomed in, this menu can be switched to either show or hide the thumbnail showing the area of the page currently displayed.Specifications of the Web Browsing Function The following lists the specifications of the Web browsing feature provided in the MFP. ItemsSpecificationSupported protocolsHTTP (1.0/1.1), HTTPS HTMLPart of HTML5, HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1, XHTMLBasic 1.1, XML 1.1CSS1.0, 2.0, 3.0ECMAScriptECMAScript (ECMA-262 3rd Edition)DOMLevel 1, Level 2, Level 3SSL2.0, 3.0TLS1CookieSupportedSupported imageGIF87a, GIF89a, JPEG, PNG, BMP, Animation-GIF, MNGPDFPDF 1.3/1.4/1.5/1.6Some formats may not be displayed or printed. FlashAdobe® Flash® Player 10.3.185.23When displaying Web pages using this Web browsing function, Web pages will appear or be printed in a way that is slightly different compared to when they are viewed or printed using conventional PC browsers, and some features may be restricted. Back to top';
 body[70]='01-077.htm';
dai[70]='STORING A PROGRAM';
bun[70]='STORING A PROGRAMSTORING A PROGRAMOverviewThis function collectively stores various settings as one program. If you store a program, you can easily retrieve and use it.For information about how to retrieve a program in each mode, see the following:RETRIEVING STORED COPY SETTINGSRETRIEVING STORED IMAGE SEND SETTINGSExample of how to use a programFor example, suppose A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the following settings:The A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size CAD drawings are reduced to A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) size.To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided copying is used.Margin shift is used to allow a margin to punch holes for filing.When a job program is not storedWhen a job program is storedSets A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) to A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) reductionChanges the exposure settingSets 2-sided copyingSets marginsSets punch hole settingsTap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keySelects copy settingsTap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keyThis method requires multiple settings and takes time.Also, it may cause a setting error.This method requires no multiple settings and takes no time.Also, you can make a copy with no setting errors.Up to 48 programs can be stored.Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off.A program shortcut can be registered in the Home Screen or Favourite.OperationAs an example, the procedure for storing a program in copy mode is explained below.Set a function to be storedAfter you have completed setting the function, the [Program Registration] key appears on the action panel.The number of copies cannot be stored.Tap the [Program Registration] key on the action panelTap a key not used yet for program registrationEnter the program name, and tap the [OK] keyThe program is then stored.If a program is not named, a program number is automatically assigned as a program name.Select whether or not to also register a program shortcut in the Home Screen or FavouriteIf user authentication is enabled, a shortcut of the program is registered in the user\'s Home Screen or Favourite.If user authentication is disabled, enter the administrator password, and register a program shortcut.Back to top';
 body[71]='01-078.htm';
dai[71]='DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM';
bun[71]='DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAMDELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAMOverviewThis section explains how to delete and rename a program.A program that is already stored cannot be deleted.When [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Copy Settings] → [Copy Setting] → [Disable Registration of Program] is selected, a registered program cannot be deleted or renamed. When [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Image Send Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disable Registration of Program] is selected, a stored program on the image send settings cannot be deletOperationDeleting a programTap the [Call Program] key on the action panelTap the [Delete] key on the action panel, and tap the key of the program to be deletedTap the [Yes] key, and tap the key of the program to be deletedRenaming a programTap the [Call Program] key on the action panelTap the [Change Name] key on the action panel, and tap the key of the program to be renamedEnter the program name, and tap the [OK] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[72]='02-001.htm';
dai[72]='SELECTING COPY MODE';
bun[72]='SELECTING COPY MODESELECTING COPY MODEFollow the steps below to change from the Home Screen or each mode to copy mode.OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the [Copy] mode iconThe initial copy mode screen is displayed.Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode displayTap [Copy]The initial copy mode screen is displayed.Back to top';
 body[73]='02-002.htm';
dai[73]='INITIAL COPY MODE SCREEN';
bun[73]='INITIAL COPY MODE SCREENINITIAL COPY MODE SCREENOverviewThe display will vary depending on the devices installed.Back to top';
 body[74]='02-003.htm';
dai[74]='COPYING SEQUENCE';
bun[74]='COPYING SEQUENCECOPYING SEQUENCEChange from the Home Screen or each mode to copy mode, and follow the steps below.SELECTING COPY MODE Maximum print area: 319 mm x 480 mmImage quality assurance range: 303 mmOperationPlace the original Place the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSScan the originalTap the [Preview] key to scan the original.To scan a 2-sided original, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning the original.When not checking the preview image, tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.Check the preview imageCheck the settings such as the colour, 2-sided state, and staple position on the Preview screen.Start copying Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key.To make two or more copies, tap the copies display key to set a number of copies.To cancel the number of copies, tap the [C] key (in the numeric keys).To cancel a copy job, tap the [Cancel Print] key.If you tap the [File] key or [Quick File] key on the action panel before starting copying, you can save the scanned original as data.SAVING DATA IN QUICK FILE MODESAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATABack to top';
 body[75]='02-004.htm';
dai[75]='DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW';
bun[75]='DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEWDISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEWOverviewIf you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the preview image on the preview screen.While checking the preview image, you can configure each copy function, and change, rotate, or delete a page.SETTING COLOUR MODEAUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENTMANUAL ADJUSTMENTOPERATING THE PREVIEW SCREENBack to top';
 body[76]='02-005.htm';
dai[76]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 1-SIDED COPYING';
bun[76]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 1-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 1-SIDED COPYINGThis section explains how to make a copy using the automatic document feeder.OperationPlace the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERCheck the paper to be used and colour modeWhen changing paper or colour mode, see the following items.SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSetting Colour ModeDepending on the original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying To make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[77]='02-006.htm';
dai[77]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 1-SIDED COPYING';
bun[77]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 1-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 1-SIDED COPYINGThis section explains how to make a copy on the document glass.OperationPlace the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] keyDOCUMENT GLASSPlace the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] keyRepeat this step until all originals have been scanned.Check that the paper to be used and colour mode is selectedWhen changing paper or colour mode, see the following items.SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSetting Colour ModeDepending on the original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top';
 body[78]='02-007.htm';
dai[78]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING';
bun[78]='USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYINGOverviewThis section explains how to make a 2-sided copy using the automatic document feeder.A 2-sided copy helps to save paper.To change the default 2-sided copy mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy].OperationTap the [2-Sided Copy] key, and select the type of 2-sided copyAfter the settings are completed, tap .To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to the front side when copying a 2-sided original, set the [Rotate back face 180 deg] checkbox to .Place the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERCheck that the paper to be used and colour mode is selectedWhen changing paper or colour mode, see the following items.SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSetting Colour ModeDepending on the original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top';
 body[79]='02-008.htm';
dai[79]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING';
bun[79]='USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYINGUSING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYINGOverviewThis section explains how to make a 2-sided copy using the document glass.A 2-sided copy helps to save paper.To change the default 2-sided copy mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy].OperationTap the [2-Sided Copy] key, and tap the [1-Side -&gt; 2-Side] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, set the [Rotate back face 180 deg] checkbox to .The [2-Side -&gt; 2-Side] key and [2-Side -&gt; 1-Side] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] keyDOCUMENT GLASSPlace the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] keyRepeat this step until all originals have been scanned.Check that the paper to be used and colour mode is selectedWhen changing paper or colour mode, see the following items.SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSetting Colour ModeDepending on the original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies. Back to top';
 body[80]='02-009.htm';
dai[80]='SETTING ORIGINALS';
bun[80]='SETTING ORIGINALS SETTING ORIGINALS OverviewPlace the original at the position shown in the figure. If the original is placed at a different position, a copy error may occur. DOCUMENT GLASS Document feeder tray If necessary, you can view the original orientation or preview the image in the &quot;Preview Screen&quot;. DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy) If the orientation is different between the original and paper, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to match the paper. To set Rotation Copy: In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Rotation Copy Setting]. The rotation copy function is available in automatic paper selection or automatic raBack to top ';
 body[81]='02-010.htm';
dai[81]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE';
bun[81]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZEOverviewCheck the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key. If the original size is set to [Auto], the automatically detected size (standard size) is displayed on the [Original] key. If the original size is specified manually, it is displaStandard SizeStandard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect.To specify the standard size, open &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, and select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting]. The following lists the items that can be selected in [Original Size Detector Setting].SelectionsStandard sizes (detected original sizes)DOCUMENT GLASSDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm)AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-5216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RInch-111&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A4, A3Inch-211&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A4, A3Inch-311&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A3, A4*In the size notation above, when the size is suffixed by &quot;R&quot; such as &quot;A4R&quot;, it indicates that a sheet available in both the vertical and horizontal orientations is set horizontally.Even when [Original] is set to [Auto], a different original size may be detected depending on the size of the original to be placed.In this case, manually set the original size.SPECIFY THE ORIGINAL SIZE When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, the size can be detected easily by placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), B5 (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;), or other standard size paper on top oBack to top';
 body[82]='02-011.htm';
dai[82]='SPECIFY THE ORIGINAL SIZE';
bun[82]='SPECIFY THE ORIGINAL SIZESPECIFY THE ORIGINAL SIZEOverviewThe original size is detected automatically. If the original size is not detected correctly, select the key that indicates the same size as for the original to be scanned, or enter the size of the original. If necessary, you can register particular originAUTOMATIC SELECTIONSELECTING THE STANDARD SIZEDIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZESTORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZESSet an original size before scanning the original.Back to top';
 body[83]='02-012.htm';
dai[83]='SETTING COLOUR MODE';
bun[83]='SETTING COLOUR MODESETTING COLOUR MODEOverviewYou can specify colour modes to make a copy.Colour mode is ordinarily set to &quot;Full Colour&quot;.AutoThe machine automatically detects whether each original is colour or black &amp; white and switches the mode appropriately (full colour for a colour original or black &amp; white for a black &amp; white original).2 ColourExtracts reddish colour used in the original to replace it with another colour and copies the original in this colour and black.For example, if Blue is the selected colour, the reddish portions included in the original is extracted and copied in blue. AnyIt is also possible to extract colours other than black to replace them with another colour and copy the original in this colour and black. (Except Black)Single ColourThe original is copied in a single colour regardless of the colours used in the original.When colour mode is specified, the original is copied in Black &amp; White if you tap the [B/W Start] key.To change the default colour mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Colour Mode]. To change the standard to detect Black &amp; White and Colour:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode]. When colour mode is set to auto, the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are colour or black and white can bOperationAuto modeTap the [Colour Mode] key Tap the [Auto] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .If the colour mode is not switched correctly between Full Colour and Black &amp; White in auto mode, switch colour modes manually.Full ColourTap the [Colour Mode] key Tap the [Full Colour] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Black &amp; WhiteTap the [Colour Mode] key Tap the [B/W] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .2 ColourCopying colours other than black in a specified colourTap the [Colour Mode] keyTap the [2 Colour] keyTap the [Change] keyTap the [Except Black] keyTap the colour you want to copyAfter the settings are completed, tap .The colour you specify here is copied in two colours plus black.Converting reddish colours in a document to shades of another colour to copy in this colours and blackTap the [Colour Mode] keyTap the [2 Colour] keyTap the [Change] keyTap the [Reddish Colour] keyTap the colour to be used with black for printingAfter the settings are completed, tap .The reddish portions are replaced with the colour you specify here and used for copying with black.Single ColourTap the [Colour Mode] keyTap the [Single Colour] keyTap the [Change] keyTap the colour you want to useAfter the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[84]='02-013.htm';
dai[84]='AUTOMATIC SELECTION';
bun[84]='AUTOMATIC SELECTIONAUTOMATIC SELECTIONThis function automatically detects the size of the original to be placed.OperationTap the [Original] key, and tap the [Auto] keyBack to top';
 body[85]='02-014.htm';
dai[85]='SELECTING THE STANDARD SIZE';
bun[85]='SELECTING THE STANDARD SIZESELECTING THE STANDARD SIZEIf the original size is still not detected correctly, specify the original size manually.OperationSpecifying an AB original sizeTap the [Original] keyTap the [AB] tab Tap the appropriate original size keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Specifying an inch original sizeTap the [Original] keyTap the [Inch] tab Tap the appropriate original size keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[86]='02-015.htm';
dai[86]='DIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZE';
bun[86]='DIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZEDIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZETo copy a custom-size original with no size detected, specify the original size manually.OperationTap the [Original] keyTap the [Direct Entry] tabSpecify the original sizeTap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size.Tap the [Execute] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[87]='02-016.htm';
dai[87]='STORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES';
bun[87]='STORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES STORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES OverviewYou can save steps to directly enter the original size each time by storing particular original sizes that are frequently used. If the use frequency of a stored size reduces, you can change or delete the size. The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off. Up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be stored. OperationStoring original sizes (editing/clearing) Tap the [Original] key Tap the [Custom Size] tab Tap the [Store/Delete] key Tap a key to store a custom original size Tap a key that does not show a size. If you tap a key with a size stored, you can change or delete the size. If you tap the [Amend] key, the Size Input screen appears. Go to the next step.If you tap the [Delete] key, the original size is deleted. Specify the original size Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap the key to enter the size. Tap the [Execute] key To cancel the operationTap . SELECTING THE STORED SIZE Tap the [Original] key Tap the [Custom Size] tab Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve After selecting the key of the original size, tap . To cancel the operationTap the [Auto] key. Back to top ';
 body[88]='02-019.htm';
dai[88]='SETTING THE PAPER TRAY';
bun[88]='SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE PAPER TRAYOverviewThe machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original. If the original size cannot be detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copyingIf the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper, that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.To change the initially selected tray:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Paper Tray].OperationTap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the required tray keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .You can also call the [Paper Select] screen by tapping the machine image in the initial screen.To automatically select the tray:Tap the [CA] key.Back to top';
 body[89]='02-020.htm';
dai[89]='SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY';
bun[89]='SETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYWhen you select the bypass tray, specify the paper type and size based on the paper loaded into the bypass tray.This function is only available when the bypass tray is installed.OperationTap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray keyYou can also call the [Paper Area] screen by tapping the machine image in the initial screen.Tap the [Type and Size] key, and tap the key that corresponds to the type of paper loadedTap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that corresponds to the size of paper loadedAfter the settings are completed, tap .[Auto-AB] keyAutomatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5.[Auto-Inch] keyAutomatically detects the appropriate inch paper size when loading paper such as 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;.[Size Set] keyTap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically.[Direct Entry] keyTap this key to enter a numeric value for the size of the loaded paper.To directly enter the paper sizeWhen specifying the paper unit in millimeters, tap the [AB] key. When specifying the paper unit in inches, tap the [inch] key. Tap the key, and enter the paper size. Then, tap the [Execute] key.Back to top';
 body[90]='02-021.htm';
dai[90]='AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT';
bun[90]='AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENTAUTOMATIC EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENTOverviewWhen the [Exposure] key is set to &quot;Auto&quot;, the automatic exposure adjustment function operates to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original. This function automatically adjusts the image during blacTo change the default exposure:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Exposure].To adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is used for the copy exposure:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Copy Exposure Adjustment].Back to top';
 body[91]='02-022.htm';
dai[91]='MANUAL ADJUSTMENT';
bun[91]='MANUAL ADJUSTMENTMANUAL EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENTOverviewThis section explains how to select the original type or specify the exposure depending on the original to be copied.To change the default exposure:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Exposure].OperationTap the [Exposure] keyTap the Original Image Type Select key from &quot;Manual&quot;Tap or slide the slider to adjust the exposureIf you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to [Auto], the original image type is automatically selected to [Text/Printed Photo]. After the adjustment is completed, tap .Guidelines for the exposure level when the [Text] key is selected: 1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper 3: Normal density originals 4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light coloured text Original image type select keys ItemDescriptionTextUse this mode for regular text documents.Text/Printed PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original that contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.Text/PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for copying an original that contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.Printed PhotoThis mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.PhotoUse this mode to copy photos.MapThis mode is best for copying the light colour shading and fine text found on most maps.Light OriginalUse this mode for originals created using light pencil writing.To use the paper copied or printed on the machine as an original:Set the [Copy of Copy] checkbox to .To make a clearer colour copy:Set the [Colour Tone Enhancement] checkbox to . Set [Colour Tone Enhancement] when you select an original type.[Copy of Copy] and [Colour Tone Enhancement] cannot be specified together.[Copy of Copy] and [Colour Tone Enhancement] cannot be combined with [Intensity] in &quot;Others&quot;.Back to top';
 body[92]='02-023.htm';
dai[92]='AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION';
bun[92]='AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTIONAUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTIONOverviewThe ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and the selected paper size.For a non-standard size original, Auto Magnification Selection is enabled only when the size is entered.To change the default ratio:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Copy Ratio].OperationManually select the paper tray, and place the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.SETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Auto Image] key on the action panelThe automatically selected ratio is shown on the [Copy Ratio] key.To cancel the Auto Ratio Selection setting:Tap the [Auto Image] key on the action panel to set the checkbox to .To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and tap the [100%] key.Back to top';
 body[93]='02-024.htm';
dai[93]='SELECTING THE PRESET RATIO';
bun[93]='SELECTING THE PRESET RATIOSELECTING THE PRESET RATIOOverviewYou can select the preset ratio at five levels in Enlarge Copy or Reduce Copy. You can also specify any ratio on a 1% basis in the range of 25% to 400%.When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu, and tap the [100%] key.To add any ratio as a preset ratio:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios]. To select the added preset ratio, tap the [Other Ratio] key.OperationTap the [Copy Ratio] keyTap the preset ratio key or to set the ratioAfter the settings are completed, tap .To specify 25%, 50%, 200%, or 400%, tap the [Other Ratio] key.To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with .If you tap the [Slightly Reduce] key on the action panel, the ratio will be set lower than the specified one by 3%.Back to top';
 body[94]='02-025.htm';
dai[94]='SPECIFYING FROM THE PAPER SIZE';
bun[94]='SPECIFYING FROM THE PAPER SIZESPECIFYING FROM THE PAPER SIZEOverviewSpecify the original size and paper size to make a copy.To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu, and tap the [100%] key.OperationTap the [Copy Ratio] keyTap the [by Paper] key of the [Zoom] tabSpecify the original size and copy sizeAfter the settings are completed, tap . In the preview screen, check whether or not the settings produce the required results.Back to top';
 body[95]='02-026.htm';
dai[95]='SPECIFYING A DIFFERENT RATIO FOR X AND Y';
bun[95]='SPECIFYING A DIFFERENT RATIO FOR X AND YSPECIFYING A DIFFERENT RATIO FOR X AND YOverviewThis section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. There are two methods to determine the ratio: specifying the range from 25% to 400% on a 1% basis for both the horizontal and vertical copy ratios and specifying thWhen 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratioWhen the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.To cancel the XY zoom setting:Tap the [Zoom] tab or the [CA] key on the ratio setting screen.OperationUsing the preset ratio keyTap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tabTap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratioTo quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one, then adjust it with . Tap each area of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.Tap the [Y] key, and set the Y (vertical) ratio in the same way as the [X] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap . Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.Specifying the image dimensionsTap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tabTap the [by Size] keySpecify the original image size and output sizeTap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. After the settings are completed, tap .If you have entered an incorrect size:Tap the [C] key, and then enter the correct size.To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Back to top';
 body[96]='02-027.htm';
dai[96]='CHANGING OUTPUT DESTINATION';
bun[96]='CHANGING OUTPUT DESTINATIONCHANGING OUTPUT DESTINATIONSpecify the destination to output copies.OperationTap the [Output] keyTap the [Offset Tray] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .If a finisher or saddle finisher is not installed, select the [Centre Tray] key.If a finisher (100-sheet stapling) or saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) is installed, select the [Offset Tray] or [Middle Tray] key.When the bypass tray is installed, you can select the [Right Tray] key.If a high capacity stacker is installed, select the [Top Tray] or [Stacker Tray] key.If the offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, fold, or punch function is specified, the right tray is not available.Back to top';
 body[97]='02-027_01.htm';
dai[97]='INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBS';
bun[97]='INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBSINSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN COPIES OR JOBSOverviewThis function inserts separator pages for every specified number of copies or for every job before they are output. When you insert separator pages between a certain number of copies, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each stack. You can also specify the number of copies you want to insert a separator page before or after.When you insert separator pages between jobs, you can specify whether to insert a separator page before or after each job. Separator page insertion examplesIn the following examples, four copies of a two-page original are output.Inserting a separator page before every two copiesInserting a separator page after every two copiesInserting separator pages before and after a jobIf the saddle stitch, saddle fold, C-fold, accordion fold, double fold, or trimming function is enabled, the Separator Page function can not be used.Even when this function is enabled, the Sort/Group, Staple, Punch, Z-Fold, and Half Fold functions are not applied to separator pages.The Offset function, if enabled, is also applied to separator pages.OperationTap the [Output] keyTap the [Separator Page] keySpecify the separator page insertion modeTo insert separator pages between copies, set the [Insert Top of Sets] or [Insert End of Sets] checkbox to . Then, tap to specify the number of copies you want to insert a separator page before or after.To insert separator pages between jobs, set the [Insert Before Job] or [Insert After Job] checkbox to .After the settings are completed, tap .To change the separator page tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen.Tap the separator page in the tray selection screen.For more information, see &quot;SETTING THE PAPER TRAY&quot; and &quot;SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY".To cancel the separator page insertion setting:Clear the checkmark for the separator page insertion mode.Back to top';
 body[98]='02-028.htm';
dai[98]='CHANGING THE METHOD TO ORGANIZING OUTPUT';
bun[98]='CHANGING THE METHOD TO ORGANIZING OUTPUTCHANGING THE METHOD TO ORGANIZING OUTPUTOverviewThis section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original.Sort Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them.Group Groups the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them.OperationTap the [Output] keyTap the [Default Settings] tab, and tap the [Sort] or [Group] keyIf a finisher, saddle finisher or high capacity stacker is not installed, the [Staple], [Fold] and [Group] tab does not appear. Tap the [Sort] or [Group] key. After the settings are completed, tap .When you set the Offset checkbox to , you can output the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set. You can easily remove each set from the output tray.To change the output tray, tap the output tray key, and select the output destination.To cancel sort or group:Tap the selected sort or group key again.Back to top';
 body[99]='02-029.htm';
dai[99]='STAPLING EACH SET OF SORTED COPIES';
bun[99]='STAPLING EACH SET OF SORTED COPIES STAPLING EACH SET OF SORTED COPIES Overview This function staples each set of sorted copies, and outputs it to the tray (staple sort function). 1 staple in back1 staple in front2 Staples You can view staple positions in &quot;DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW&quot;. A finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple sort function. Operation Tap the [Output] key Tap the [Staple] tab, and tap the staple position key After the settings are completed, tap . When you set the Offset checkbox to , you can output the sorted paper sheets while shifting them set by set. You can easily remove each set from the output tray. When the number of copies is 1 for copying, the staple setting is automatically canceled for that job. Note that the stable setting remains enabled. If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Continue] or [Cancel] key. [Continue]: Continues sorting without stapling. [Cancel]: Cancels the staple sort setting. To cancel the staple function:Tap the selected staple key again. Back to top ';
 body[100]='02-030.htm';
dai[100]='SADDLE STITCHING FOR SORTED COPIES';
bun[100]='SADDLE STITCHING FOR SORTED COPIES SADDLE STITCHING FOR SORTED COPIES OverviewThis function staples each set of copies at two positions in the centre of paper, folds them in half, and outputs them. For saddle folding, it trims a side drop, offering a good-looking output image. You can view staple positions in &quot;DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW&quot;. A saddle finisher is required to use the saddle stitch function. The trimmer function is available when a trimmer module is installed on the machine. OperationSaddle stitch Tap the [Output] key Tap the [Staple] tab, and tap the [Saddle Stitch] key Tap the [On] key After the settings are completed, tap . If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Divide], [Continue], or [Cancel] key. [Divide]: Divides the pages into sets that can be stapled and sorts them. You cannot use this func To cancel the Saddle Stitch: Tap the [Off] key. Trimmer Setting When Saddle Stitch is selected, tap the [Trimmer Setting] key Tap the [On] key, and specify the trimming width Tap the numeric value display field of the trimming width, and enter the allowable range using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap . After the settings are completed, tap . To cancel the Trimmer Setting: Tap the [Off] key. Back to top ';
 body[101]='02-031.htm';
dai[101]='FOLDING OUTPUT PAPER';
bun[101]='FOLDING OUTPUT PAPERFOLDING OUTPUT PAPEROverviewCopies can be folded and output.Folding typesUsable paperPrinted surfaceBinding edgeFolding imageZ-FoldA3, B4, A4R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RInsideRight bindingC-FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RInsideRight bindingInsideLeft bindingOutsideRight bindingOutsideLeft bindingAccordion FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R-Right binding-Left bindingDouble FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RInsideRight bindingInsideLeft bindingOutsideRight bindingOutsideLeft bindingHalf FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RInsideRight bindingOutsideLeft bindingSaddle FoldSaddle finisher: A3, B4, A4R, 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;InsideRight bindingOutsideLeft bindingYou can view the specified folding type in &quot;DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW&quot;.A saddle finisher is required to use Saddle Fold.A folding unit is required to use Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, and Half Fold.Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole punch function. However, it can be used with them if the paper size for Z-folding is set to A3, B4 or 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;.The fold function is not available when 2-sided printing is disabled in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.OperationTap the [Output] keyTap the [Fold] tab, and tap the folding type keyTo cancel the paper folding function:Tap the selected fold key again.Tap the [Detail] keyFor the setting method, see &quot;Detail Type for each Folding Type&quot;.After the settings are completed, tap .Detail Type for each Folding TypeSaddle FoldSpecify &quot;Print Side&quot; and &quot;Multiple Fold&quot;.&quot;Multiple Fold&quot; is available when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine.The Multiple Fold function folds five sheets at a time. For example, if an original has 12 A4 size plain sheets, they are folded three times in total: 5 sheets + 5 sheets + 2 sheets.However, some types of paper reduces the number of sheets that are folded every set. For example, heavy paper is folded on a three-sheet basis.Z-FoldSpecify the paper size for Z-folding.C-FoldSpecify &quot;Print Side&quot; and &quot;Fold Orientation&quot;.Accordion FoldSpecify &quot;Fold Orientation&quot;.Double FoldSpecify &quot;Print Side&quot; and &quot;Fold Orientation&quot;.Half FoldSpecify &quot;Print Side&quot;.Back to top';
 body[102]='02-032.htm';
dai[102]='PUNCHING COPIES';
bun[102]='PUNCHING COPIESPUNCHING COPIESOverviewThis function punches copies and outputs them. The paper sizes that can be punched vary depending on the punch module installed.You can view punch positions in &quot;DISPLAYING THE COPY PREVIEW&quot;.A punch module is required for paper punch.The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.You cannot use 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot; (A3W) size papers, and special media such as transparency film and tab papers.The punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding functions. However, it can be used with the Z-fold function for A3, B4 or 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;.OperationTap the [Output] keyTap the [Punch] tab, and tap the punch you want to useAfter the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the punch function: Tap the punch key you have selected.Back to top';
 body[103]='02-034.htm';
dai[103]='RETRIEVING STORED COPY SETTINGS';
bun[103]='RETRIEVING STORED COPY SETTINGSRETRIEVING STORED COPY SETTINGS (CALL PROGRAM)OverviewThis function collectively stores various settings as one program. If you store a program, you can easily retrieve and use it.For example, suppose A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the following settings:The A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size CAD drawings are reduced to A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) size.To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided copying is used.Margin shift is used to allow a margin to punch holes for filing.When a job program is not storedWhen a job program is storedSets A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) to A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) reduction Changes the exposure setting Sets 2-sided copying Sets margins Sets punch hole settings Tap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keySelects copy settings Tap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keyThis method requires multiple settings and takes time. Also, it may cause a setting error.This method requires no multiple settings and takes no time. Also, you can make a copy with no setting errors.Up to 48 programs can be stored.Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off.To store a programTap the [Program Registration] key that appears on the action panel when you operate any mode screens.STORING A PROGRAMOperationTap the [Call Program] key on the action panelIf you tap the [Add to Favourites] or [Register for Home] key on the action panel, you can register a program shortcut key. Tap the key of the program you want to retrieveThe stored settings of the program are applied.Back to top';
 body[104]='02-036.htm';
dai[104]='MAKING A PROOF COPY';
bun[104]='MAKING A PROOF COPYMAKING A PROOF COPYOverviewThis function preferentially prints only one set of copies regardless of how many sets have been specified, enabling you to check the preview image. After checking the preview image, you can change settings if necessary, and realize an efficient copy job.Proof copy sequenceIf Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the job in progress is interrupted, and only one set of copies is printed preferentially. The interrupted job will resume after one set of copies has been printed. If Proof Copy is execuWhen the remaining copies for proof copy are printed while the machine is printing another job, copying is started after the first reserved print job has been completed.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSAs necessary, specify the required functions such as &quot;Exposure&quot; and &quot;Copy Ratio&quot;Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keysUp to 9999 copies (sets) can be set.If an incorrect number of copies is set, tap the [C] key, and enter the correct number.Tap the [Proof Copy] keyTap the key to the left of [Proof Copy] to make a copy in black and white. Tap the key to the right of [Proof Copy] to make a copy in colour. Only one set of copies is printed.Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] keyIf the copy result is not correct, change settings, and tap the [Proof Copy] key.You can change the number of copies.The [Proof Copy] key does not appear if an unavailable function is specified.Back to top';
 body[105]='02-037.htm';
dai[105]='MAKING AN INTERRUPT COPY';
bun[105]='MAKING AN INTERRUPT COPYMAKING AN INTERRUPT COPYOverviewWhen you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, you can use interrupt copy. The interrupt copy function interrupts data output and preferentially outputs an original with interrupt copy specified.The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned.Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following functions: Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count, Proof Copy, Preview Setting, Book DivideWhen you place an original on the document glass, you cannot select the 2-sided copying, sort mode, or staple sort features to make an interrupt copy. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.OperationTap the [Interrupt] keyThe interrupt mode screen appears.If user authentication is enabled, tap the [Interrupt] key to display the user authentication screen. Enter the user name and password to perform user authentication.Place the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSet each copy item as requiredTo cancel interrupt copying:Tap the [Cancel] keyTap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start interrupt copyingWhen the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original.Back to top';
 body[106]='02-038.htm';
dai[106]='SENDING DATA WHILE COPYING';
bun[106]='SENDING DATA WHILE COPYINGSENDING DATA WHILE COPYINGOverviewThis function allows you to send an e-mail while making a copy with an image attached, or save data in the network folder.You need to store the destination in the address book in advance.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSThe image transmission starts after copying is completed, and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission. However, the same results as the copy may not be provided depending on functions.OperationTap the [Send and Print] key on the action panelSelect a recipient from the address bookSELECTING A CONTACTAfter you have selected the recipient, tap the [Enter Address] key. Be sure to store the destination in the address book in advance.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSet each copy item as requiredThese copy settings are used for image transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function.You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingAfter copying is completed, transmission begins. After copying is completed, you cannot preview the settings before transmission.Back to top';
 body[107]='02-039.htm';
dai[107]='FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION';
bun[107]='FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATIONFORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION (TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT)OverviewThis function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorised copy.If this function is specified together with another image compositing function, trace information is printed at the top.Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame.The information added at printing or the preview image of the account job ID and date/time are displayed as shown below.Account job ID: 00000Date/time: DD/MM/YYYY hh:mmTo configure trace information printing settingsIn &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Security Settings] → [Tracking Information Print].Back to top';
 body[108]='02-040.htm';
dai[108]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATA';
bun[108]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATAPADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)OverviewInvisible characters used to deter unauthorised copying such as pre-set or desired text are placed in a background pattern.When an output sheet with a hidden pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear.&quot;Hidden Pattern Print&quot; is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised copying. It does not guarantee information will not be leaked.Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a hidden pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such cases, adjust the contrast by selecting the [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] from &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.When copying an output sheet with a hidden pattern print, the hidden pattern may not emerge depending on settings of other function.The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a hidden pattern print.This function cannot be combined with Repeat Layout or Multi-Page Enlargement.To set a hidden pattern print:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print].OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Hidden Pattern Print] keyTap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as requiredWe recommend that you select the [Positive] option for the [Print Method].The black background pattern is printed in the following cases even when you set the [Print Colour] to &quot;Magenta&quot; or &quot;Cyan&quot;:If colour mode is set to &quot;B/W&quot;If black and white mode is determined automaticallySpecify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as requiredTo specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Tapping the [Function Rev.] key displays the settings of the [Print Contents Setting] tab.To cancel the hidden pattern print setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenThe hidden pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern colour checking.To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[109]='02-041.htm';
dai[109]='OTHERS SCREEN';
bun[109]='OTHERS SCREEN OTHERS SCREEN OverviewTapping the [Others] key in the initial screen displays the Others screen. To display functions that overflow the screen, tap , or drag the bar up and down. After configuring each function, tap the [Back] key in the Others screen to return to th The Others function can be combined with other functions, but cannot be used depending on combinations. Screen 1 Screen 2 [Multi Shot] key COPYING A MULTI-PAGE ORIGINAL TO A SINGLE SHEET [Margin Shift] key ADDING MARGINS FOR COPYING [Erase] key ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE [Pamphlet Copy] key MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMATCOPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE [Covers/Inserts] key INSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIES INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES [Transparency Inserts] key INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS [Blank Page Skip] key SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL [Card Shot] key COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE [Position Image] key SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION [Tab Copy] key MAKING A COPY ON TABS OF TAB PAPER [Dual Page Copy] key COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT [Book Copy] key COPYING A PAMPHLET [Book Divide] key SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE [Stamp] key PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS [Custom Image] key ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL [Hidden Pattern Print] key PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATA [Repeat Layout] key REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET <td style="width:30px; text-align:left;"> [Multi-Page Enlargement] key MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY [Mirror Image] key COPYING IN MIRROR IMAGE [Full Bleed Copy] key COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF [Centring] key COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER [B/W Reverse] key COPYING BY REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE [Job Build] key SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS SEPARATELY AND COPYING THEM COLLECTIVELY [Tandem Copy] key USING TWO MACHINES TO COPY IN PARALLEL [Original Count] key CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE MAKING A COPY [Mixed Size Original] key COLLECTIVELY COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES [Slow Scan Mode] key COPYING THIN ORIGINALS [Sharpness] key ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE [Scan Resolution] key ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING [RGB Adjust] key ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES [Suppress Background] key SUPPRESSING LIGHT AREAS OF ORIGINALS IN COPIES [Colour Balance] key ADJUSTING THE COLOUR OF A COPY [Brightness] key ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY [Intensity] key ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY (SATURATION) OF A COPY [File] key SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA [Quick File] key SAVING DATA IN QUICK FILE MODE Back to top ';
 body[110]='02-042.htm';
dai[110]='COPYING A MULTI-PAGE ORIGINAL TO A SINGLE SHEET';
bun[110]='COPYING A MULTI-PAGE ORIGINAL TO A SINGLE SHEETCOPYING A MULTI-PAGE ORIGINAL TO A SINGLE SHEET (MULTI SHOT)OverviewThis function copies a multi-page original to a single sheet of paper. Select 2in1 to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8in1 to copy eight original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient2in14in18in1 When inserting a cover sheet, select Cover Setting to copy only a front sheet to one page and collectively copy the second and subsequent pages.OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi Shot] keyTap the key of the 2in1 sheets you wish to useIf needed, the images will be rotated.Select the layoutSelect the borderA line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet.After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the Multi Shot setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[111]='02-043.htm';
dai[111]='ADDING MARGINS FOR COPYING';
bun[111]='ADDING MARGINS FOR COPYINGADDING MARGINS FOR COPYING (MARGIN SHIFT)OverviewThis function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with string or in a binder.Not using the Margin ShiftUsing the Margin ShiftStaple positionsMargin Shift and Rotation Copy cannot be combined.To change the default margin shift setting:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Margin Shift Setting].OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Margin Shift] keyTap the direction in which you want to move the imageSets a margin shift widthTap the numeric value display field of the front or back side, and enter the margin range using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap the key to enter the range. If you set the [Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.] checkbox to , you can set the front side and reverseAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the margin shift setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[112]='02-044.htm';
dai[112]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE';
bun[112]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGEERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE(ERASE)Overview The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that are created when copying thick originals or books.Erase modesThis function erases part of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.The erase width is synchronized with the zoom ratio setting. For example, If the erase width setting is 20 mm (1&quot;) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 10 mm (1/2&quot;).To change the default erase width setting:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] keySpecify an erase positionTap the checkbox of the side to be erased to change to .[Outer Frame] key: The Up, Down, Left, and Right checkboxes are set to . [Specify Frame + Centre] key: All checkboxes are set to .Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides to scan a 2-sided original.If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to , the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to , the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased.Specify the erase widthTap the numeric value display field of the front or back side, and enter the range using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap the key to enter the range.After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the erase setting:Tap the [Clear] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[113]='02-045.htm';
dai[113]='MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT';
bun[113]='MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMATMAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (PAMPHLET COPY)OverviewCopies made by &quot;Pamphlet Copy&quot; can be folded at the centre to create a booklet.Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end of pamThis function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.Pamphlet copy using 8 original pagesBinding edgeTo make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function.When Pamphlet Copy is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.When a saddle finisher is installed, you can set the Saddle Stitch (Staple each set of copies at two positions in the centre of paper).SADDLE STITCHING FOR SORTED COPIESTo staple copies automatically when pamphlet copy is enabled:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Automatic Saddle Stitch].If [Automatic Saddle Stitch] is ON, copies are automatically stapled when pamphlet copy is enabled. If [Automatic Saddle Stitch] is OFF, pamphlet copies are made without stapling.OperationPlace an originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSUse the automatic document feeder to place a 2-sided original.Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Pamphlet Copy] keySelect the binding edgeTo cancel the pamphlet copy setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [1-Sided] or [2-Sided] key to meet the originalWhen inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To change the cover input tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen.Tap the cover input tray in the tray selection screen.For more information, see &quot;SETTING THE PAPER TRAY&quot; and &quot;SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY&quot;.If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.Tap the [Preview] key, and check the preview imageTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[114]='02-046.htm';
dai[114]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE';
bun[114]='COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGECOPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE (PAMPHLET COPY 2IN1/4IN1)OverviewThis function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine. Eight or 16 original pages wiThe following paper sizes are available for pamphlet copy 2in1 or 4in1.A3, B4, A4R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 8K, 16KROperationPlace an originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSUse the automatic document feeder to place a 2-sided original.Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Pamphlet Copy] keySelect the binding edgeTo cancel the pamphlet copy setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [1-Sided] or [2-Sided] key to meet the originalWhen inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] keyTo change the cover input tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap the cover input tray in the tray selection screen. For more information, see &quot;SETTING THE PAPER TRAY&quot; and &quot;SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY&quot;. To mIf the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.Tap the[Preview] key, and check the preview imageTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Multi Shot] key on the action panelTap the key of the 2in1 sheets you wish to useIf needed, the images will be rotated.To cancel the Multi Shot setting:Tap the [Off] key.Select the layoutSelect the borderA line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more copies:Tap the copies display key to set a number of copies.Back to top';
 body[115]='02-047.htm';
dai[115]='INSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIES';
bun[115]='INSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIESINSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIES(COVERS / INSERTS)OverviewThis function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It enables you to change cover paper and make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed.When inserting insertion sheets, see &quot;INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES&quot;.Copying a front cover and inserting together with a back coverCover inserting examplesThe following shows the copy results when front and back covers are inserted into six 1-sided original pages or three 2-sided original pages.1-sided copying of 1-sided originalsFront coverBack coverResulting copiesNot copiedNot copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end.1-sided copyNot copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.2-sided copyNot copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.Not copied1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.Not copied2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.1-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.1-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.2-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.2-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.2-sided copying of 1-sided originalsFront coverBack coverResulting copiesNot copiedNot copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end.1-sided copyNot copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts a back cover at the end.2-sided copyNot copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.Not copied1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page.Not copied2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.1-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.1-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.2-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover. A 1-sided copy is made on the fifth original page.2-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.1-sided copying of 2-sided originalsFront coverBack coverResulting copiesNot copiedNot copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end.1-sided copyNot copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.2-sided copyNot copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.Not copied1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.Not copied2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.1-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.1-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.2-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover.2-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.2-sided copying of 2-sided originalsFront coverBack coverResulting copiesNot copiedNot copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end.1-sided copyNot copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end. * The second original page is not copied.2-sided copyNot copied Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and inserts a back cover at the end.Not copied1-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied.Not copied2-sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning, and makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.1-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover. The second and the fifth original pages are not copied.1-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover. * The second original page is not copied.2-sided copy1-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page for the back cover. * The fifth original page is not copied.2-sided copy2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for the front cover, and also makes a 2-sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for the back cover.Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray.When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been completed, perform the proceOne sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers.When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original.This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.OperationPlace the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERTap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] keyTap the [Front Cover] key, and then tap the [On] keyWhen inserting a back cover, tap the [Back Cover] key, and then tap the [On] key.Tap the [Change] keySpecify a front cover sheetWhen only inserting a cover, tap the [Make No Copy] key. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To change the cover input tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the input tray setting screen. Select a paper tray. For more information, see &quot;SETTING THE PAPER TRAY&quot; and &quot;SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY&quot;.If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.If the paper tray is inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.To cancel cover sheet insertion:Tap the [Off] key.To cancel the front cover, back cover, and insertion sheet settings at the same time:Tap the [Cancel All] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[116]='02-048.htm';
dai[116]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS';
bun[116]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMSINSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS)OverviewWhen copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. It is also possWhen performing 2-sided copying, only &quot;2-Side to 1-Side&quot; mode can be used.Transparency film can be loaded in the bypass tray, tray 4 and large capacity trays. The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.OperationLoad transparency film in the bypass tray, tray 4 or large capacity traysWhen using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print side down.BYPASS TRAYTRAY 3/4LARGE CAPACITY TRAYSSet the traySETTING THE PAPER TRAYPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Transparency Inserts] keyTap the [On] keyWhen making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the transparency inserts setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingBack to top';
 body[117]='02-049.htm';
dai[117]='SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL';
bun[117]='SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINALSKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP)OverviewIf the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided copying.Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not copied, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus copied.OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] keyTap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the blank page skip setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] keyTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Check the confirmation message, and tap the [Execute] key to start copyingOn the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of copies excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by dBack to top';
 body[118]='02-050.htm';
dai[118]='COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[118]='COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGECOPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT)OverviewThis function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes.To change the default original size during Card Shot:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Card Shot Settings].OperationSelect the paper to be used for card shotSETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] keyTap the [On] key, and specify the original sizeAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes of the original respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. Or tap to enter the width and height sizes.When you set the [Adjust to Paper Size] checkbox to , the original is enlarged or reduced by the ratio appropriate to the original size.To cancel the Card Shot settings:Tap the [Off] key.Place a card face down on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] keyDOCUMENT GLASSPlace a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Additionally Scan] key to scan the reverse sideCopy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Read-End] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[119]='02-051.htm';
dai[119]='SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION';
bun[119]='SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITIONSPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE)OverviewThis function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy.Position Image must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Position Image] keySpecify the print start positionTap the numeric value display field on the front or reverse side, and enter the print start position using the numeric keys. Or tap to enter the print start position. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence. If you set the [Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st.] checkbox to , you can set the front side and reverse side separately. To cancel the position image setting:Tap the [Clear] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[120]='02-052.htm';
dai[120]='MAKING A COPY ON TABS OF TAB PAPER';
bun[120]='MAKING A COPY ON TABS OF TAB PAPERMAKING A COPY ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB COPY)OverviewThis function makes a copy on tabs of tab paper. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions.The positions to place the originals and tab paperThe following shows how to load tab paper for right binding or left binding.Tab for left bindingOriginalsSETTING ORIGINALSLoading tab paper Tab for right bindingOriginalsSETTING ORIGINALSLoading tab paper Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original.To change the default image shift width for tab copying: In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Copy Function Settings] → [Initial Tab Copy Setting]. The default image shift width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0" to 5/8"). The factory defaultOperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tab Copy] keyTap the [On] keySets an image shift width (tab width)Tap the numeric value display field, and enter the image shift width using the numeric keys. Or tap to enter the image shift width.After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the tab copy setting:Tap the [Off] key.Load the tab paperThe width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2"&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8").Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[121]='02-053.htm';
dai[121]='COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT';
bun[121]='COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENTCOPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY)OverviewThis function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.Specify dual page copy before scanning the original.To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. This function cannot be used in combination with Centre Erase.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Copy] keyA checkmark appears on the icon.After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the dual page copy setting:Tap the [Dual Page Copy] key to clear the checkmark.Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] keyAlign the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark (▼).DOCUMENT GLASSSelects A4 (8-1/2"&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11") size paperSETTING THE PAPER TRAY</div>Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[122]='02-054.htm';
dai[122]='COPYING A PAMPHLET';
bun[122]='COPYING A PAMPHLETCOPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY)OverviewThis function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the centre to create a booklet. This function can arrange copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.How to place the originalBook Copy must be specified before scanning the original.Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four.This function can be combined with saddle stitch if a saddle finisher is installed.When the book copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When 2-sided copying cannot be selected, the book copy function cannot be used.OperationPlacing Originals on the Document GlassDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Copy] keySelect a binding positionWhen not inserting a cover, tap and [Back] key in sequence. Then, go to step 5.To cancel the book copy setting:Tap the [Off] key.When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] keyTo make a copy on the inserted cover sheet, set the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] checkbox to . After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To change the cover input tray:Tap the [Paper Tray] key to display the tray selection screen. Tap a paper tray. For more information, see &quot;SETTING THE PAPER TRAY&quot; and &quot;SETTING THE BYPASS TRAY&quot;.If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.Tap the [Preview] key to scan the first original pagePlace the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] keyRepeat this step until all original pages have been scanned. Scan the remaining original pages in the following order:Inside of the front cover and the 1st page (facing pages)Inside of the 2nd and 3rd pages (facing pages)....Inside of the last page and back cover (facing pages)Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[123]='02-055.htm';
dai[123]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE';
bun[123]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGESPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE)OverviewThis function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. The scanned original is split in the centre.Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original.This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open.The document glass is not available for this function.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] keySelect the binding edge of the originalTo cancel the book divide setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyRemove saddle stitches from the original before placing it.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[124]='02-056.htm';
dai[124]='PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS';
bun[124]='PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKSPRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP)OverviewThis function prints information such as the date or stamp, which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following five types of information: &quot;Date&quot;, &quot;Pages&quot;, &quot;Stamp&quot;, &quot;Text&quot;, and &quot;WatermarkFor the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as &quot;CONFIDENTIAL&quot; or &quot;PRIORITY&quot;. You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text.If the selected stamp of one position overlaps the stamp of another position, priority will be given in the order; watermark, right side, left side, and centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.Depending on the paper size, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.When [Stamp] is combined with other functions:Combined function nameCopy results (Stamp)Margin ShiftThe margin range is shifted before printing.Tab Copy, CentringStamp items are printed in the position set in the stamp menu.Dual Page Copy, Card ShotStamp items are printed for each copy sheet.2in1Stamp items are printed for each original page.Pamphlet Copy, Book CopyStamp items are printed for each page when compiling.Covers/InsertsStamp items are printed according to the stamp settings.OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] keyTap a tab to be printed, and tap the [Format] keyThe format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or soft keyboard.For information on how to enter characters with the soft keyboard or insert pre-set text, see the following &quot;Printing directly entered text&quot; or &quot;Selecting a print format from pre-set text&quot;.When you tap the tab, the display tab is switched.Tap a key of the desired print positionTap a key of [1] to [6].Tapping the [Detail] key allows you to configure the setting for each tab, such as the print colour and original orientation.Tapping the [Layout] key allows you to check the printing position or detailed settings.To cancel the stamp settings:Tap the [Cancel All] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Tapping the [B/W Start] key will print the stamp items in black and white even if colour printing is specified.If colour printing is specified for the original in black and white, it is counted as a full colour copy.Printing directly entered textTap the [Direct Entry] key in the [Text] tab to display the soft keyboard.Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters.Selecting a print format from pre-set textTapping the [Pre-Set Select] key allows you to select one of the required registered formats for printing.Tapping the [Store/Delete] key allows you to edit, delete, or store pre-set text. To edit or store pre-set text, use the soft keyboard.Back to top';
 body[125]='02-057.htm';
dai[125]='ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL';
bun[125]='ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINALADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE)OverviewThis function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. An image must be registered from the printer driver to the machine. See &quot;REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE&quot;.Custom StampFull-colour stamp imageCustom WatermarkWatermark of grey-scale stamp imageA custom image is printed with the registered size. The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduced.A different custom image cannot be specified for each page.Even if colour custom stamp is selected, copying takes place in black and white when you tap the [B/W Start] key.Combination of custom image with other functionsOther functionsCustom image operationsMargin ShiftThe margin range is shifted before printing.Dual Page CopyA custom image is printed by sheet.Covers/InsertsBased on the custom image settings.2in1A custom image isprinted for each set of pages.Tab CopyA custom image isprinted regardless of image shift setting.Card shotA custom image is printed by sheet.Mirror ImageA custom image is printed without mirror image reverse.B/W ReverseA custom image is printed without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background. Custom stamp: Printed in white Custom watermark: Printed without being whitenedCentringA custom image is printed without centring.Colour AdjustA custom image is printed using the registered data.Stamp menuA custom image is printed on the stamp menu.Photo RepeatCannot be combinedMulti-Page EnlargementCannot be combinedHidden Pattern PrintA custom image is printed under a hidden pattern print.Repeat LayoutCannot be combinedPosition ImageA custom image is printed at the original position regardless of the position image setting.Book DivideA custom image is printed by sheet.Tandem CopyA custom image is printed when the custom image with the same file name is registered in both the master and slave machines. If the custom image is not registered, it will be copied instead of printed.OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Custom Image] keyTap the [Custom Stamp] or [Custom Watermark] keyTap the [Image] key and select an imageSelect the required thumbnail image(s) from the available selection.Set [Print Page] or [Original]For the settings, see the following &quot;Custom image settings&quot;.After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the custom image setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Custom image settingsFor custom stampDescriptionDescriptionPrint PageSpecify a page(s) for printing. First Page or All PagesPrint PositionSpecify a position for printing.OriginalsORIGINAL ORIENTATIONSpecify the original orientation.2-Sided Original TypeSpecify the binding edge for a 2-sided original. Select Book or Tablet.AngleSpecify the corner of the image. Select from 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, and 180 degrees.For custom watermarkDescriptionDescriptionPrint ColourSelect from Black, R (red), G (green), B (blue), Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.Print PatternTransparent: Makes an original image transparent for stamp copy. Overlap: Hides a watermark added to an original image for stamp copy.ExposureSelect the exposure from nine levels.Print PageSelect First Page or All Pages.Print PositionSpecify a position for stamp copy.OriginalsORIGINAL ORIENTATIONSpecify the original orientation.2-Sided Original TypeSpecify the binding edge for a 2-sided original. Select Book or Tablet.AngleSelect from 0 degrees, -90 degrees, 90 degrees, and 180 degrees.Back to top';
 body[126]='02-058.htm';
dai[126]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATA';
bun[126]='PADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATAPADDING UNAUTHORISED COPY DETERRENT DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT)OverviewInvisible characters used to deter unauthorised copying such as pre-set or desired text are placed in a background pattern.When an output sheet with a hidden pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear.&quot;Hidden Pattern Print&quot; is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised copying. It does not guarantee information will not be leaked.Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a hidden pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such cases, adjust the contrast by selecting the [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] from &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.When copying an output sheet with a hidden pattern print, the hidden pattern may not emerge depending on settings of other function.The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a hidden pattern print.This function cannot be combined with Repeat Layout or Multi-Page Enlargement.To set a hidden pattern print:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print].OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Hidden Pattern Print] keyTap the [On] key, and specify each item in the [Default Settings] tab as requiredWe recommend that you select the [Positive] option for the [Print Method].The black background pattern is printed in the following cases even when you set the [Print Colour] to &quot;Magenta&quot; or &quot;Cyan&quot;:If colour mode is set to &quot;B/W&quot;If black and white mode is determined automaticallySpecify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as requiredTo specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Tapping the [Function Rev.] key displays the settings of the [Print Contents Setting] tab.To cancel the hidden pattern print setting:Tap the [Off] key.Check the preview image in the preview screenThe hidden pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern colour checking.To cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[127]='02-059.htm';
dai[127]='REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET';
bun[127]='REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEETREPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT)OverviewThis function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. There are three ways; &quot;Auto&quot;&quot;Fixed Repeat&quot; and &quot;Photo Repeat&quot;.AutoThe maximum repeat count to copy images on a sheet is calculated automatically according to the original size, paper size, and copy ratio.Fixed RepeatWhen you select a repeat count, original size, and paper size to copy images on a sheet, the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the original is copied.Photo RepeatThis function repeatedly copies on A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) or A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) papers without changing the copy ratio of the photo size original. You can select any of the following five types of original size:Original sizes up to 130 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;90 mm (3&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;5&quot;)Original sizes up to 70 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 mm (2-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;4&quot;)Original sizes up to 57 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 mm (2-1/8&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3-5/8&quot;)Original sizes up to 100 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;150 mm (5&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;7&quot;)Original sizes up to 65 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;70 mm (2-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;2-1/2&quot;)Repeat Layout must be specified before scanning the original.Always place an original on the document glass for photo repeating.This function cannot be combined with mixed size originals or 2-sided copying mode (it can be combined with [2-Side -&gt; 1-Side]).OperationAutoRepeat count is calculated automatically for copying.Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Repeat Layout] keyTap the [Auto] keyCheck the repeat faces that have been calculated automaticallyIf necessary, tap the [Original], [Paper Select], or [Copy Ratio] key, and configure the setting again.SELECTING THE STANDARD SIZEDIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZESTORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZESSELECTING THE PRESET RATIOSETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYSpecify the repeat partition lineAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the auto setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Fixed RepeatSpecify the repeat count for copying.Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Repeat Layout] keyTap the [Fixed Repeat] keyTap the [Original] and [Paper Select] keys to select an original size and a paper size, respectivelySELECTING THE STANDARD SIZEDIRECTLY ENTERING THE CUSTOM SIZESTORING AND SELECTING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZESSETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYTap the [No. of Faces] key to set a repeat countAfter the settings are completed, tap . The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio.If the calculated copy ratio exceeds the range from 25% to 400%, an error occurs.Specify the repeat partition lineAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the fixed repeat setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Photo RepeatRepeat a photo size original in actual size.Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Repeat Layout] keyTap the [Photo Repeat] keyTap the [Original] key and select an original sizePlace the original to meet the orientation displayed in &quot;How To Set&quot;. After the settings are completed, tap .Tap the [Paper Select] key and select a paper sizeAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.If you tapped [Up to 57x100 mm(Card) 2 1/8&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;2 5/8&quot;] in the [Original] screen, only the A4 original size can be selected.To cancel the photo repeat setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] keyYou can check the original direction by reading the &quot;Orientation&quot; in the Original screen.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[128]='02-060.htm';
dai[128]='MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY';
bun[128]='MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPYMAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT)OverviewThis function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets.Multi-Page Enlargement must be specified before scanning the original.Place an original on the document glass.Overlap of sections of imageThere will be a margin around the edges of each copy.Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size. (The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] keyTap the [AB] or [Inch] tab, and tap the key of corresponding original sizeThis displays the keys that show the available enlargement size, copy paper size, and number of sheets.Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original toAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.When printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to .To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting:Tap the [Clear] key. Although the multi-page enlargement setting is cancelled, the ratio selected automatically is kept valid.To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key in the initial screen to display the ratio menu, and then tap the [100%] key.Place the original on the document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen, and tap the [Preview] keyDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[129]='02-061.htm';
dai[129]='COPYING IN MIRROR IMAGE';
bun[129]='COPYING IN MIRROR IMAGECOPYING IN MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE)OverviewThis function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image.Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the mirror image setting:Tap the [Mirror Image] key to clear the checkmark.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[130]='02-062.htm';
dai[130]='COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF';
bun[130]='COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFFCOPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY)OverviewThis feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges.The punch function cannot be used.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] keyMessage &quot;Select the tray with a larger paper size than the original&quot; appears. Tap [OK]. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the full bleed copy setting:Tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key to clear the checkmark.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSelect paper larger than the output imageSETTING THE PAPER TRAYSETTING THE BYPASS TRAYCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[131]='02-063.htm';
dai[131]='COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER';
bun[131]='COPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPERCOPYING IN THE CENTRE OF THE PAPER (CENTRING)OverviewThis function lets you place the original image in the centre of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced.Not using the centring functionUsing the centring functionCentring must be specified before scanning the original.When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Centring] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the centring setting:Tap the [Centring] key to clear the checkmark.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[132]='02-064.htm';
dai[132]='COPYING BY REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE';
bun[132]='COPYING BY REVERSING BLACK AND WHITECOPYING BY REVERSING BLACK AND WHITE (B/W REVERSE)OverviewThis function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. It helps reduce toner consumption when copying originals with large black areas. This function can be used only for black &amp; while copy.B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.When this function is selected, the &quot;Original Image Type&quot; setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to &quot;Text&quot;.When this function is selected, you cannot use the [Colour Start] key.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [B/W Reverse] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the B/W reverse setting:Tap the [B/W Reverse] key to clear the checkmark.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[133]='02-065.htm';
dai[133]='SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS SEPARATELY AND COPYING THEM COLLECTIVELY';
bun[133]='SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS SEPARATELY AND COPYING THEM COLLECTIVELYSCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS SEPARATELY AND COPYING THEM COLLECTIVELY (JOB BUILD)OverviewThis function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in theThe job build mode must be specified before scanning the original.If the quick file folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder.The job build mode cannot be combined with the following functions:Dual Page Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, and Repeat Layout.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Job Build] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting:Tap the [Job Build] key to clear the checkmark.Placing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederInsert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line.Tap the [Preview] key to scan the first original pageAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERAs necessary, change copy settings for the next set of originalsTap [Change Setting of Following Original] on the action panel, and set the checkbox to . Change the settings as necessary.Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] keyRepeat steps 4 and 5 until all originals have been scanned.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Start Print] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.You cannot set the number of copies for each set.Back to top';
 body[134]='02-066.htm';
dai[134]='USING TWO MACHINES TO COPY IN PARALLEL';
bun[134]='USING TWO MACHINES TO COPY IN PARALLELUSING TWO MACHINES TO COPY IN PARALLEL (TANDEM COPY)OverviewThis function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time. Tandem Copy must be enabled in [Tandem Connection Setting] of setting mode.Master machine and slave machineThe master machine is a machine used to scan originals and print the data. The slave machine is registered in the master machine, and only print data without scanning originals.To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. You cannot use three machines or more for Tandem Copy.If Tandem Copy is enabled using a function provided in the master machine and not provided in a slave machine, a message will appear. For example, if a saddle finisher is installed in the master machine while not installed in a slave machine:Tandem Copy is enabled when specifying copies without stapling.Tandem Copy is disabled when specifying copies with stapling.If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.If you have configured the user authentication settings, Tandem Copy may not be enabled depending on authentication specified for the master and slave machines.Tandem Copy is enabled when user authentication is specified in the master machine.Tandem Copy is disabled when user authentication is specified in the slave machine while it is not specified in the master machine. If an odd number of sets is being made, one more set is output to the master machine.To use Tandem Copy:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Tandem Connection Setting].IP address information of the slave machine must be registered in the master machine. For the port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change the port number. The tandem setting To prohibit tandem transmission or reception:In "Setting mode (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Tandem Connection Setting].To prohibit tandem transmission enable [Disabling of Master Machine Mode].To prohibit tandem reception, enable [Disabling of Slave Machine Mode].OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the original and tap the [Additionally Scan] key.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tandem Copy] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the tandem copy setting:Tap the [Tandem Copy] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copiesUp to 9999 copies (sets) can be set. The specified number of copies are shared between the master and slave machines. If the number of copies is odd, the master machine makes more copies than the slave machine.If an incorrect number of copies is set:Tap the [C] key and then enter the correct number.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo cancel Tandem Copy:Tap the [STOP] keys on both the master and slave machines.Back to top';
 body[135]='02-067.htm';
dai[135]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE MAKING A COPY';
bun[135]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE MAKING A COPYCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE MAKING A COPY (ORIGINAL COUNT)OverviewThis function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making copies. By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, copy mistakes can be reduced.The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number &quot;1&quot; will appear to indicate that one original sheetOriginal Count must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the original count setting:Tap the [Original Count] key to clear the checkmark.Placing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERTap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] keyCheck the number of original sheetsIf the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets:Tap the [Cancel] key to stop the job.Tap the [OK] key to start copyingIf this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Start Print] key has been tapped.Back to top';
 body[136]='02-068.htm';
dai[136]='COLLECTIVELY COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES';
bun[136]='COLLECTIVELY COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZESCOLLECTIVELY COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)OverviewThis function copies originals of different sizes at the same time.When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.When mixed size originals are combined with auto ratio selection (Auto ratio selection and A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) are selected)When mixed size originals are combined with auto ratio selection, the ratio is adjusted individually for each original, enabling printing on a uniform paper size.Setting configured when the original is placedThere are two settings for mixed size originals: &quot;Same Width&quot; and &quot;Different Width&quot;.Same WidthDifferent WidthUse this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length.The originals are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.A3 and A4, B4 and B5, A4R and A5, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot; and 5-1/2&quot;&nbUse this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, A4 and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, B5 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;, 11&quMixed size original must be specified before scanning the original.When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different orientations (A4 and A4R (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R), etc.).To always scan the original in mixed size original mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Feeding Mode].OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] keyFor mixed size originals, set &quot;Original&quot; to &quot;Auto&quot;.Tap the [Same Width] or [Different Width] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the mixed size original setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place the original face up in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original as shown in the mixed size original screen.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[137]='02-069.htm';
dai[137]='COPYING THIN ORIGINALS';
bun[137]='COPYING THIN ORIGINALSCOPYING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE)OverviewUse this function when you scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. It helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original.&quot;2-Side to 2-Side&quot; and &quot;2-Side to 1-Side&quot; modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.To always scan the original in slow scan mode:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Feeding Mode].OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the slow scan mode setting:Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark.Place the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERIf the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[138]='02-070.htm';
dai[138]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE';
bun[138]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGEADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS)OverviewThis function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image.Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] keyTap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpnessAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the sharpness setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[139]='02-071.htm';
dai[139]='ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING';
bun[139]='ADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNINGADJUSTING RESOLUTION WHEN SCANNING (SCAN RESOLUTION)OverviewThis function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling the high-quality output or speed-priority output according to the application.Scan Resolution must be specified before scanning the original.The scan resolution setting is applied when making a full-size black &amp; white copy.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] keySelect the resolutionThe resolution can be set to both the document feeder and document glass. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[140]='02-072.htm';
dai[140]='ADJUSTING RED / GREEN / BLUE IN COPIES';
bun[140]='ADJUSTING RED / GREEN / BLUE IN COPIESADJUSTING RED / GREEN / BLUE IN COPIES(RGB)OverviewThis function selects any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue) to increase or decrease the selected colour tone.RGB must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] keyTap the key of the colour you want to adjustTap or slide the slider to adjust the colourAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Only one colour can be adjusted. If you adjust one colour and then adjust another colour, the adjustment of the first colour is cancelled.To cancel the RGB Adjust setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[141]='02-073.htm';
dai[141]='SUPPRESSING LIGHT AREAS OF ORIGINALS IN COPIES';
bun[141]='SUPPRESSING LIGHT AREAS OF ORIGINALS IN COPIESSUPPRESSING LIGHT AREAS OF ORIGINALS IN COPIES (SUPPRESS BACKGROUND)OverviewThis function suppresses light background areas of originals.Suppress Background must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Suppress Background] keyTap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressedAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the suppress background setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[142]='02-074.htm';
dai[142]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES';
bun[142]='INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIESINSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES(COVERS / INSERTS)OverviewThis function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet to make a copy. There are two types of insertion sheets.When inserting covers, see &quot;INSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIES&quot;.Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5Sheet inserting examplesWhen making a copy also on the insertion sheet, 2-sided copying can be specified for each of the insertion sheet and the paper. The following shows the copy results when an insertion sheet is inserted into the third page of six 1-sided original pages or tResult of copying a 1-sided original onto the insertion sheetCopy to insertion sheetPaper: 1-sided copyPaper: 2-sided copyNot copied Inserts an insertion sheet between the second and third pages of each set of copies.1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet.2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet.Result of copying 2-sided original to the insertion sheetCopy to insertion sheetPaper: 1-sided copyPaper: 2-sided copyNot copied Inserts an insertion sheet between the second and third pages of each set of copies.1-sided copy Makes a 1-sided copy of the third original page on an insertion sheet. *The fourth original page is not copied.2-sided copy Makes a 2-sided copy of the third and fourth original pages on an insertion sheet.Before using the insertion sheet function, load insertion sheets in the tray.First place the originals in the document feeder tray and configure the other copy function settings, and then specify the cover and insertion sheet.Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted.The document glass is not available for this function.When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original.This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.This setting is not available when the covers/inserts function is disabled in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.OperationPlace the original in the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] keyAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERTap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] keyTap the &quot;Insertion Sheet&quot; tabTap the insertion page display keyEnter the number of the page you want to insert a sheet into using the numeric keys, and then tap the [Enter] keyThe total number of insertion sheets is displayed at the side of [Enter] key. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the number of insertion sheets. After the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.Before Back CoverAn insert sheet can be inserted iBefore Back Cover can be used when a Back Cover is printed.Only a blank page can be used for [Before Back Cover].If copying to the insert sheet is set to other than [Make No Copy], [Before Back Cover] cannot be used.If you have entered an incorrect insertion page number:Tap the [Page Layout] key and change the page.CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETSTo cancel inserting insertion sheets:Tap the [Cancel All] key.Tap the [Change] keyWhen making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] keyWhen only inserting insertion sheet A, select the [Make No Copy]. After the settings are completed, tap .To change an insertion sheet:Tap the [Paper Tray] key, and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded. When inserting tab paper, you can make a copy on the tabs of the tab paper. Tap the [Tab Copy] key and adjust the image shift width. For the tab copy settings, see "MAKING A COPY ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB COPY)"When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet, you cannot use label sheets, transparency films, or tab paper for insertion. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.If the paper tray is inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.Specify the settings for insertion type B through K as requiredTo specify the settings for insertion type B through K, tap the &quot;Insertion Sheet&quot; tab in step 3 before tapping the corresponding key from [Insertion Type B] to [Insert Type K] key, and follow steps 4 through 7.Check the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[143]='02-075.htm';
dai[143]='ADJUSTING THE COLOUR OF A COPY';
bun[143]='ADJUSTING THE COLOUR OF A COPYADJUSTING THE COLOUR OF A COPY (COLOUR BALANCE)OverviewThis function adjusts the colour of a colour copy image. It divides each of colours, yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, into eight gradations, and adjusts the density of each gradation. All the eight gradations can be adjusted once.Colour Balance must be specified before scanning the original.To change the default colour balance setting:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Colour Adjust] → [Initial Colour Balance Setting].OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Colour Balance] keyTap the tab of the colour you want to adjustTap or slide the slider to adjust the colour balanceTo individually adjust eight sliders, set the [Set in a Batch] checkbox to , and tap the slider. As necessary, tap the tab of each colour, and repeat this step.Colour Balance SettingTo return the current colour balance to the default, tap the [Size Reset] key.To return all colour balances to defaults, tap the [Cancel All] key. The values of all eight gradations will return to the default colour balance values. The default colour balance is set by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administratorPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Colour Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[144]='02-076.htm';
dai[144]='ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY';
bun[144]='ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPYADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (BRIGHTNESS)OverviewThis function adjusts the brightness of a colour copy image.[Brightness] must be specified before scanning the original.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Brightness] keyTap or slide the slider to adjust the brightnessAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the brightness setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[145]='02-077.htm';
dai[145]='ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY (SATURATION) OF A COPY';
bun[145]='ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY (SATURATION) OF A COPYADJUSTING THE INTENSITY (SATURATION) OF A COPY (INTENSITY)OverviewThis function adjusts the intensity (saturation) of a colour copy image.[Intensity] must be specified before scanning the original.This function cannot be combined with [Copy of Copy] or [Colour Tone Enhancement] in Exposure.OperationTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Intensity] keyTap or slide the slider to adjust the intensityAfter the settings are completed, tap and the [Back] key in sequence.To cancel the intensity setting:Tap the [Off] key.Place an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSCheck the preview image in the preview screenTo cancel all settings:Tap the [CA] key.Tap the [Colour Start] key to start copyingTo make two or more sets of copies:Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies.Back to top';
 body[146]='02-078.htm';
dai[146]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA';
bun[146]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATASAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATAOverviewIf you specify File to make a copy, the scanned original data will be saved as a file to the main folder or a registered user folder. The stored file can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to recopy the original without having to locate it.When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Copy_04042011_112030)Stored to: Main FolderOperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSDepending on functions to be used, there are also cases where settings are required to be made before a preview is carried out.Tap the [File] key to append file informationTo configure the user name, file name, folder, and property settings, see &quot;DETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILING&quot;.After the settings are completed, tap .Select copy settings and then tap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keySimultaneously with starting copy, the original is stored as a file.The selected copy settings are also saved.Back to top';
 body[147]='02-079.htm';
dai[147]='SAVING DATA IN QUICK FILE MODE';
bun[147]='SAVING DATA IN QUICK FILE MODESAVING DATA IN QUICK FILE MODEOverviewIf you specify Quick File to make a copy, the scanned original data will be saved as a file to the quick file folder. The stored file can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to recopy the original without having to locate it.When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Copy_04042011_112030)Stored to: Quick File FolderWhen user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File folder can be changed as required.To delete all files in the Quick File folder with the exception of protected files:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Delete All Quick Files]. Configure settings to have all files deleted when the power is turned on as required.OperationPlace an original, and tap the [Preview] keyPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Quick File] key on the action panelWhen a message relating to saving confidential information appears, tap the [OK] key.To cancel Quick File:Tap the [Quick File] key to clear the checkmark.Select copy settings and then tap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] keySave the original as an image to the Quick File folder. When you tap the [Start] key, a confirmation message appears saying that the image is saved in the Quick File folder.To change the message display time, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Operation Settings] → [Message Time Setting]. Back to top';
 body[148]='02-080.htm';
dai[148]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREEN';
bun[148]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREENJOB MANAGEMENT SCREENOverviewTapping the [Job Management] key in the initial screen displays the job management screen. In the job management screen, you can check reserved jobs, the job in progress, and completed jobs.The job management screen for each mode can be switched to when you touch the tab,To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab.When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items:STOPPING/DELETING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDPRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED COPY JOBCHECKING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDCHECKING COMPLETED COPY JOBSBack to top';
 body[149]='02-081.htm';
dai[149]='STOPPING / DELETING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED';
bun[149]='STOPPING / DELETING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDSTOPPING / DELETING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDYou can cancel or delete a reserved job or the job in progress when a copy mistake occurs.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Job Queue] keyWhen you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer, tap the [Spool] key.Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete, and then tap the [Stop/Delete] key on the action panelTap the [Yes] keyTo delete more than one job, operate the checkbox for [Enter Multi Selection Mode] on the action panel so that it looks like .Back to top';
 body[150]='02-082.htm';
dai[150]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED COPY JOB';
bun[150]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED COPY JOBPRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED COPY JOBThis function gives priority to a copied job arising later to jobs already in queue for printing or sending.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Job Queue] keyTap the job for priority processing and then tap the key or the keyBack to top';
 body[151]='02-083.htm';
dai[151]='CHECKING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED';
bun[151]='CHECKING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDCHECKING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDYou can check the settings of a copy job in progress or reserved.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Job Queue] keyTap the job whose contents you wish to check, and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panelFor information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;, see &quot;READING THE JOB LIST&quot;.Back to top';
 body[152]='02-084.htm';
dai[152]='CHECKING COMPLETED COPY JOBS';
bun[152]='CHECKING COMPLETED COPY JOBSCHECKING COMPLETED COPY JOBSOverviewYou can check the settings of completed copy jobs. To check completed jobs, you need to be using document filing.INITIAL DOCUMENT FILING SCREENSAVING AND USING PRINT DATAOperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Complete] keyTap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panelJobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them.For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;, see &quot;READING THE JOB LIST&quot;.Back to top';
 body[153]='02-085.htm';
dai[153]='OUTPUT SETTINGS';
bun[153]='OUTPUT SETTINGSPUNCHING COPIESOUTPUT SETTINGSOverviewConfigure the output settings for copies using Sort, Group, Offset, Staple, Punch, or Fold. Also specify the output destination of copies.Output Tray Specify the destination to output copies. Select the output tray from [Offset Tray] and [Right Tray]. If a finisher (100-sheet stapling) or saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) is installed, you can select[Offset Tray], [Middle Tray] or [Right Tray]. If a high capacity stacker is installed, you can select [Top Tray] or [Stacker Tray]. If a finisher or saddle finisher is not installed, you can select the [Centre Tray] or [Right Tray] key.CHANGING OUTPUT DESTINATIONOffsetThis function outputs copies while shifting them set by set. Setting the checkbox to enables the offset function, and setting it to disables the function. This function is available only when the finisher or saddle finisher is installed. Selecting the staple function clears the Offset checkmark automatically.Separator Page The function inserts separator pages for every specified number copies or for every job before they are output.Sort/Group Select the sorting method when copying the scanned original. &quot;Sort&quot; sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them. &quot;Group&quot; sorts the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them. CHANGING THE METHOD TO ORGANIZING OUTPUT Staple Each set of copies can be stapled, or the sheets can be folded at the centre and stapled.The staple function is available only when the finisher or saddle finisher is installed.The saddle stitch function is available only when the saddle finisher is installed.STAPLING EACH SET OF SORTED COPIESSADDLE STITCHING FOR SORTED COPIESFoldCopies can be folded and output.The fold function is available only when the saddle finisher or folding unit is installed.FOLDING OUTPUT PAPERPunchThis function punches copies and outputs them. The punch function is available only when the punch module is installed. Back to top';
 body[154]='02-089.htm';
dai[154]='SPECIFYING BY IMAGE SIZE';
bun[154]='SPECIFYING BY IMAGE SIZESPECIFYING BY IMAGE SIZEOverviewSpecify the original image size and output image size to make a copy.To make a copy with the same ratio between the vertical and horizontal sizes, enter either one of the vertical and horizontal sizes.To return the ratio to 100%:Tap the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu, and tap the [100%] key.OperationTap the [Copy Ratio] keyTap the [by Size] key of the [Zoom] tabSpecify the original image size and output sizeTap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.After the settings are completed, tap .In the preview screen, check whether or not the settings produce the required results.If you have entered an incorrect size:Tap the [C] key, and then enter the correct size.Back to top';
 body[155]='02-090.htm';
dai[155]='CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS';
bun[155]='CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETSCHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT)OverviewYou can check the layout of registered covers and insertion sheets. They can be edited or deleted if necessary.The editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below.For the &quot;Cover&quot;, you can change settings such as the paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided.For &quot;Insertion Sheet&quot;, you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into.OperationFirst specify settings for the front, back cover, or insertion sheet, and then carry out the following procedure.INSERTING FRONT AND BACK COVERS INTO COPIESINSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIESTap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] keyTap the [Page Layout] keyIf the settings for the covers or insertion sheets are not configured, the [Page Layout] key is disabled.Check the page layoutTo exit this job after checking the page layout, tap .To edit or delete, tap the appropriate key. When a message appears, tap the [Delete] or [Amend] key.Back to top';
 body[156]='03-001.htm';
dai[156]='IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT';
bun[156]='IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTIN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe machine is equipped with a full colour printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. The PCL6 and PS printer driver are available in the Windows environment. PCL6 The machine support the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 printer control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer driver. PSPrinter driver that supports the page description language, PostScript&reg; 3™, developed by Adobe Systems IncorporatedIf it is desired to use the Windows standard PS printer driver, the PPD driver must be used.To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see &quot;2. SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT&quot; in the Software Setup Guide.Screenshots for the PCL6 printer driver are mainly used to explain how to print data in the Windows environment. The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver you are using.Maximum print area: 319 mm x 480 mmImage quality assurance range: 303 mmBack to top';
 body[157]='03-002.htm';
dai[157]='IN MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT';
bun[157]='IN MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTIN MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENTOverviewThe machine is equipped with a full colour printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed.The Macintosh environment supports the PS printer driver.PSPrinter driver that supports the page description language, PostScript&reg; 3™, developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and uses a PPD file.To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see &quot;3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT&quot; in the Software Setup Guide.Maximum print area: 319 mm x 480 mmImage quality assurance range: 303 mmBack to top';
 body[158]='03-003.htm';
dai[158]='BASIC PRINTING';
bun[158]='BASIC PRINTINGBASIC PRINTINGOverviewThis section explains how to print a document from &quot;WordPad&quot;, which is a standard accessory application in Windows.The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application such as [Print].The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.The machine name that normally appears in the [Printer] menu is [MX-xxxx]. (&quot;xxxx&quot; is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.)OperationClick of WordPad and select [Print].In Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista, select [Print] from the [File] menu.Select the printer driver for the machine and click the [Preferences] buttonIf the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list.Click the [Paper] tab and select the paper size Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the application.Up to eight desired paper sizes can be registered. Select [Custom Paper] or one of [User 1] to [User 7] from the pull-down menu and click the [Custom] button. It is convenient to register particular paper sizes that are frequently used.To select settings in other tabs, click the desired tab and then select the settings.Click the [OK] button to start printingBack to top';
 body[159]='03-005.htm';
dai[159]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPE';
bun[159]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPEPRINTING ON ENVELOPEOverviewThe bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. Before using an actual envelope, you should do a trial print and check a preview image.For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see &quot;APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES&quot;.For the procedure for loading paper into the bypass tray, see &quot;BYPASS TRAY&quot;.For details on paper selection, see &quot;CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTING&quot;.This feature rotates an image by 180 degrees to print paper that can be loaded in only one orientation such as envelopes. For more information, see &quot;ROTATING A PRINT IMAGE BY 180 DEGREES&quot;.OperationSelect the envelope size in the settings of the application (&quot;Page Setup&quot; in many applications) and then perform the following steps.Click the [Paper] tab and select the envelope size from the &quot;Paper Size&quot; menuSelect [Bypass Tray] from the &quot;Paper Source&quot; menu of &quot;Paper Selection&quot; Envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.Select [Envelope] from &quot;Paper Type&quot;Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and load envelopes into the bypass tray.Back to top';
 body[160]='03-006.htm';
dai[160]='PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED';
bun[160]='PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDPRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDOverviewThe user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used. Therefore, check with the administrator of the machine before printing.The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.When black and white printing is set in the printer driver, printing is possible without entering user information. For black and white print settings, see &quot;SELECTING COLOUR MODE&quot;. Other print functions may also be restricted. For details, checkIf you have configured &quot;Printing Policy&quot; in the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, users are required to be authenticated for each printing.The machine\'s user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD driver is installed and the Windows standard PS printer driver is used. Therefore, printing will fail if printing by an invalid user is disabled in the Setting mode (administrator).To disable printing by an invalid user:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Disabling of Printing by Invalid User].OperationIn the printer driver properties window of the application, select the printer driver of the machine and click the [Preferences] buttonClick the [Job Handling] tabEnter user informationWhen authentication is carried out using the login name/password, set the [Login Name] and [Password] checkboxes to , and enter your login name and password. Enter the password using 1 to 32 characters.When authentication is carried out using the user number, select the [User Number] checkbox and enter your user number using 5 to 8 digits.If you have configured &quot;Printing Policy&quot; in the [Configuration] tab so that user authentication is always performed, user information cannot be entered here. User information must be entered in the dialog box that appears each time the user starEnter the user name and job name as necessaryClick the [User Name] checkbox, and enter your user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.Click the [Job Name] checkbox, and enter a job name using up to 30 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear.To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox.Click the [OK] button to start printingBack to top';
 body[161]='03-007.htm';
dai[161]='SEEING HELP OF THE PRINTER DRIVER';
bun[161]='SEEING HELP OF THE PRINTER DRIVERSEEING HELP OF THE PRINTER DRIVERIf there are things you do not understand in the settings of the Windows printer driver, see Help.OperationSelect the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] buttonThe button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.Click a tab that includes the item you want to see Help aboutClick the [Help] buttonHelp information appears for the settings of the tab you clicked. Further, if you want to open the dialog box and see Help about settings, click the underlined character at the top of the Help page.Other help functionsThe following methods are available to view Help in addition to clicking the [Help] button in the printer driver setting page.Pop-up helpAfter clicking a target item in the setting page, press the [F1] key on the keyboard to display the Help pop-up window.In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the button in the upper right of the printer driver setting window, then click a setting item. You will then be able to view help information about that setting item.Information iconSome functions are not available depending on a combination of setting items. In this case, (information icon) appears on a setting item. Clicking this icon displays the explanation of restrictions.Back to top';
 body[162]='03-008.htm';
dai[162]='SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING';
bun[162]='SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTINGSAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTINGOverviewSettings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used settings or complex settings makes it convenient to select those settings the next time you need to use them.To delete the saved settings:In step 2 of &quot;USING SAVED SETTINGS&quot;, select the user settings that you want to delete and click the [Delete] button.OperationSaving settingsSelect the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] buttonThe button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.Configure the print settings in each tab and click the [Save] buttonCheck the displayed settingsEnter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters and click the [OK] buttonUsing saved settingsSelect the machine\'s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] buttonThe button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Property] or [Print Preferences]) may vary depending on the application.Select the user settings that you wish to use, and click the [OK] buttonBack to top';
 body[163]='03-010.htm';
dai[163]='CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS';
bun[163]='CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGSCHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGSOverviewYou can change the default settings of the printer driver. The changed settings are saved, and used as the default settings when printing data from the application.OperationClick the [Start] button, and then click [Devices and Printers].In Windows 8/Server 2012, right-click in the startup window (or swipe upward from the bottom edge), then select [Taskbar], [All Applications], [Control Panel] , [Devices and Printers] and then [Printers].In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button and then click [Printers and Faxes]. In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [Start] menu, select [Control Panels], select [Printers and Other Hardware], and then select [Printers aRight-click the icon of the printer driver of the machine.In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the icon of the printer driver of the machineClick the [Printer properties] menu.In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [File] menu, and then click [Properties].In Windows Vista, click the [Organize] menu, and then click [Properties]Click the [Default Settings] button in the [General] tab.In Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Printing Preferences] button in the [General] tabConfigure the settings and click the [OK] buttonFor explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.Back to top';
 body[164]='03-011.htm';
dai[164]='CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTING';
bun[164]='CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTINGCHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTINGOverviewBefore printing, you can check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine\'s trays. Click the [Tray Status] button of &quot;Paper Selection&quot; in the [Paper] tab. The relationships between the &quot;Paper Size&quot; setting and the &quot;Paper Selection&quot; setting are as follows:If &quot;Paper Source&quot; is set to [Auto Select] in &quot;Paper Selection&quot;:The tray that contains paper of the size and type selected in &quot;Paper Size&quot; and &quot;Paper Type&quot; is automatically selected to print data.If &quot;Paper Source&quot; is not set to [Auto Select] in &quot;Paper Selection&quot;:Data is printed on the paper loaded into the specified tray regardless of the setting of &quot;Paper Size&quot;.When you have set &quot;Paper Source&quot; to [Bypass Tray], be sure to select &quot;Paper Type&quot;. Check the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machine, check that paper of that type has been loaded into the bypass tray, and then selectIf &quot;Paper Type&quot; is set to [Auto Select] in &quot;Paper Selection&quot;:A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in &quot;Paper Size&quot; is automatically selected to print data. (The factory default setting is plain paper only.)If &quot;Paper Type&quot; is not set to [Auto Select] in &quot;Paper Selection&quot;:Data is printed from the tray that contains the specified type of paper based on the size specified in &quot;Paper Size&quot;.Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray.For more information, see &quot;BYPASS TRAY".If 11 USER TYPE11 is selected from 01 USER TYPE1 in Paper Type, the paper type set in USER TYPE can be used. If paper settings are stored in USER TYPE, the USER TYPE name changes to the name stored in the paper settings.When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Printer Settings]To exclude the bypass tray from the trays that can be selected when [Auto Select] is selected:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Bypass Tray Settings] → [Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select].If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that this setting be enabled.Back to top';
 body[165]='03-012.htm';
dai[165]='BASIC PRINTING';
bun[165]='BASIC PRINTINGBASIC PRINTINGOverviewThe following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory application &quot;TextEdit&quot; in Mac OS X.To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings, see &quot;3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT&quot; in the Software Setup Guide.The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application such as [Print].The machine name that normally appears in the &quot;Printer&quot; menu is [SCxxxxxx]. (&quot;xxxxxx&quot; is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.)OperationSelect [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and select the printerIf the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list.Configure paper and click the [OK] buttonSet the paper size, paper orientation, and copy ratio.Select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the correct printer is selectedSelect the print settingsIn Mac OS X v10.4, click next to [Copies &amp; Pages] and select the settings that you wish to configure from the pull-down menu. The corresponding setting screen will appear.In Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8, if the settings do not appear, click next to the printer name.Click the [Print] button to start printingBack to top';
 body[166]='03-014.htm';
dai[166]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPE';
bun[166]='PRINTING ON ENVELOPEPRINTING ON ENVELOPEOverviewThe bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. Before using an actual envelope, you should do a trial print and check a preview image.For the types of paper that can be used in the bypass tray, see &quot;APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES&quot;.For the procedure for loading paper into the bypass tray, see &quot;BYPASS TRAY&quot;.For details on paper selection, see &quot;CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTING&quot;.This feature rotates an image by 180 degrees to print paper that can be loaded in only one orientation such as envelopes. For more information, see &quot;ROTATING A PRINT IMAGE BY 180 DEGREES&quot;.OperationSelect the envelope size from &quot;Paper Size&quot; in the Page Setup window, then click the [OK] button Click the [Paper] tab and select the envelope size from the "Paper Size" menu.Select [Paper Feed] in the print settings windowSelect [Bypass Tray(Envelope)] from &quot;All Pages From&quot;Envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope] and load envelopes into the bypass tray.Back to top';
 body[167]='03-015.htm';
dai[167]='PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED';
bun[167]='PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDPRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDOverviewThe user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used. Therefore, check with the administrator of the machine before printing.OperationSelect [Print] from the [File] menu of the applicationCheck that the printer name of this machine is selected, then select [Job Handling]In Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8, select [Job Handling] and click the [Authentication] tab.Enter user informationWhen authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in &quot;Login Name&quot; and your password (1 to 32 characters) in &quot;Password&quot;.When authentication is carried out using the user number, enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in &quot;User Number&quot;.Enter the user name and job name as necessaryEnter the user name using up to 32 characters. The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a user name, your PC login name will appear.Enter a job name using up to 30 characters. The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine. If you do not enter a job name, the file name set in the application will appear.After entering your login name and password, or user number, click the button to lock; this is convenient when printing based on the same user authentication the next time.Click the [Print] buttonBack to top';
 body[168]='03-016.htm';
dai[168]='CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTING';
bun[168]='CHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTINGCHECKING PAPER TRAY SETTINGOverviewThis section explains how to configure [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window.If [Auto Select] ([Auto] in Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8) is selectedA tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in &quot;Paper Size&quot; of the Page Setup window is automatically selected to print data. (The factory default setting is plain paper only.)When a paper tray is specifiedData is printed on the paper loaded in the specified tray regardless of the &quot;Paper Size&quot; setting in the Page Setup window.For the bypass tray, also specify the paper type. Check that the paper type that is set for the bypass tray of the machine, check that paper of that type has been loaded into the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray (paper type).If the paper type is specifiedData is printed from the tray that contains the specified type of paper based on the size specified in &quot;Paper Size&quot; in the Page Setup window. Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray.For the procedure for loading paper into the bypass tray, see &quot;BYPASS TRAY&quot;.When [Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [PTo exclude the bypass tray from the trays that can be selected when [Auto Select] ([Auto] in Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8) is selected:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Bypass Tray Settings] → [Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select].Back to top';
 body[169]='03-017.htm';
dai[169]='SELECTING COLOUR MODE';
bun[169]='SELECTING COLOUR MODESELECTING COLOUR MODEOverviewThis section explains how to select colour mode in the printer driver setting window to print data.Colour mode types&quot;Color Mode&quot; can be selected from the following three options.Auto DetectionThe machine automatically determines whether each page is colour or black and white and prints pages accordingly. Pages with colours other than black and white are printed using Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner. Pages that are only bColorAll pages are printed in colour. Both colour data and black and white data are printed using Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner.GrayscaleAll pages are printed in black and white. Colour data such as images or materials for presentations are printed using black toner only. This mode helps conserve colour toner when you do not need to print in colour, such as when proofreading or checking thWhen &quot;Color Mode&quot; is set to [Automatic]: Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-colour (Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. When you want such jobs to be cou When the data is created as colour dataWhen the application treats the data as colour data even though the data is black and whiteWhen an image is hidden under a black and white imageOperationWindowsClick the [Color] tab and select &quot;Color Mode&quot;Black and white printing[Black and White] in the [Color] tab can also be configured in the [Main] tab. Set the [Black and White Print] checkbox in the [Main] tab to .If the [Black and White Print] checkbox in the [Main] tab is set to , [Black and White] in the [Color] tab is selected.MacintoshSelect [Color] and select &quot;Color Mode&quot;Back to top';
 body[170]='03-018.htm';
dai[170]='SELECTING THE RESOLUTION';
bun[170]='SELECTING THE RESOLUTIONSELECTING THE RESOLUTIONOverviewThis section explains how to select the resolution from &quot;Print Mode&quot; to print data.Types of print modesThe following three selections are available for &quot;Print Mode&quot;.NormalThis mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table.High QualityThe print quality of colour photos and text is high.FineSelect this mode to print colour photos more clearly or graphic gradation images more finely.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab and select &quot;Print Mode&quot;MacintoshSelect [Color] and select &quot;Print Mode&quot;Back to top';
 body[171]='03-019.htm';
dai[171]='2-SIDED PRINTING';
bun[171]='2-SIDED PRINTING2-SIDED PRINTINGOverviewThis section explains how to print data on both sides of paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper.Result of 2-sided printingPaper orientationPrint resultsWindowsMacintoshWindowsMacintoshPortrait2-Sided(Book)Long-edged binding2-Sided(Tablet)Short-edged bindingLandscape2-Sided(Book)Short-edged binding2-Sided(Tablet)Long-edged binding&nbsp;The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the left or right side.The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the top.OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)]If necessary, you can select the method of implementing 2-sided printing. Click the [Compatibility] button in the [Advanced] tab and select a desired mode from &quot;Duplex Style&quot;.MacintoshSelect [Layout] and select [Long-edged binding] or [Short-edged binding]Back to top';
 body[172]='03-020.htm';
dai[172]='PRINTING TO MATCH THE PAPER SIZE';
bun[172]='PRINTING TO MATCH THE PAPER SIZEPRINTING TO MATCH THE PAPER SIZEOverviewData is automatically enlarged or reduced to match the paper size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging an A4 or letter size document to A3 or ledger size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document. If you are using the PCL6 or PS printer driver, you can fit A0-, A1- or A2-size data into letter (A4) size. Select a desired paper size from &quot;Paper Size&quot; of the [Paper] tab.OperationThe following example explains how to print an A4 size document on A3 size paper.WindowsClick the [Paper] tab and select the paper size of print dataSelect [Fit To Paper Size] and select the actual print paper sizeMacintoshSelect [Paper Handling] and check the paper size of print dataTo change the paper size of print data, select [Page Setup] to display the &quot;Paper Size&quot; menu, and make a required change.Select [Scale to fit paper size] and select the actual print paper sizeBack to top';
 body[173]='03-021.htm';
dai[173]='PRINTING MULTI-PAGE DATA ON A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[173]='PRINTING MULTI-PAGE DATA ON A SINGLE PAGEPRINTING MULTI-PAGE DATA ON A SINGLE PAGEOverviewThis function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you want to conserve paper. Using the PCL6 or PS printer driver, you can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets.Results of printing multiple pagesWhen [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) or [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) is selected, the following print results will be obtained, depending on the selected page order. The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.N-Up (Pages per sheet)Print resultsLeft To RightRight To LeftTop To Bottom (When the print orientation is landscape)2-Up (2 pages per sheet)N-Up (Pages per sheet)Print resultsRight, and DownDown, and RightLeft, and DownDown, and Left4-Up (4 pages per sheet)Note the following when printing multiple pages on one sheet:In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16. Printing 8 pages on one sheet is not supported.OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and select the number of pages per sheetIf you wish to print borderlines, set the [Border] checkbox to .Select the order of the pagesWhen you are using the PCL6 or PS printer driver, you can print multiple pages on one sheet without changing the original size. Click the [Compatibility] button in the [Advanced] tab and click the [100% N-Up] checkbox.Normal printing only on the first page (PCL6 and PS only)Click the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Layout Print] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect [N-Up w/o 1st Page]In &quot;N-Up Printing&quot;, select the number of images per sheet and click the [OK] buttonMacintoshSelect [Layout] and select the number of pages per sheetSelect the order of the pagesIf you wish to print borderlines, select the desired type of borderline.Back to top';
 body[174]='03-022.htm';
dai[174]='STAPLING COPIES / PUNCHING COPIES';
bun[174]='STAPLING COPIES / PUNCHING COPIESSTAPLING COPIES / PUNCHING COPIESOverviewStaple functionThis function staples copies and outputs them. If you use the staple function, for example, when preparing materials for meetings, you can drastically reduce the number of steps required to create materials. Using this function with the 2-sided print func Specify the binding edge and the number of staples to make a staple print as shown below.Types of staple functionsStapleLeftRightTop1 Staple*2 Staples*The staple direction varies depending on the paper size or orientation.Punch functionThis function punches copies and outputs them. A punch position can be set at a binding edge.Types of punch functionsLeftRightTopThe number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.A finisher or saddle finisher is required to use the staple function.To use the punch function, install a punch unit in a finisher or saddle finisher.For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see &quot;SPECIFICATIONS&quot; in &quot;Quick Start Guide&quot;.The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled includes the number of covers or inserts if they are inserted.For the saddle stitch function, see &quot;CREATING A PAMPHLET&quot;.The staple and offset (which outputs while shifting sheets job by job) functions cannot be used simultaneously.If the use of a finisher is prohibited in the settings of this machine, the staple and punch functions are not available.If the use of the staple or punch function is prohibited in the settings of this machine, copies cannot be stapled or punched.OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;Set staple or punchTo staple copies, select the number of staples in the &quot;Staple&quot; menu.To punch copies, set the type of punches in the "Punch" menu.MacintoshSelect [Printer Features], then select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;Set staple or punchTo staple copies, select the number of staples in the &quot;Staple&quot; menu.To punch copies, set the type of punches in the "Punch" menu.Back to top';
 body[175]='03-023.htm';
dai[175]='CREATING A PAMPHLET';
bun[175]='CREATING A PAMPHLETCREATING A PAMPHLET(PAMPHLET STYLE / SADDLE STITCH)OverviewFolding paper in half prints data on the front and back sides of paper to make a booklet like a pamphlet. When a saddle finisher is installed, copies are automatically folded in half and output if the saddle stitch and staple functions are enabled. This fOperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and select [Pamphlet Style]Select the saddle stitch printing method from the pull-down menu.Selecting [Tiled Pamphlet] doubles the paper size specified by the application to print data.Selecting [2-Up Pamphlet] reduces the paper size specified by the application in the same way as for 2-Up, and prints data with the paper size unchanged.If [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet] is selected, an original is divided and printed for each maximum number of sheets to be stapled even if the total number of pages exceeds the maximum number of sheets to be stapled. Joining the stapled sets creates oIf [Full Image Pamphlet] is selected, data is printed with a full image. Go to step 2.If you select [Full Image Pamphlet], click the [Settings] button to configure detailed settingsIn &quot;Fit To Paper Size&quot;, specify the size to print one page of the original (size that is equivalent to one page of a Pamphlet Copy).Select the print paper size in &quot;Output Paper Size&quot;.Select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;Select the binding edge from [Left] or [Right]. [2 Staples] on the &quot;Staple&quot; menu is available when a saddle finisher is installed.MacintoshSelect [Printer Features], then select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;[2 Staples] on the &quot;Staple&quot; menu is available when a saddle finisher is installed.Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet]Back to top';
 body[176]='03-024.htm';
dai[176]='FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING';
bun[176]='FOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTINGFOLDING PAPER FOR PRINTING (FOLD)Overview If a folding unit is installed, print paper can be folded.For example, if A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) and A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size print images are mixed, you can fold A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size paper to the A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) sizeIn Macintosh environment, you can use the Half Fold and Multiple Fold (Staple) functions.To use the Half Fold and Saddle Fold (Staple) functions, you need to mount a saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling).Types of paper folding functionsFolding typesPrint SideFold OrientationFolding resultsDescriptionZ-Fold--For example, if A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) and A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size print images are mixed, only the A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size paper is folded and changed to A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;1C-FoldInsideOpen RightFor example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.Open LeftOutsideOpen RightOpen LeftAccordion Fold-Open RightFor example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.-Open LeftDouble FoldInsideOpen RightFor example, paper is folded in four so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet.Open LeftOutsideOpen RightOpen LeftHalf FoldInside-Paper is folded in the centre. Copies are output sheet by sheet.Outside-Saddle FoldInside-Multiple sheets are collectively folded in the centre.Outside-Multi-Sheet Fold - Staple--Multiple sheets are collectively stapled and folded in the centre, which is finished like a pamphlet.When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout, the &quot;Multi-Sheet Fold - Staple&quot; function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet.The Fold function cannot be used when [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex] is selected.The Fold function cannot be used together with the Punch and Staple functions. However, the Z-Fold function can be used together with the punch and staple functions when one of the following paper size is specified.B4, A3, Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;)The Saddle Fold function folds five sheets every set. For example, if an original has 12 A4 size plain sheets, they are folded three times in total: 5 sheets + 5 sheets + 2 sheets.Howerver, some types of paper reduces the number of sheets that are folded every set. For example, heavy paper is folded on a three-sheet basis.OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tab and select &quot;Fold&quot;Click the [Settings] buttonIf you select &quot;Z-Fold&quot;, set the checkbox of the paper size for paper folding to .Select the orientation and binding edge of the print sideMacintoshPaper Folding Settings (Saddle Tray)Select [Printer Features], then select [Saddle Fold]Configure Fold settingsPaper Folding Settings (Folding Unit)Select [Printer Features], then select [Folding]Configure Fold settingsBack to top';
 body[177]='03-025.htm';
dai[177]='TRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPER';
bun[177]='TRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPERTRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPEROverview If a trimming module is installed, you can trim off excess edges of paper for a finer finish. The Windows PPD printer driver does not support this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tabClick the [Trimming] buttonSet the [Trimming] checkbox to , and specify &quot;Trimming Width&quot;MacintoshSelect [Trimming], set the [Trimming] checkbox toSpecify &quot;Trimming Width&quot;Back to top';
 body[178]='03-026.htm';
dai[178]='ADDING A MARGIN';
bun[178]='ADDING A MARGINADDING A MARGINOverviewThis section explains how to move the printing position and add a margin to the left, right, or top of paper. This function is useful when characters overlap a staple or punch position.This function can be used with the staple or punch function when a finisher of saddle finisher is installed.Not using the Margin ShiftUsing the Margin ShiftOperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;Select &quot;Margin Shift&quot;Select a target from the &quot;Margin Shift&quot; menu.To change the numeric value of a margin:First, select a value close to the desired value from the setting items in the pull-down menu, and click the [Settings] button. Then, click or directly enter a numeric value.MacintoshSelect [Printer Features], then select &quot;Binding Edge&quot;Select &quot;Margin Shift&quot;Back to top';
 body[179]='03-027.htm';
dai[179]='SPLITTING INTO MULTIPLE SHEETS FOR POSTER-SIZED PRINTING';
bun[179]='SPLITTING INTO MULTIPLE SHEETS FOR POSTER-SIZED PRINTINGSPLITTING INTO MULTIPLE SHEETS FOR POSTER-SIZED PRINTINGOverviewOne page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;2), 9 sheets (3&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3) or 16 sheets (4&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster. ToThis function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.OperationWindowsClick the [Paper] tabSet the [Poster Printing] checkbox to , and click the [Poster Settings] buttonFrom the pull-down menu, select the number of sheets of paper to be usedWhen printing borderlines or creating overlapping edges (overlap function) to enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, set each checkbox to .Back to top';
 body[180]='03-028.htm';
dai[180]='ROTATING A PRINT IMAGE BY 180 DEGREES';
bun[180]='ROTATING A PRINT IMAGE BY 180 DEGREESROTATING A PRINT IMAGE BY 180 DEGREESOverviewThis feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes).This function is available in a Windows environment.OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tabSet the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox to set toBack to top';
 body[181]='03-029.htm';
dai[181]='ENLARGING / REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE';
bun[181]='ENLARGING / REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGEENLARGING / REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGEOverviewThis function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. When using the PS printer driver for Windows, individually specify the horizontal and vertical zoom ratios to transform an image for printing. (XY-Zoom) This function is useful when sliOperationWindowsClick the [Paper] tabSelect [Zoom] ([XY-Zoom] for the PS printer driver), and also select the actual print paper sizeClick the [Settings] buttonEnter the percentageClicking the button allows you to specify the value in increments of 1%. In addition, select [Upper Left] or [Center] to specify which location on paper is used as the standard to print an image.For XY-Zoom (in use of the PS printer driver), the following settings are available. The Windows PPD printer driver does not support this function. Different ratio settings for &quot;Width&quot; and &quot;Length&quot;Direct entry of zoom size in &quot;millimeters&quot; or &quot;inches&quot;[Lock Aspert Ratio] checkbox (Specify the same ratio for &quot;Width&quot; and &quot;Length&quot;.)MacintoshSelect [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%) Click the [OK] buttonBack to top';
 body[182]='03-030.htm';
dai[182]='ADJUSTING THE LINE THICKNESS';
bun[182]='ADJUSTING THE LINE THICKNESSADJUSTING THE LINE THICKNESSOverviewThis function decreases or increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSelect a number from the [Line Width Settings] pull-down menu The units of line-width adjustment can be set to &quot;Fixed Width&quot; or &quot;Ratio&quot;. Click the [Compatibility] button and select the units from the &quot;Line Width Unit&quot; menu. To print all line data in the minimum line width, click the [Compatibility] button and click the [Minimum Line Width] checkbox. This option is available when the colour mode is set to black and white.Back to top';
 body[183]='03-031.htm';
dai[183]='PRINTING A MIRROR-IMAGE';
bun[183]='PRINTING A MIRROR-IMAGEPRINTING A MIRROR-IMAGEOverviewThe image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. This function is available only when the PS or PPD printer driver is used in the Windows environment. When the PPD printer driver is used, [Horizontal] cannot be selected. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabIf you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select [Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically, select [Vertical]Back to top';
 body[184]='03-032.htm';
dai[184]='FINE-ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY';
bun[184]='FINE-ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELYFINE-ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELYOverviewThis function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] buttonClick the [Print Position] buttonIndividually specify the positions where to displace odd and even pagesBack to top';
 body[185]='03-033.htm';
dai[185]='ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OR CONTRAST';
bun[185]='ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OR CONTRASTADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OR CONTRASTOverviewThis section explains how to adjust the brightness or contrast in the print settings when printing photos or other images. This function makes a simple adjustment in a case such as when image editing software is not installed on your computer.In a Macintosh environment, this function is only available when using Mac OS X 10.4.OperationWindowsClick the [Color] tab, and also click the [Color Adjustment] buttonDrag (slide bar), or click the buttons to make adjustmentMacintoshSelect [Color] and click the [Color Adjustment] buttonSet the [Color Adjustment] checkbox to , and drag (slide bar) to make adjustmentBack to top';
 body[186]='03-033_01.htm';
dai[186]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS';
bun[186]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESSADJUSTING THE SHARPNESSOverviewThe edges of the raster data in a document to be printed can be made sharper or softer.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab. Select [Sharpness]. One of 6 levels can be selected for the edge sharpness/softness (&quot;None&quot;, &quot;Very Soft&quot;, &quot;Soft&quot;, &quot;Center&quot;, &quot;Sharp&quot;, &quot;Very Sharp&quot;). Back to top';
 body[187]='03-033_02.htm';
dai[187]='ADJUSTING THE SCREENING';
bun[187]='ADJUSTING THE SCREENINGADJUSTING THE SCREENINGOverviewWhen printing a document that has gradations such as a photo or illustration, a filter called a screen can be used to convert the gradations to groupings of fine dots (screening).This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab. Selecting screening settings The screen used for conversion can be selected for the type of document to be printed (&quot;Default&quot;, &quot;Text/Photo&quot;, &quot;Text&quot;, &quot;Photo&quot;, &quot;Dot (High)&quot;*1, &quot;Dot (Low)&quot;*1). *1&nbsp; Can only be selected when the PS printer driver is used.Can only selected when the color mode is set to the black/white mode. Back to top';
 body[188]='03-034.htm';
dai[188]='PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK';
bun[188]='PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACKPRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACKOverviewWhen printing a colour image in greyscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colours are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out colour text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in greyscale.Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.This function is available in a Windows environment. Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Color] tabSet the [Text To Black] checkbox or the [Vector To Black] checkbox toWhen [Text To Black] is selected, all text other than white text is printed in black.When [Vector To Black] is selected, all vector graphics other than white lines and areas are printed in black.Back to top';
 body[189]='03-035.htm';
dai[189]='SELECTING COLOUR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE';
bun[189]='SELECTING COLOUR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPESELECTING COLOUR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPEOverviewPreset colour settings are available in the machine\'s printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most suitable colour settings for the colour image type. Advanced colour settings, such as the colour management settings are also available for more complex colour image printing.Types of colour management settingsWindows ICM*1:Colour management method in a Windows environmentColourSync:Colour management method in a Macintosh environmentSource Profile:Select a source colour profile of colour matching.Rendering Intent:The selections below provide the ability to modify colour image processing to suit specific preferences. (Colour matching method: Method of colour converting RGB colour on the display, etc. into CMYK colours in the printer)Output Profile:Selects a colour profile for the image to be printedCMYK Correction*2:Corrects the image to obtain the optimum printing result when printing a CMYK image.Neutral Grey:Select a creating method of neutral grey.Pure Black Print:Select whether you want to print black data area with only black toner.Trapping:Select to prevent void area which may be generated around edge of colours.Black Overprint*3:Prevents whitening of the outline of black text.Custom CMYK Simulation Profile*3:Adjusts the colours to simulate printing that would be obtained with the process colours used in printing presses.Simulation Profile*3:Select the process colours.*1&nbsp; Cannot be selected when using the PS printer driver in Windows Vista/Server 2008/7/8/Server 2012.*2&nbsp; Can only be used when using the PCL6 printer driver.*3&nbsp; Can only be used when using the PS printer driver (Windows/Macintosh).OperationWindowsClick the [Color Profile] tab and select [Image Type]Standard: Data that includes text, photos, graphs, etc.Graphics: Data with many drawings or illustrationsPhoto: Photo data or data that uses photosCAD: Engineering drawing dataScan: Data scanned by a scannerColourimetric: Data to be printed in colours as viewed on the screenCustom: Data to be printed with special settingsSpecify the settingsTo configure colour management using the Windows OS ICM, set &quot;Image Type&quot; to [Custom] in step 1. Then, set the [Windows ICM] checkbox to . To configure &quot;Source Profile&quot; and other detailed colour management tasks, select the desired setWindows ICM cannot be selected when the PS printer driver is used in Windows Vista/Server 2008/7/8/Server 2012.MacintoshSelect [Color]Select [Print Mode]In Mac OS 10.4, to use the Mac OS colour management function, set the [ColorSync] checkbox to . In this case, you cannot select &quot;Image Type&quot;. Specify &quot;Neutral Gray&quot;, &quot;Pure Black Print&quot; or &quot;Black Overprint&quot; settingSelect [Color Profile] Select [Color Profile] and specify the settings To configure colour management settings, select the desired settings from the menus. To specify &quot;CMYK Simulation&quot;, set the [CMYK Simulation] checkbox to and then select the desired setting.Back to top';
 body[190]='03-037.htm';
dai[190]='PRINTING DATA WITH WATERMARK TEXT';
bun[190]='PRINTING DATA WITH WATERMARK TEXTPRINTING DATA WITH WATERMARK TEXTOverviewThis function prints data with shadow-like thin text in the background. The size, colour, exposure, and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. For the watermark, you can select a previously registered text string from the list or enter text to creatOperationWindowsClick the [Watermarks] tabSelect [Watermark]Clicking the [Edit] button allows you to edit font or colour, or configure other detail settings.To create a new watermark, enter characters in &quot;Text&quot; and click the [Add] button.If necessary, change the printing position, angle, or size of a watermarkTo return the printing position to the centre, click the [Center] button.MacintoshSelect [Watermarks]Click the [Watermark] checkbox to configure the watermark settingsSelect a text string, edit font or colour, or configure other detailed watermark settings.Adjust the size and angle of text by dragging (slide bar).Back to top';
 body[191]='03-038.htm';
dai[191]='OVERLAPPING IMAGE WITH DATA';
bun[191]='OVERLAPPING IMAGE WITH DATAOVERLAPPING IMAGE WITH DATAOverviewThis function overlaps a bitmap or JPEG image on the foreground of print data, using an image stored in the computer. A frequently-used image or original icon is printed as a stamp-like image. You can adjust the size, position, and angle of the image stam This function is available in a Windows environment.This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.OperationWindowsClick the [Watermarks] tabSelect [Image Stamp]If any image stamp has already been registered, select it from the pull-down menu.To register an image stamp, click the [Image File] button, select a file you wish to turn into an image stamp, and click the [Open] button.If necessary, change the printing position, angle, or size of an image stampTo return the printing position to the centre, click the [Center] button.Back to top';
 body[192]='03-039.htm';
dai[192]='CREATING A PRE-SET FORMAT TO OVERLAP PRINT DATA';
bun[192]='CREATING A PRE-SET FORMAT TO OVERLAP PRINT DATACREATING A PRE-SET FORMAT TO OVERLAP PRINT DATAOverviewThis function overlaps print data with a previously arranged pre-set format data on the top of the format data. You can register non-text data such as frames and garnished frames created in another application as overlay files. Using them enables you to e This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsCreating an overlay fileFrom an application used to create overlay data, open the driver properties windowClick the [Advanced] tab, and click the [Edit] button in [Overlays]Click the [Create Overlay] button, and specify the name of the overlay file to be created and the destination where to save the fileWhen you have completed the settings and started printing, the overlay file is created.When you start printing, a confirmation message appears. The overlay file is not created unless you click the [Yes] button.Clicking the [Load Overlay] button registers the existing overlay file.Using an overlay file to printFrom an application used to print data using an overlay file, open the driver properties windowClick the [Advanced] tab and select an overlay fileFrom the pull-down menu, select an overlay file previously created or registered.Back to top';
 body[193]='03-040.htm';
dai[193]='PRINTING DATA WITH HIDDEN PATTERN';
bun[193]='PRINTING DATA WITH HIDDEN PATTERNPRINTING DATA WITH HIDDEN PATTERNOverviewThis function prints data with text (hidden pattern data) such as &quot;DO NOT COPY&quot; in the background. When a document with hidden pattern data is printed, the hidden pattern data in the background is highlighted. This helps deter information leakagThis function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 can use this function.&quot;Hidden Pattern Print&quot; is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorised printing, but not a function that prevents information from being leaked.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the [Hidden Pattern Print] checkbox to , and click the [Settings] button If [Print Mode] is set to [Fine], the hidden pattern print setting is not available.Configure the settings and click the [OK] buttonText may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a hidden pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such cases, select &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; and [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print] → [Contrast].The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print.When you select [Black and White] in colour mode, or when an original is determined to be in black and white even if you selected [Auto], a black hidden pattern is printed even if you set the pattern to cyan or magenta.Back to top';
 body[194]='03-041.htm';
dai[194]='SENDING DATA WHILE PRINTING';
bun[194]='SENDING DATA WHILE PRINTINGSENDING DATA WHILE PRINTINGOverviewThis function sends data created in another application to addresses registered in the machine at the same time the data is printed from the machine. This means you can complete two different processes - printing and transmission - with a single operationRegister addresses in an address book and prepare each transmission function in advance. For details on how to register addresses in an address book, see &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY&quot;, &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEThis function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 can use this function.When, in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Disabling sending while printing] is selected, data cannot be sent at the same time it is printed.OperationWindowsClick the [Job Handling] tab and click the [Print and Send] buttonSet the [Print and Send] checkbox toClick the [Get Address Book] buttonSelect a destination address from the &quot;Address Book&quot; list, and click the [Add] buttonTo send data to all addresses, click the [Add All] button.To delete an address added to the &quot;Destination&quot; list, select the address and click the [Delete] button. To delete all addresses, click the [Delete All] button.Up to 50 destinations can be specified.The printer driver settings are applied to transmission settings. For example, if [Greyscale] is selected as the colour mode of the printer driver, data is sent in black and white regardless of the settings of this machine.Back to top';
 body[195]='03-042.htm';
dai[195]='PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER';
bun[195]='PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPERPRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPEROverviewIn a Windows environmentThe front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from that used for other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert coloured paper or a different pIn a Macintosh environmentThe front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from that used for other pages. This function can be used, for example, when you want to print only the front and back covers on thick paper.OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Cover Page] or [Last Page] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect the paper insertion settingsSet the paper source, insert position, and the printing method.Click the [Add] button and your settings will appear in &quot;Information&quot;.When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in &quot;User Settings&quot; to save the settings.Click the [OK] buttonWhen [Bypass Tray] is selected in &quot;Paper Source&quot;, be sure to select the &quot;Paper Type&quot; and load that type of paper into the bypass tray.When [Other Page] is selected for &quot;Insert Position&quot;, specify the insert position by directly entering a page number. Inserts cannot be successively inserted at the same page.If inserts are successively inserted at the same page. &quot;Printing Method&quot; can only be set to [Blank]. When &quot;Printing Method&quot; is set to [2-Sided], the specified page and the next page after it will be printed on the front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an insert setting at a page printed on the reverse sid When the Windows PPD printer driver is used, only one-sided printing is performed. MacintoshSelect [Printer Features], then select [Different Paper]Select the cover insertion settingsSelect the print setting, paper tray, and paper type for the front and back covers.Back to top';
 body[196]='03-043.htm';
dai[196]='ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM';
bun[196]='ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILMADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILMOverviewWhen transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparenThe Windows PPD printer driver is not compatible with this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Transparency Inserts] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect the transparency insert settingsWhen the [Printed] checkbox is selected to set to , the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. If necessary, configure [Paper Source] or [Paper Type].Transparency film can be loaded into tray 4, the bypass tray and large capacity trays.In the machine side, also specify the paper type of the tray with transparency films to be loaded in [Transparency].MacintoshSelect [Printer Features]Select [Transparency Inserts] in [Feature Sets]Select the transparency insert settingsWhen [On(Printed)] is selected from &quot;Transparency Inserts&quot;, the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. If necessary, configure [Paper Source] or [Paper Type].Transparency film can be loaded into tray 4, the bypass tray and large capacity trays.In the machine side, also specify the paper type for the tray with transparency films to be loaded in [Transparency].Back to top';
 body[197]='03-043_01.htm';
dai[197]='INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIES';
bun[197]='INSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIESINSERTING SEPARATOR PAGES BETWEEN JOBS OR COPIESOverviewYou can insert separator pages between jobs or the specified number of copies. This function can be performed in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Main] tab and click the [Separator Page] buttonChange the settingsSelect the paper tray and paper type in &quot;Paper Selection&quot;, and set the positions to insert separator pages in &quot;Insert Position&quot;.If you select "Per Copies" in &quot;Insert Position&quot;, a separator page is inserted each time the specified number of copies is printed. For example, if you set &quot;5&quot; when printing 10 copies, separator pages will be inserted after the 5th andBack to top';
 body[198]='03-044.htm';
dai[198]='PRINTING A CARBON COPY';
bun[198]='PRINTING A CARBON COPYPRINTING A CARBON COPYOverviewThis function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and coloured paper is loaded into tray 2, a This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Carbon Copy] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect the tray for the first copy from &quot;Top Copy&quot;, then select the tray for the carbon copy from &quot;Carbon Copy&quot;Back to top';
 body[199]='03-045.htm';
dai[199]='TAB PAPER PRINT SETTINGS AND PRINTING';
bun[199]='TAB PAPER PRINT SETTINGS AND PRINTINGTAB PAPER PRINT SETTINGS AND PRINTINGOverviewThis function is used to print text on the tabs of tab paper. Two methods are available; &quot;Tab Paper Settings&quot; and &quot;Tab Paper Print&quot;.Tab Paper Settings (PCL6 and PS only)Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the text shifting distance in [Tab Paper Settings] on the [Advanced] tab of the printer driver property window. The text is printed on the tabs.Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only) Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages. In [Tab Paper Print] on the [Special Modes] tab of the printer driver properties window, enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Specify the detailed settings such as tThose functions are available in a Windows environment.OperationWindowsTab Paper Settings (PCL6 and PS only)Prepare the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, and take the following steps:Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Tab Paper Settings] buttonSpecify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the buttonSelect the paper source and typeClick the [Paper] tab, and select &quot;Paper Source&quot; and &quot;Paper Type&quot;.For &quot;Paper Source&quot;, select a paper tray you want to load tab paper into. For &quot;Paper Type&quot;, select [Tab Paper].Tab paper can be loaded into tray 4, the bypass tray and large capacity trays.In the machine side, also specify the paper type for the tray with tab paper to be loaded in [Tab Paper].Tab Paper Print (PCL6 only)Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings.Click the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Tab Paper Print] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect the tab position settingsFor commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [LT-5tab-A] in &quot;User Settings&quot;. For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab, the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tabSelect the page settingsSpecify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Also select the font and adjust the layout.Tab paper can be loaded into tray 4, the bypass tray, and large capacity trays.In the machine side, also specify the paper type for the tray with tab paper to be loaded in [Tab Paper].Back to top';
 body[200]='03-046.htm';
dai[200]='PRINTING A SPECIFIED PAGE ON THE FRONT SIDE IN 2-SIDED PRINTING';
bun[200]='PRINTING A SPECIFIED PAGE ON THE FRONT SIDE IN 2-SIDED PRINTINGPRINTING A SPECIFIED PAGE ON THE FRONT SIDE IN 2-SIDED PRINTINGOverviewThis function arranges a 2-sided printing so that a specified page may be set to the front side.If you specify a page (such as the chapter title page) to be printed on the front side, the page, which otherwise would be printed on the reverse side, is printed on the front side of the next page.If you specify &quot;page 4&quot; and &quot;page &quot;8&quot;:This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsOn the [Main] tab, set &quot;Document Style&quot; to [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)], and carry out the following procedure.2-SIDED PRINTINGClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Chapter Inserts] and click the [Settings] buttonEnter the page to be the top page of each chapter in &quot;Page Settings&quot;, and click the [Add] buttonYour settings will appear in &quot;Information&quot;.Click the [Save] buttonThe user setting screen appears. Enter &quot;Setting Name&quot;, and click the [OK] button to save settings. If user settings are not saved, the Chapter Inserts function is not available.Back to top';
 body[201]='03-047.htm';
dai[201]='USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB';
bun[201]='USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOBUSING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOBOverviewTo use this function, two machines are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a print job in parallel. This function splits a print job equally between two machines, enabling print time to be reduced when a large number of seTo use the Tandem Print function in Windows environment, you need to register the IP address of a slave machine in the printer driver.The Windows PPD printer driver is not compatible with this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the [Tandem Print] checkbox toThe tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using &quot;Custom Installation&quot; with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [Yes] checkbox selected for &quot;Do you want to use thMacintoshSelect [Tandem Print]Set the [Tandem Print] checkbox to The Tandem Print setting screen appears. Enter the IP address of a slave machine, and click the [Update] button. The Tandem Print settings are configured.To use the tandem print function, you must select the protocol to be used, in accordance with the message that appears on the screen when you add the printer driver in the printer setup utility.Back to top';
 body[202]='03-048.htm';
dai[202]='SAVING AND USING PRINT DATA';
bun[202]='SAVING AND USING PRINT DATASAVING AND USING PRINT DATAOverview This function stores print data on the hard disk included in the machine, and prints the data using the touch panel when required. The location for storing data can be selected to prevent the data from being mixed together with data of other usersHold OnlyData is not printed but only stored on the machine\'s hard disk.Hold after PrintData is printed, and then stored on the machine\'s hard disk.Sample printWhen you print multiple sets, you can only print one set first. After checking the contents of the first set of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of excessive misprints.For information on how to print data stored on the hard disk of this machine, see &quot;PRINTING A STORED FILE&quot; of &quot;DOCUMENT FILING&quot;.When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8 digits) can be specified to assure confidentiality of the stored data. When a password has been specified, the password must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine.The Windows PPD printer driver is not compatible with this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Job Handling] tabSet the [Retention] checkbox toSelect a method to use to store print data using &quot;Retention Settings&quot;Setting the [Password] checkbox to allows you to enter a password (5 to 8 digits). Note that you cannot set a password when specifying a storage destination in step 4. Setting the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox to creates a PDF file for PC browsing when saving data.Select a storage location using &quot;Document Filing Settings&quot;If you selected [Custom Folder], click the [Stored to] button to select the folder name.When [Quick File] is selected, &quot;Retention Settings&quot; will be set to [Hold After Print]. The password entered in the &quot;Retention Settings&quot; is cancelled and cannot be used.The data format used to store data to the machine can be selected from CMYK and RGB, if necessary. Click the [Compatibility] button on the [Advanced] tab and select the format from &quot;Rip Style&quot;.To store data in a custom folder, the custom folder must first be created by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Document Filing Control]. If a password was set for the folder, enter the &quot;Password of Folder&quot; in the windowIf you have configured &quot;Printing Policy&quot; on the [Configuration] tab so that retention is always used, the checkmark of the [Retention] box cannot be cleared.If your network is IPV6, the data is stored to the main folder.MacintoshSelect [Job Handling]Set the [Retention] checkbox to Select a method to store print data using &quot;Retention Settings&quot;. After entering a password (5 to 8 digits), you can click the button to lock the setting. This is convenient for specifying the same password the next time.Select a storage location using &quot;Document Filing Settings&quot;If you selected [Custom Folder], click the [Custom Folder] tab to select the folder name.When [Quick File] is selected, &quot;Retention Settings&quot; will be set to [Hold After Print]. The password entered in the &quot;Retention Settings&quot; is cancelled and cannot be used.The data format used to store data to the machine can be selected from CMYK and RGB, if necessary. Click the [Advanced] in [Printer Features] and select the format from &quot;Rip Format&quot;.To store data in a custom folder, the custom folder must first be created by selecting [System Settings] in the &quot;Settings&quot; → [Document Filing Control]. If a password was set for the folder, enter the &quot;Password of Folder&quot; in the windowIn Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8, if you wish to store document filing settings in a custom folder, click the [Store to] button.Back to top';
 body[203]='03-049.htm';
dai[203]='BATCH PRINTING STORED DATA AUTOMATICALLY';
bun[203]='BATCH PRINTING STORED DATA AUTOMATICALLYBATCH PRINTING STORED DATA AUTOMATICALLYOverview When user authentication is enabled in the machine settings, this function automatically batch prints the retention print data (stored data) of the login user. The stored data is deleted after the batch print.The following conditions are required for batch printing.In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Default Settings], and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].At the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine must be entered in &quot;User Name&quot; of the &quot;Default Job ID&quot; in the printer driver.In a Windows environment: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDIn a Macintosh environment: PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLEDData with a password or data protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Data stored in folders with a password (except My Folder) will also not be printed.OperationOn the user authentication screen of the machine, enter the user number or login name/passwordAt the time of retention print, in addition to user authentication information, the user name stored in the machine must be entered in &quot;User Name&quot; of the &quot;Default Job ID&quot; in the printer driver.When the confirmation message appears, tap the [OK] keyData stored in the temporary folder, main folder, and custom folder is automatically printed, and then the data is deleted.Back to top';
 body[204]='03-050.htm';
dai[204]='REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE';
bun[204]='REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGEREGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGEOverview This function registers an image to be used as a custom image from the printer driver to the machine.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 can use this function.To disable the registration of custom images:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (tab) → [Disabling Registration of Custom Image].OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Custom Image Registration] and click the [Settings] buttonSpecify the registration type and name of the custom imageIf [Custom stamp] is selected for the &quot;Registered Type&quot;, a non-transparent stamp image in full colour is registered. If [Custom watermark] is selected, a transparent watermark image in monochrome is registered.If data with multiple pages is selected, only the first page is registered.Back to top';
 body[205]='03-051.htm';
dai[205]='INSERTING THE SAME DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE';
bun[205]='INSERTING THE SAME DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGEINSERTING THE SAME DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGEOverviewThis function prints data while inserting specified data for each page. It allows you to easily configure desired facing pages, so that the document may be displayed on the left-hand page while the right-hand page is left blank for notes.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 can use this function.Operation WindowsFirst create the page data to be inserted, and then carry out the following procedure.CREATING A PRE-SET FORMAT TO OVERLAP PRINT DATAClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Page Interleave] and click the [Settings] buttonSpecify the overlay data to be inserted and the insert positionBack to top';
 body[206]='03-052.htm';
dai[206]='CHANGING THE METHOD TO RENDER JPEG IMAGES';
bun[206]='CHANGING THE METHOD TO RENDER JPEG IMAGESCHANGING THE METHOD TO RENDER JPEG IMAGESOverviewChange the method to render JPEG images. Changing the rendering method may solve the problem in which originals containing a JPEG image are not printed correctly.To change the JPEG image rendering method, specify whether the rendering is performed with the printer driver or on the machine. In normal circumstances, the rendering should be performed on the machine.This function is available in a Windows environment. Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.If you use the printer driver for rendering, it may take some time for printing to finish.OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] buttonSet the [Use driver to render JPEGs] checkbox toBack to top';
 body[207]='03-053.htm';
dai[207]='TILING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET';
bun[207]='TILING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEETTILING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEETOverview This function repeats and tiles the same image on one sheet. This is useful when creating business cards or seals.This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsClick the [Special Modes] tabSelect [Layout Print] and click the [Settings] buttonSelect [Repeat Print]In &quot;N-Up Printing&quot;, select the number of images per sheetBack to top';
 body[208]='03-054.htm';
dai[208]='ENHANCING RESOLUTION ARTIFICIALLY';
bun[208]='ENHANCING RESOLUTION ARTIFICIALLYENHANCING RESOLUTION ARTIFICIALLYOverviewThis function applies the Resolution Enhancement Techniques (RET) to smoothen image lines and reduce jaggies, so that the resolution may be artificially enhanced for printing. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility] buttonSet the [Smoothing] checkbox toBack to top';
 body[209]='03-054_02.htm';
dai[209]='PRINTING WITHOUT TOP AND BOTTOM MARGINS';
bun[209]='PRINTING WITHOUT TOP AND BOTTOM MARGINSPRINTING WITHOUT TOP AND BOTTOM MARGINSOverviewThis function enables printing without top and bottom margins. By combining this function with the saddle stitch printing and trimming functions, a booklet or pamphlet without margins can be created.This function can only be used for A3/11" x 17" and A4/8-1/2" x 11" sizes. To use this function effectively, create document data in the application that is 2 mm longer than the top and bottom of the paper, and 2 mm shorter in the direction of feeding. WhThis function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.OperationWindowsSaddle stitch printing and 2-position staplingClick the [Paper] tab and set the [Edge-to-Edge Printing] checkbox to set toClick the [Main] tab and select [Pamphlet Style]Select [2 Staples]Configure Trimming settings(1) Click the [Trimming...] button(2) Set the [Trimming Width] checkbox to set to (3) Specify "5.0 mm (0.200 inches)"Fold staplingClick the [Paper] tab and set the [Edge-to-Edge Printing] checkbox to set toClick the [Special Modes] tab, click the [Fold] button and then select [Mult-Sheet Fold - Staple]Click the [Main] tab and configure Trimming settings(1) Click the [Trimming...] button(2) Set the [Trimming Width] checkbox to set to (3) Specify "5.0 mm (0.200 inches)"Single SheetClick the [Paper] tab and set the [Edge-to-Edge Printing] checkbox to set toClick the [Main] tab and select [1-Sided], [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)]Check the actual print result. If margins appear, change the following settings."Trimming Width" in the Trimming Settings dialog"Zoom Settings" in the [Paper] tab"Print Position" in the Compatibility dialogBack to top';
 body[210]='03-054_03.htm';
dai[210]='COMPRESSING JOB DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINE';
bun[210]='COMPRESSING JOB DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINECOMPRESSING JOB DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINEOverviewThe entire print job is compressed using the FLATE format and sent to the machine. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the level of compression in [Job Compression] The compression level can be set to &quot;None&quot;, &quot;Fastest&quot;, &quot;Fast&quot;, &quot;Medium&quot;, or &quot;Best Compression&quot;.Back to top';
 body[211]='03-054_04.htm';
dai[211]='COMPRESSING BITMAP DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINE';
bun[211]='COMPRESSING BITMAP DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINECOMPRESSING BITMAP DATA BEFORE SENDING TO THE MACHINEOverviewBitmap image data included in the print job can be compressed using the Bitmap compression function supported at the language level by Postscript and PCL6. By compressing Bitmap image data in JPEG, RLE, or Delta Row format*1, print job data from the print *1&nbsp; When PostScript is used, only JPEG is supported. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the level of compression in [Bitmap Compression] Back to top';
 body[212]='03-054_05.htm';
dai[212]='PRINTING A POSTSCRIPT ERROR REPORT';
bun[212]='PRINTING A POSTSCRIPT ERROR REPORTPRINTING A POSTSCRIPT ERROR REPORTOverviewSelect whether a PostScript error report is printed if the machine detects an error while printing PostScript data. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PS or PPD can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the [PS Error Information] checkbox to Back to top';
 body[213]='03-054_06.htm';
dai[213]='PS PASS-THROUGH';
bun[213]='PS PASS-THROUGHPS PASS-THROUGHOverviewSelect whether PostScript commands are output directly from the application instead of from the printer driver.Normally, &quot;PS Pass-Through&quot; must be checked for normal use. Some applications output PostScript code that cannot be controlled by the printer driver and features such as N-up, Watermark are not set correctly by the driver. In this case, cancel tsettings of the driver might be available.When this item is unchecked, EPS illustrations in the document may be printed atlow-resolution image or may not be printed. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabSet the [PS Pass-Through] checkbox toBack to top';
 body[214]='03-054_07.htm';
dai[214]='SETTING THE PRINT AREA TO MAXIMUM';
bun[214]='SETTING THE PRINT AREA TO MAXIMUMSETTING THE PRINT AREA TO MAXIMUMOverviewA fixed margin around the edges of the paper is set in the printer driver.If part of the print image extends into this margin area, that part will not be printed.This function can be used to cancel the margin setting and maximize the print area. This prevents the image from being cut off.Depending on the machine&lsquo;s margin settings, margins may appear even if this function is used. This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function.The machine also has a margin setting, and if the image extends into this margin area, the image will be cut off regardless of the above setting. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabClick the [Compatibility] buttonSelect [Maximum] in [Printable Area] Back to top';
 body[215]='03-054_08.htm';
dai[215]='GIVING PRIORITY TO THE PRINT SETTINGS OF THE PRINTER DRIVER';
bun[215]='GIVING PRIORITY TO THE PRINT SETTINGS OF THE PRINTER DRIVERGIVING PRIORITY TO THE PRINT SETTINGS OF THE PRINTER DRIVEROverviewYou can have the print settings from the application be disregarded and give priority to the print settings of the printer driver. This function prevents the settings of the printer driver from being changed to the settings of the print dialog box of the This function is available in a Windows environment.Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabClick the [Compatibility] buttonIn [Driver Setting Priority], select the checkboxes of the print settings of the printer driver to be given priority. Back to top';
 body[216]='03-054_09.htm';
dai[216]='ABBREVIATING THE JOB NAME';
bun[216]='ABBREVIATING THE JOB NAMEABBREVIATING THE JOB NAMEOverviewThis function omits prefixes in job names, thereby preventing the displayed name of a file being printed from being cut off. This function is available in a Windows environment. Printer driver PCL6 or PS can use this function. OperationWindowsClick the [Advanced] tabClick the [Compatibility] buttonSet the [Job Name Shortening] checkbox to The following prefixes are omitted: Microsoft Word - Microsoft PowerPoint - Microsoft Outlook - Microsoft Office Outlook - Microsoft Office InfoPath - Back to top';
 body[217]='03-055.htm';
dai[217]='EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES';
bun[217]='EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES PDF/High Compression PDFEXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILESOverview When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly with the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.File TypeTIFFJPEGPCLPDF/EncryptedPSXPSExtensiontiff, tifjpeg, jpg, jpe, jfifpcl, prn, txtpdfps, prnxpsTo print XPS files, the XPS expansion kit is required.Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-colour (Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. When you want such jobs to be counted as black and white jobs, select the black andWhen the data is created as colour dataWhen the application treats the data as colour data even though the data is black and whiteWhen an image is hidden under a black and white imageDepending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.Back to top';
 body[218]='03-056.htm';
dai[218]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN AN FTP SERVER';
bun[218]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN AN FTP SERVERDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN AN FTP SERVEROverview If you register an FTP server, you can specify a file in the FTP server from the touch panel on the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from the computer.When you select a password-protected PDF file, you must enter the password in the job management screen.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILETo register an FTP Server:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [Setting for Print from the MFP(FTP)]. Up to 20 FTP servers can be registered.OperationTap the [HDD File retrieve] keyTap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panelTap the FTP server you wish to accessSome server may require you to enter the user name and password.Tap the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelWhen printing multiple files, tap all the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.The checkboxes of the selected files are selected.The icon appears to the left of the keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of the keys of folders in the FTP server. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level. When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen. Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.Select the print conditionsIf you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can only select the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 4, the settings will be applied.When the [Print Glossy] checkbox is selected, [Paper Area] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)].Tap the [Start] keyPrinting begins after the selected file is downloaded.Back to top';
 body[219]='03-057.htm';
dai[219]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A USB MEMORY';
bun[219]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A USB MEMORYDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A USB MEMORYOverview You can print a file on a USB memory connected to the machine directly without using the computer.When you select a password-protected PDF file, enter the password in the job management screen to begin printing.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEUse a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.Printing from a USB memory device is not possible when [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Printer Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print] is selected.OperationConnect the USB memory device to the machine and tap the [HDD File retrieve] keyTap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panelTap the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelWhen printing multiple files, tap all the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel. The checkboxes of the selected files are selected.The icon appears to the left of the keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the USB memory device. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level.When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.Select the print conditionsIf you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can only select the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 3, the settings will be applied.When the [Print Glossy] checkbox is selected, [Paper Area] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)].Tap the [Start] key Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.Remove the USB memory device from the machineBack to top';
 body[220]='03-058.htm';
dai[220]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER';
bun[220]='DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDERDIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDEROverview You can specify and print a file in a network folder from the touch panel of the machine. Even if the network folder is not registered, you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup.When you select a password-protected PDF file, you must enter the password in the job management screen.PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILETo register a network folder:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [Setting for Print from the MFP(SMB)]. Up to 20 network folders can be registered.OperationPrinting a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settingsTap the [HDD File retrieve] keyTap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panelTap the [Open Registered Network Folder] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to accessIf a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelWhen printing multiple files, tap all the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.The checkboxes of the selected files are selected.The icon appears to the left of the keys of files that can be printed.The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the network folder. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.Tap to move up one folder level.To return to the network folder selection screen, tap .Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.Select the print conditionsIf you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can only select the number of prints.If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 4, the settings will be applied.When the [Print Glossy] checkbox is selected, [Paper Area] is set to [Glossy Paper] (bypass tray) and [Resolution] is set to [600 dpi (High Quality)].Tap the [Start] key Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.Entering the network folder path directly to print a fileTake steps until step 2 of &quot;Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings&quot;Tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key on the action panelEnter the path to the folder, user name and password Access the network folder.For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of &quot;Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings&quot;.Specifying the network folder path for each level to print a fileTap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of &quot;Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings&quot;Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to accessAccess the network folder.For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of &quot;Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine\'s settings&quot;.Tap the icon and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder. For how to enter text, see &quot;NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS&quot;.Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.Tap to move up one folder level.To return to the workgroup selection screen, tap .Back to top';
 body[221]='03-059.htm';
dai[221]='SUBMIT PRINT JOB';
bun[221]='SUBMIT PRINT JOBSUBMIT PRINT JOBOverview You can specify a file in &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot; to print the data directly. In &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;, select [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] to specify a file. This procedure can be used to print any file thatFor the procedure for accessing the &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;, see &quot;SETTING MODE&quot;.If you print a file that includes print settings (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files), the settings will be applied.When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.Back to top';
 body[222]='03-060.htm';
dai[222]='FTP PRINT';
bun[222]='FTP PRINTFTP PRINTOverview You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine. To perform FTP print:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [Setting for Print from the PC], set [FTP Print] to [Valid], and then configure the port number.OperationType &quot;ftp://&quot; and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your PC\'s Web browserExample: ftp://192.168.1.28 Further, operations may be required depending on a Web browser.Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the &quot;Ip&quot; folder that appears in your Web browser Printing of the file automatically begins.If you print a file that includes print settings (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files), the settings will be applied.When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.Back to top';
 body[223]='03-061.htm';
dai[223]='E-MAIL PRINT';
bun[223]='E-MAIL PRINTE-MAIL PRINTOverviewIf you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.To perform e-mail print:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [E-mail Print Settings], and register your e-mail account.Using your PC\'s e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in &quot;Address&quot; and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed. Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print foControl command examplesFunctionCommand nameValuesCopiesCOPIES9999/1/1Staple *1STAPLEOPTIONNONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLEPunch *2PUNCHOFF, 2 Holes, 4 HolesOUTPUTCOLLATEOFF, ON2-sided PrintDUPLEXOFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHTAccount Number *3ACCOUNTNUMBERNumber (5 to 8 digits)File FormatLANGUAGEPCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF, JPG, XPSPaperPAPERPaper that can be used (A4, LETTER, or others)Document FilingFILEOFF, ONFOLDERNAMEUp to 28 charactersQUICK FILEQUICKFILEOFF, ONOutput trayOUTTRAYCENTRE, RIGHT, FINISHERBlack and White PrintingB/W PRINTOFF, ONFit To PageFITIMAGETOPAGEOFF, ON*1&nbsp; Enabled only when a finisher or a saddle finisher is installed.*2&nbsp; Enabled only when a punch module is attached to the finisher or saddle finisher.*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.The mail text must be in a text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.If you enter &quot;Config&quot; in the mail text, a list of control commands is returned.If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the settings configured in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [System Settings] → [Printer Condition Settings] → [Default Settings]. If you print a file that incEnter a file type only when you wish to specify the page-description language. In normal circumstances, this setting is not necessary.Back to top';
 body[224]='03-062.htm';
dai[224]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREEN';
bun[224]='JOB MANAGEMENT SCREENJOB MANAGEMENT SCREENOverviewWhen you tap the job management display, jobs are displayed in list form. To check the status of a image send job, select the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items:CHECKING RESERVED OR ACTIVE PRINT JOBSPRIORITY PROCESSING OF RESERVED PRINT JOBSCANCELLING PRINTINGCHECKING COMPLETED PRINT JOBSPRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILESWITCHING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE WHEN PAPER RUNS OUTBack to top';
 body[225]='03-063.htm';
dai[225]='CHECKING RESERVED OR ACTIVE PRINT JOBS';
bun[225]='CHECKING RESERVED OR ACTIVE PRINT JOBSCHECKING RESERVED OR ACTIVE PRINT JOBSYou can check the settings of reserved or active jobs.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Job Queue] keyTap the job whose contents you wish to check, and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panelFor information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;, see &quot;READING THE JOB LIST&quot;.Back to top';
 body[226]='03-064.htm';
dai[226]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF RESERVED PRINT JOBS';
bun[226]='PRIORITY PROCESSING OF RESERVED PRINT JOBSPRIORITY PROCESSING OF RESERVED PRINT JOBS When a print job is pending during a copy process or while received data is being printed, the pending print job can be printed preferentially.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Job Queue] keyTap the job for priority processing and then tap the key or the keyBack to top';
 body[227]='03-065.htm';
dai[227]='CANCELLING PRINTING';
bun[227]='CANCELLING PRINTINGCANCELLING PRINTINGYou can cancel a reserved, active, or spooled print job if you make a mistake in printing.OperationTap the Job Management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Spool] or [Job Queue] keyTap the job to be stoped, then tap the [Stop/Delete] key on the action panelTo delete more than one job, operate the checkbox for [Enter Multi Selection Mode] on the action panel so that it looks like .When a screen appears that allows you to confirm that you do want to stop the job, tap the [Yes] keyBack to top';
 body[228]='03-066.htm';
dai[228]='CHECKING COMPLETED PRINT JOBS';
bun[228]='CHECKING COMPLETED PRINT JOBSCHECKING COMPLETED PRINT JOBSOverviewYou can check the settings of completed print jobs. To check completed jobs, you need to be using document filing.INITIAL DOCUMENT FILING SCREENSAVING AND USING PRINT DATAOperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Complete] keyTap the job whose contents you wish to check, and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel Jobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them.For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in &quot;Status&quot;, see &quot;READING THE JOB LIST&quot;.Back to top';
 body[229]='03-067.htm';
dai[229]='PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE';
bun[229]='PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEPRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILEOverview PDF encryption is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or on a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, reset the password and begin pPrinting is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file.Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.7 (Adobe&reg; Acrobat&reg; 7.0) and earlier.OperationTap the Job management display and tap the [Print] tabTap the [Spool] key When the list contains an encrypted PDF file, a message is displayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists.Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF fileYou cannot select multiple encrypted PDF files.Tap the [Enter Password for Encrypt PDF] key on the action panelEnter the password (32 characters or less) and tap the [Yes] keyWhen both a master password and a user password (that is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master password.Back to top';
 body[230]='03-068.htm';
dai[230]='SWITCHING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT';
bun[230]='SWITCHING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE WHEN PAPER RUNS OUTSWITCHING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE WHEN PAPER RUNS OUTOverview If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear on the touch panel. When the paper is loaded in the machine, printing begins automaticallyIf you switched to a different paper size, resultant print results may not be as expected; for example part of the text or an image may run off the paper.OperationTap on the Job Management display panelTap the key of the job for which &quot;Paper Empty&quot; is displayedTap the [Reselect Paper] key on the action panelTap the key of the tray containing paper you want to use for printing, and tapBack to top';
 body[231]='03-069.htm';
dai[231]='PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST';
bun[231]='PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LISTPRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LISTOverviewFunctionPCL6PSWindows PPD*1Macintosh PPD*1Frequently used functionsCopies9999/1/19999/1/11-9991-999Image OrientationYesYesYesYesN-Up PrintingNumber of Pages2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 162, 4, 6, 8, 9, 162, 4, 6, 9, 162, 4, 6, 9, 16OrderSelectableSelectableNoSelectableBorderOn/OffOn/OffNoSelectable2-Sided PrintYesYesYesYesFit To Paper SizeYesYesNoYesBinding EdgeSelectableSelectableNoYesBlack and White PrintYesYesYesYesStaple*3YesYesYesYesPunch*3YesYesYesYes Collate Yes Yes Yes Yes Document Style Yes Yes Yes Yes Full Image Pamphlet Yes Yes No No Custom Paper Yes Yes No No No Offset Yes Yes Yes Yes Trimming Yes Yes No Yes Separator Page Yes Yes No No PaperPaper SizeYesYesYesYesCustom Paper7 size7 sizeYesYesPaper SelectionYesYesYesYesOutputYesYesYesYes A0 (Fit To Page) Yes Yes No No A1 (Fit To Page) Yes Yes No No User1-User11 Yes Yes No No Long Paper Yes Yes No No Scale to fit Paper Size No No No Yes Scale/Scaling No No Yes Yes Full Bleed Print Yes Yes No No Border Yes Yes No No Overlap Yes Yes No No Paper Source Yes Yes No Yes Paper Type Yes Yes No Yes Tray Status Yes Yes No No Convenient printer functionsPamphlet Style / Saddle Stitch*4YesYesYesYesMargin Shift0 mm to 30 mm0 mm to 30 mmYesYesPoster PrintingYesYesNoNoPrint PositionYesYesNoNoRotate 180 DegreesYesYesYesYes*12ZoomYes*5NoNoNoXY-Zoom No Yes*5 No No Line Width SettingsYesYesNoNoMirror ImageNoYesYes*13NoJob Compression No Yes No No Bitmap Compression Yes Yes No No Font Yes Yes Yes No PS Error Information No Yes Yes No PS Pass-Through No Yes No No Tab Paper Settings Yes Yes No No Document Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Sharpness Yes Yes Yes Yes Screening Yes Yes Yes Yes Dot (High) No Yes Yes Yes Dot (Low) No Yes Yes Yes Input Resolution Yes Yes No No Shade Pattern Yes No No No Spool Data Format Yes No No No Printable Area Yes Yes No No Duplex Style Yes Yes No No Line Width Unit Yes No No No Minimum Line Width Yes No No No Driver Setting Priority Yes Yes No No Job Name Shortening Yes Yes No No 100% N-Up Yes Yes No No Retention Settings Yes Yes No Yes Create PDF for PC Browsing Yes No No No Stored to Yes Yes No Yes User Name Yes Yes No Yes Job Name Yes Yes No Yes Login Name Yes Yes No Yes Password Yes Yes No Yes User Number Yes Yes No Yes Notify Job End Yes Yes No No Auto Job Control Review Yes Yes No No Special functionsDifferent PaperYesYes*14Yes*6Yes*6Transparency InsertsYesYesNoYesCarbon CopyYesYesNoNoTab PrintingYesYes*7NoNoChapter InsertsYesYesNoNoPage InterleaveYesNoNoNoFold*8Half Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, Z-Fold, Saddle Fold*4, Multiple Fold (Staple)*4Half Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, Z-Fold, Saddle Fold*4, Multiple Fold (Staple)*4Half Fold, Multiple Fold (Staple)*4Half FoldLayout PrintYesYesNoNoHidden Pattern PrintYesNoNoNoUse driver to render JPEGsYesYesNoNoSmoothingYesYesNoNoTandem PrintYesYesNoYesRetentionYesYesNoYesDocument Filing SettingsYesYesNoYesPrint and sendYesNoNoNo Reverse 2nd Page Yes Yes No No Custom Image Registration Yes No No No Colour mode adjusting functionColour AdjustmentYesYesNoYes*9Text To Black/Vector To BlackYesYesNoNoAdvanced ColourYesYesYesYes Color Mode Yes Yes Yes Yes Image Type Yes Yes Yes Yes CMYK Simulation No Yes Yes Yes Simulation Profile No Yes Yes Yes Window ICM Yes Yes No No ICM Method No No Yes No ColorSync No No No Yes Source Profile Yes Yes Yes Yes Rendering Intent Yes Yes Yes Yes Output Profile Yes Yes Yes Yes CMYK Correction Yes No No No Neutral Gray Yes Yes Yes Yes Pure Black Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Black Overprint No Yes Yes Yes Trapping Yes Yes Yes Yes Functions to combine text and imagesWatermarkYesYesYesYesImage StampYesYesNoNoOverlaysYesYesNoNoResolutionPrint ModeNormal / High quality / FineNormal / High quality / FineNormal / High quality / FineNormal / High quality / FineGraphics ModeYesNoNoNoToner Save*10YesYesYesYesFontSelectable Downloadable Fontbitmap, True Type, Graphicsbitmap, True Type, Type1bitmap, True Type, Type1No*11Other functionsAuto ConfigurationYesYesNoNoUser AuthenticationYesYesNoYes Set Tandem Print Yes Yes No Yes Printing Policy Yes Yes No No Font No Yes No No About Yes Yes No No *1&nbsp; The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system version and the application.*2&nbsp; Only Mac OS X v10.4, v10.5, v10.6, v10.7, and v10.8 can be used.*3&nbsp; If a finisher or a saddle finisher is installed (The punch module is also required in order to use the punch function.)*4&nbsp; Saddle finisher installed*5&nbsp; The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.*6&nbsp; Only covers can be inserted.*7&nbsp; Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the application is set.*8&nbsp; When a folding unit is installed*9&nbsp; Mac OS X v10.5, v10.6, v10.7, and v10.8 cannot be used.*10&nbsp; This setting may not operate in some applications and operating systems.*11&nbsp; TrueType and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.*12&nbsp; In Mac OSX, only landscape documents are supported. Portrait data is not rotated.*13&nbsp; Only landscape is supported.*14&nbsp; Only one-sided printing is supported.Back to top';
 body[232]='05-001.htm';
dai[232]='NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION';
bun[232]='NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTIONNETWORK SCANNER FUNCTIONOverviewThe network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on yThe network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.Scanner modeThe scanner function of the machine sends a scanned original as described below based on the specification of the destination.Scan to E-mailA scanned file is attached to e-mail and sent.Scan to FTPThe scanned file is sent to a specified folder of an FTP server. When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file.Scan to Network FolderThe scanned file is sent to a network folder on a Windows PC on the same network as the machine. It is possible to send an e-mail to inform the location where the scanned file is stored.For the operating procedure, see &quot;SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE&quot;.Data entry modeIn data entry mode, information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine is sent to a directory on an FTP server or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format.Metadata is data which indicates information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects. Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function.The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned image file.For the operating procedure, see &quot;TRANSMITTING METADATA&quot;.Back to top';
 body[233]='05-002.htm';
dai[233]='BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER';
bun[233]='BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNERBEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNEROverviewTo use the machine as a network scanner, you must store sender information, configure server settings, store destinations in the address book, and perform other required operations.Making sure the main power switch is in the &quot;&quot; positionWhen the main power indicator is lit up, the main power switch is in the &quot;&quot; position. If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot; position and press the [POWER] button on the operation panel.Checking the date and timeVerify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.To set the date and time of the machine:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Clock Adjust].If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. In this case, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; and select [Operation Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] seBefore using Scan to E-mailStore a default sender name in &quot;Sender Name&quot; and a reply e-mail address in &quot;Reply E-mail Address&quot;. These will be used in the case when a sender is not selected.To store the sender\'s name and source address:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Sender Set].Configuring settings required in the setting modeConfigure server settings and default settings for the network scanner.To configure server settings:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Network Settings] → [Services Settings].To configure basic settings for the network scanner:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Application Settings] → [Network Scanner Settings].Storing destination addresses for each scan mode in the address bookIt is convenient to store addresses in the address book before using Image Send mode.For how to use the address books and how to store addresses, see the following item.ADDRESS BOOKSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING GROUPSWith Scan to E-mail and Scan to Network Folder, you can also directly enter your desired address.Back to top';
 body[234]='05-005.htm';
dai[234]='SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE';
bun[234]='SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODESELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODEYou can select the network scanner mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows:OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the icon indicating the network scanner modeTap one of [E-mail], [FTP] and [Network Folder]. The initial screen of the selected mode is displayed.Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode displayTap one of [E-mail], [FTP] and [Network Folder]To change the screen that is initially displayed when the [Image Send] in the mode display is tapped:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Default Display Setting].Back to top';
 body[235]='05-006.htm';
dai[235]='BASIC SCREEN FOR IMAGE SEND';
bun[235]='BASIC SCREEN FOR IMAGE SENDBASIC SCREEN FOR IMAGE SENDOverviewThis section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the Scan to E-mail initial screen. Several methods are available in the Image Send mode, including Scan to E-mail and Scan to FTP. The initial screen layout slightly differs depending oBack to top';
 body[236]='05-007.htm';
dai[236]='IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE';
bun[236]='IMAGE SEND SEQUENCEIMAGE SEND SEQUENCEChange from the Home Screen or each mode to image send mode, and carry out the following procedure.SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODEOperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationTap the appropriate text box to enter the destination directly, or search and retrieve the address book or number.SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGConfigure the scan settingsSpecify the original scan size, exposure, file format, and other items.SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL AUTOMATICALLYSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGESPECIFYING SCAN EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPESPECIFYING SCAN RESOLUTIONIn Scan and Data Entry ModesCHANGING COLOUR MODE SETTINGSENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGESSet OthersConfigure functions other than scan settings, such as sending two pages as a single page.OTHERS SCREENSend the originalTap the [Start] key.You can check the preview image by tapping the [Preview] key before tapping the [Start] key. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original.If you placed the original on the document glass, repeat the step the same number of times as there are originals to be scanned. After scanning all originals, tap the [Read-End] key. (After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap thIf you tap the [File] key or [Quick File] key on the action panel before sending an image, you can save the scanned original as data.SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATASAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATABack to top';
 body[237]='05-008.htm';
dai[237]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES';
bun[237]='TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESTRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESOverviewThe following original sizes can be transmitted.&nbsp;Minimum original sizeMaximum original sizeUsing the automatic document feeder131 mm (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;140 mm (width) (5-1/8&quot; (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;5-1/2&quot; (width))297 mm (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;1000 mm (width)* (11-5/8&quot; (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;39-3/8&quot; (width))Using the document glass-297 mm (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;432 mm (width) (11-5/8&quot; (height)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; (width))* A long original can be transmitted.Back to top';
 body[238]='05-009.htm';
dai[238]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL';
bun[238]='THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALTHE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALOverviewWhen a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in &quot;Scan Size&quot; on the initial screen.AUTO DETECTIONStandard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in [Original Size Detector Setting] in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.If an original of a size that cannot be detected automatically by the machine is placed, the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESTo specify the original sizes that can be automatically detected by the machine.In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting] to select a group of standard sizes.Group of detectable original sizes that can be selected in &quot;Original Size Detector Setting&quot;ItemDetectable original sizes: Document glassDetectable original sizes: Automatic document feederAB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot; x13&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm)AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-5A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RInch-111&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;,8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A4, A3Inch-211&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A4, A3Inch-311&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A4, A3Back to top';
 body[239]='05-010.htm';
dai[239]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[239]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKOverviewA destination is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. It is also possible to store multiple destinations in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by simply tapping the key. ThisScan to E-mailScan to FTPScan to Network FolderGroup key with multiple destinationsFor information on the address book, see &quot;ADDRESS BOOK&quot;.For the procedure for storing an address in the address book, see &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY&quot;, &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH&quot;, &quot;STORING ADDRESSES FROM DAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS&quot; or &quot;STORING GOperationTap the [Address Book] keyTap the one-touch key of the destinationThe destinations displayed in the list can be narrowed down by category, job type, index, and keyword.By default, data is sent to the destination of the current mode only. For example, if a destination is set in the Scan to E-mail mode, the data is not sent to any other destination except for the destination selected in the Scan to E-mail mode.Tapping [Switch Display] allows you to change the order of destinations displayed in the list.When adding a destination, tap another one-touch key.When data is sent to multiple destinations, the number of destinations is displayed next to . It is also displayed if data is sent to multiple destinations when you select a single one-touch key.By default, the destination list which is narrowed by the current job is displayed.When the one-touch key is tapped and the [Display Details] key is tapped on the action panel, the detailed information is displayed. This procedure can be also used to change or add a destination for transmission.If you select an incorrect destination:Tap the one-touch key again to release the selection.To allow sending data to any destination other than the one selected in the current mode, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Image Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection], and uncheck the [Apply Addresses of Sending Modes Only] box.Back to top';
 body[240]='05-011.htm';
dai[240]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBER';
bun[240]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERThe search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book.OperationTap the [Call Search Number] key on the action panelEnter a search number (4 digits) using the numeric keysAfter input, tap . This specifies the destination corresponding to the entered search number.The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.If you do not know the search number, print and check the address list. The address list can be printed by tapping [Print Individual List] on the action panel in the address book screen.When entering search numbers such as &quot;0001&quot; and &quot;0011&quot;, &quot;0&quot; can be omitted. For example to enter &quot;0001&quot;, enter &quot;1&quot; and tap .If an incorrect search number is entered:Tap the [C] key to clear the number and enter the correct number.Back to top';
 body[241]='05-012.htm';
dai[241]='ENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLY';
bun[241]='ENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYOverviewIn Scan to E-mail mode, you can directly enter a destination to specify it. In Scan to Network Folder mode, you can directly specify a reference.For Scan to FTP, you cannot manually enter a destination.OperationTap Address text boxIn data entry mode, select the mode of the destination, and enter the destination address.If you tap Address text box in Scan to FTP, the address book screen appears.Use the soft keyboard to enter a destination addressFor Scan to Network Folder mode, the network folder entry screen appears. See &quot;Specifying a network folder as an address&quot;.After entering the destination address, tap the [OK] key.To switch among [To], [Cc] and [Bcc], tap . You can select [Bcc] if [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Bcc Setting] are selected and if [Enable Bcc] is enabled.Specifying a network folder as an addressTap the [Browse] keyTo directly enter a destination, tap the [Path Input to Folder] key. The soft keyboard is displayed.If a user name and password are required, check with your server administrator and enter them.Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to accessTap and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder.Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.Tap to return to the screen of step 1.Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to accessIf a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.Tap the key of the network folderAfter the settings are completed, tap the [Enter] key. You will return to the screen of step 1. Tap the [Enter] key again to accept the destination.Back to top';
 body[242]='05-013.htm';
dai[242]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[242]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKOverviewWhen an LDAP server is configured in the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, you can look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail.OperationTap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panelTap the LDAP server you wish to useIf only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take this step. If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password. After the settings are completed, tap .Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address/Number]Enter a keyword and tap the [Search] keyWhen you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard appears. The search results will appear after a brief interval. Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered letters.An asterisk * can be used as follows:XXX *: Names beginning with &quot;XXX&quot;* XXX: Names that end with &quot;XXX&quot;* XXX * : Names containing &quot;XXX&quot;AA * XX: Names that start with &quot;AA&quot; and end with &quot;XX&quot;.Tap the one-touch key of the destinationTo keep adding other destinations, tap the address and tap .Tap the one-touch key, and then tap the [Confirm Address Information] key to display the stored information.If no destination is found:Change search conditions and tap the [Search Again] key.Back to top';
 body[243]='05-014.htm';
dai[243]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOG';
bun[243]='SPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGOverviewSelect a destination from the transmission log.The most recent 50 addresses are displayed for destinations of Image Send.When a destination for retransmission is selected in the transmission log screen, the mode of the selected destination is automatically selected.The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.One-touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are storedBroadcasted addressesDestinations transmitted to using a programThe user names and passwords for destinations other than those stored in the network folder are not stored for security reasons. If a screen requiring you to enter such information appears, enter the information again.The addresses shown in the transmission log can be stored in an address book. However, addresses of the FTP transmission cannot be stored from the machine.OperationTap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panelTap the destination keyIf a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information.When you select the destination and tap the [New Registration with Address Book] or [Additional Registration with Address Book] key, the destination can be stored in the address book.To cancel the resend setting:Tap the [Clear] key to release the selection.Back to top';
 body[244]='05-015.htm';
dai[244]='CONFIRMING / DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONS';
bun[244]='CONFIRMING / DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONSCONFIRMING / DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONSYou can display a list of specified destinations and check them. You can also delete a destination if necessary.OperationConfirming/deleting specified destinationsTap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panelConfirm the destinationAfter the confirmation is completed, tap .To confirm detailed information such as the type or name of the specified destination, tap the one-touch key of the target destination, and then tap the [Confirm Address Information] key.Deleting specified destinationsIn Step 2 of &quot;CONFIRMING/DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONS&quot; section, tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.Back to top';
 body[245]='05-016.htm';
dai[245]='SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE';
bun[245]='SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODEThe icon on the key indicates the type of destination stored in the key.SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODEOverviewSend an image in Scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Send to FTP, Scan to Network Folder).If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. If the file size tends to be large when, for example, sending a large number of originals, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce the send size. IOperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSWhen placing the originals, orient them as shown below.OriginalsDocument feeder tray Place an original with its print side facing up.Document glass Place an original with its print side facing down, and align the corner of the original with the mark at the top left corner of the document glass scale.* In portrait layout* In landscape layout*To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown in the figure titled &quot;In landscape layout&quot; and specify the placement orientation in step 3.Place A5 (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation. If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation, an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;R) size origiSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZEDo not place any objects under the original size detector located at the back of document glass. Closing the automatic document feeder while an object is underneath it may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the documeSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGScan to E-mailScan to FTPScan to Network FolderAfter a one-touch key is tapped, if the screen is changed without tapping , the destination of the tapped key is automatically specified as the destination.When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Tap to select destinations.Multiple destinations can be specified.To change [Subject], [File Name], [Reply Name], or [Body Text], tap a target entry box, or tap [Options].CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXTTap the [Original] key and tap the &quot;Image Orientation&quot; key with the same orientation as the original imageTo scan the original in the correct orientation (with the top edge of the original shown at the top of the display), specify the orientation of the original correctly. After the settings are completed, tap .You can change exposure, resolution, file format, colour mode, and other settings. See the following.SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL AUTOMATICALLYSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGESPECIFYING SCAN EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPESPECIFYING SCAN RESOLUTIONIn Scan and Data Entry ModesCHANGING COLOUR MODE SETTINGTapping the [Others] key allows you to configure various functions, for example, specifying the sending time or collectively sending original pages of different sizes.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound toTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending an image. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.Tap the [Function Rev.] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when &quot;Card Shot&quot; is selected in Others, only the exposure can be changed when scanning an even-numbered original paBack to top';
 body[246]='05-017.htm';
dai[246]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT';
bun[246]='CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXTCHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXTOverviewYou can change the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text.When performing Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name can be changed.If the subject or file name is not changed, the settings in [Application Settings] → [Network Scanner Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; are used.If the reply-to address is not changed, the settings in [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Sender Set] in &quot;Setting mode(administrator)&quot; are used.If this is not configured, the reply address configured in [Network Settings] → [Services Settings] → [SMTP] → [SMTP Settings] → [Reply E-mail Address] in the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; is used.To configure the candidates for the subject, file name, and body text, select [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.OperationTo rename a subject, tap the [Subject] entry boxTap a pre-set text keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .A pre-set subject can be registered by selecting [Application Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Network Scanner Settings] → [Subject Name Settings].To directly enter text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to display the soft keyboard.Enter the file name and tap the [OK] key.To cancel the selected subject:Tap the [Clear] key.To rename a file, tap the [File Name] entry boxTap a pre-set text keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .A pre-set file name can be registered by selecting [Application Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Network Scanner Settings] → [File Name Settings].To directly enter text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to display the soft keyboard.Enter the subject and tap the [OK] key.To cancel the selected file name:Tap the [Clear] key.Tap [Options]To change the reply address, tap the [Reply-To] entry boxTap the key of the destination you want to specify as the return addressAfter the settings are completed, tap .If you tap the [Global Address Search] key on the action panel, you can specify a user stored in the global address book as the replay address.If you tap the [Call by User Number] key, you can retrieve an e-mail address by an appropriate number stored in the address book.If you tap the [Direct Entry] key on the action panel, you can directly enter an e-mail address.If you set the [Add \'Reply to\' to Cc] checkbox to , the reply address is added to the Cc address.If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus the reply address cannot be changed.To change the body text, tap the [Body Text] entry boxEnter the body textTo select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode, tap the [Pre-set Message] key.To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. When the soft keyboard is displayed, directly enter the body text. After you have entered the body text, tap the [OK] key.After the settings are completed, tap .A pre-set mail text can be registered by selecting [Application Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Network Scanner Settings] → [Message Body Settings].Enter up to 1800 characters. (A line break counts as one character.)To change the body text, tap the [Edit] key. The soft keyboard will appear with the text entered.To clear all entered text:Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately; not just the selected line.Back to top';
 body[247]='05-020.htm';
dai[247]='CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[247]='CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSIONCHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSIONOverviewCheck the output image on the touch panel before sending data.If you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image on the preview screen. Since you can adjust the image send size and resolution while checking it on the preview screen, you can send a better qualityDepending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen on the touch panel.The preview function is not available when the original size is set to Long Size.Back to top';
 body[248]='05-021.htm';
dai[248]='SENDING THE SAME SCANNED IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS ';
bun[248]='SENDING THE SAME SCANNED IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONSSENDING THE SAME SCANNED IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCASTING)OverviewYou can send the same scanned image to E-mail, FTP, and Network Folder destinations in a single operation. This is called the &quot;broadcasting&quot;. You can transmit to as many as 500 destinations in one broadcast operation. A long original is sent in black and white.If a Scan to FTP or Network Folder address is specified, you cannot use the hyperlink e-mail transmission.To register destinations in a contact or group:In the base screen or address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon on the home screen. For details, see &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY&quot;, &quot;STORING ADDRESSES THROUGHTips on using the broadcasting It is convenient to store destinations you frequently use for broadcast transmission as contacts or groups. Maximum of 500 destinations can be stored in a contact or group. Tapping the one-touch key for a registered group allows you to retrieve multiple For contacts, set the [Set as Default used] checkbox to for multiple destinations, and you can retrieve them by simply touching the key.STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRYSTORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCHSTORING ADDRESSES FROM IMAGE SEND LOGSSTORING GROUPS If you select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Image Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection] and if you set the [Apply Addresses of Sending Modes Only] checkbox is setOperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify all destinationsSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTo switch delivery types (To/Cc/Bcc), tap . can be omitted before or after a destination entered using a one-touch key. If &quot;Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting&quot; is enabled in &quot;Setting mode&quot;, tap before specifying the next destination.One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection.If a Scan to FTP or Network Folder address is specified, you cannot use the hyperlink e-mail transmission.Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panelConfirm the destinationTo cancel the specified destination Tap the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel, and tap the [Delete] key on the action panel.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending data. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more inforBack to top';
 body[249]='05-023.htm';
dai[249]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS';
bun[249]='RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSRESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONSThe results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job management screen. If transmission to any destination has failed, you can send to the same destination again.OperationTap the Job Management display, and tap the [Scan] tabTap the [Complete] keyAfter tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission, tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panelThe details of the job appear.&quot;Broadcast xxxx&quot; will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning ended appears in &quot;xxxx&quot;.If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes.After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap the [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] key on the action panelThe machine starts resending the image to the unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations.The steps to follow after the [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] key is tapped differ depending on whether or not the Document Filing function is used.Using document filing:When you enter the unsuccessful destination, you will return to the document filing resend screen. Perform the document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to re-scan the original.)When document filing is not used:When you enter the unsuccessful destination, you will return to the initial screen. Place the original and perform the steps of the broadcast transmission.Back to top';
 body[250]='05-025.htm';
dai[250]='SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL AUTOMATICALLY';
bun[250]='SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL AUTOMATICALLYSCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL AUTOMATICALLY (2-SIDED ORIGINAL)OverviewThe automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original.The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed.2-sided scanning is not possible when a mixed-size original is scanned.You cannot use 2-sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.OperationTap the [Original] keyTap the [2-Sided Booklet] or [2-Sided Tablet] keySee the figure below to check the binding edge of the original and tap the appropriate key.Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed originalIf this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel 2-sided scanning:Tap the [2-Sided Tablet] or [2-Sided Booklet] key again to release the selection.Back to top';
 body[251]='05-026.htm';
dai[251]='AUTO DETECTION';
bun[251]='AUTO DETECTIONAUTO DETECTIONOverviewWhen the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. The size of the placed original appears as the &quot;Scan Size&quot;, and the size to be transmitted appears as the &quot;Scan Size&quot; in the base screen.Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINALWhen the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size.SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESTo send an enlarged or reduced original, specify the send size manually.SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGEBack to top';
 body[252]='05-027.htm';
dai[252]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE';
bun[252]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZESPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZEOverviewWhen the original size is a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size.When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed.The image is sent in Mono2 only.OperationTap the [Original] keyTap the &quot;Scan Size&quot; keyTap the appropriate paper size keyTo specify an AB paper size, tap the [AB] tab, and then tap the appropriate paper size key.After the settings are completed, tap .If you are sending a long original, tap the [Long Size] key.Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1,000 mm (39-3/8&quot;) (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8&quot;)).TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZESBack to top';
 body[253]='05-028.htm';
dai[253]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES';
bun[253]='SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESSPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUESOverviewWhen scanning a non-standard size original such as a card, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1&quot; to 17&quot;), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1&quot; to 11-5/8&qWhen the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified.OperationTap the [Original] keyTap the "Scan Size" keyTap the [Direct Entry] tab, and enter the scan sizeTap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.This will be convenient for finely adjusting the entered size.Tap the [Execute] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap twice.Check that the size specified in &quot;Scan Size&quot; on the initial screen is displayed.To cancel the specified size: Tap the [Auto] key.Back to top';
 body[254]='05-029.htm';
dai[254]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE';
bun[254]='SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGESPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGEOverviewTap this key to specify the send size as a paper size.For example, if the scan size is A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) and the send size is B5 (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;), the image will be reduced before transmission.The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.OperationTap the [Original] keyTap the &quot;Send Size&quot; keyTap the appropriate paper size keyAfter the settings are completed, tap .Depending on the paper size specified for the &quot;Scan Size&quot;, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the &quot;Send Size&quot;.Tap the &quot;Image Orientation&quot; key with the same orientation as the original imageIf this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap .The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the &quot;Scan Size&quot; and the &quot;Send Size&quot;.To configure the default setting of image orientation, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administretor)&quot; → [Image Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Image Orientation].Back to top';
 body[255]='05-030.htm';
dai[255]='SPECIFYING SCAN EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE';
bun[255]='SPECIFYING SCAN EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPESPECIFYING SCAN EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPEOverviewOptimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original.Exposure settingAutoThis setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark areas of the original.Manual2013/1/2Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.3Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).2013/4/5Select this setting when the original consists of light text.Selecting an original type (in Scan mode or Data Entry mode):AutoThe original image type is automatically selected to match the original.ManualTextUse this mode for regular text documents.Text/Printed PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for scanning an original that contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.Text/PhotoThis mode provides the best balance for scanning an original that contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.Printed PhotoThis mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.PhotoUse this mode to scan photos.MapThis mode is best for copying maps with light colour shading and fine text. When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, you can change the resolution setting each time you change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when &quot;Job Build&quot; is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)OperationIn Scan and Data Entry ModesTap the [Exposure] keyTap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original typeTap the slider or to adjust the exposureIf you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to [Auto], the original image type is automatically selected to [Text].After the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[256]='05-031.htm';
dai[256]='SPECIFYING SCAN RESOLUTION';
bun[256]='SPECIFYING SCAN RESOLUTIONSPECIFYING SCAN RESOLUTIONOverviewSpecify the resolution setting.For normal text originals, 200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution sWhen using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, you can change the resolution setting each time you change pages.When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (However, when &quot;Job Build&quot; is used, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted.)OperationTap the [Resolution] keyTap the key of the desired resolutionAfter the settings are completed, tap .When E-mail, FTP, or Network Folder is selected:If there is a mix of destinations in different modes, tap to switch modes to set the resolution in each mode. However, FTP and Network Folder are set to the same mode.If the [Format] of file is set to [Compact PDF] or if the Compression Ratio is set to [Bk Letter Emphasis], the resolution is set to [300x300dpi].Back to top';
 body[257]='05-032.htm';
dai[257]='IN SCAN AND DATA ENTRY MODES';
bun[257]='IN SCAN AND DATA ENTRY MODESIN SCAN AND DATA ENTRY MODESOverviewChange the file format (file type, compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed. The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Colour/Greyscale] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)File format combinations[Colour/Greyscale] tab[B/W] tabPDFPDFHigh Compression PDFPDFHigh Compression PDF (Ultra Fine)PDFPDF/APDF/AHigh Compression PDF/APDF/AHigh Compression PDF/A (Ultra Fine)PDF/AEncrypted PDFEncrypted PDFEncrypt/High Compression PDFEncrypted PDFEncrypt/High Compression (Ultra Fine) PDFEncrypted PDFTIFFTIFFJPEGTIFFXPSXPSThe file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can change the format at the time of transmission.If [PDF/Encrypt] is specified for the file format, the password entry screen appears when scanning. Enter a password with up to 32 characters. Note the following when &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format.When broadcasting to an address with &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as High Compression PDF files.When broadcasting to an address with &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; or &quot;PDF/High Compression/Ultra Fine&quot; is specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as High Compression PDF (Ultra Fine) files.If &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; is specified, the resolution cannot be changed in the scanner mode. The resolution is set to 300&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;300 dpi.If &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, the resolution setting will be cancelled and the High Compression PDF resolution will be used for transmission.When &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; is selected, [Resolution] cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in [Function Rev.] in the job build settings.If &quot;PDF/High Compression&quot; is set when an original type setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, [Photo] will change to [Text/Photo] and [Map] will change to [Text/Printed Photo].OperationTap the [File Format] keyTap the [Colour/Greyscale] tab or [B/W] tabThe format setting for [Colour/Greyscale] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to Full Colour or Greyscale.The format setting with the [B/W] tab applies to the transmission in Mono2.Tap the key of the desired file typeWhen [Colour/Greyscale] tab is selected:When [B/W] tab is selected: The [Colour/Greyscale] tab displays the [Compact] and [Ultra Fine] checkboxes. If you check the [Ultra Fine] box to , you can send a file by reducing its size but without reducing the image quality. You can select the [Ultra Fine] for high-compression PDTap the desired compression mode key or tap the desired compression ratio key [Bk Letter Emphasis] in the [Colour/Greyscale] tab is a file format that reduces the data size while suppressing deterioration of black text.Check the [Specified Pages per File] box to , and specify a number of pages per fileTap the numeric display field, and change the current setting using numeric keys. This will be convenient for finely adjusting the entered size. After the settings are completed, tap .If the [Specified Pages per File] box is checked to , one file is created for all scanned pages.When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page. Therefore, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is not displayed.Back to top';
 body[258]='05-034.htm';
dai[258]='CHANGING COLOUR MODE SETTING';
bun[258]='CHANGING COLOUR MODE SETTINGCHANGING COLOUR MODE SETTINGOverviewChange the colour mode used to scan the original.Colour mode typesAUTO DETECTIONThe machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and automatically selects full colour or black and white (Mono2 or Greyscale) scanning.Full ColourThe original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues.GreyscaleThe colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of grey (greyscale).Mono2Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.OperationTap the [Colour Mode] keyTap the key of the desired colour mode for the original If there is a mix of destinations in different send modes, tap to select a send mode (E-mail, Network Folder, FTP, or Data Entry) to set the colour mode for each mode.If you have selected [Auto], tap the [Greyscale] key or [Mono2] keySpecify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale. After the settings are completed, tap .Back to top';
 body[259]='05-035.htm';
dai[259]='SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES';
bun[259]='SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGESSENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (JOB BUILD)OverviewThis function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can scan an original placed in both the automatic document feeder aFirst scan the set that has the first page of the original. The setting used for scanning the first set can be used subsequently until the last set is scanned.Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the scanning will be cancelled.The scan settings can be changed for each set of originals.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederInsert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Job Build] keyA checkmark appears on the icon. If you use Scan to E-mail, tap the [Others] key and tap the [Job Build] key.To cancel the Job Build setting:Tap the [Job Build] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key or [Preview] key to start scanning the original You can preview the final image and transmit it simultaneously. For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;.Place the next set of originals and tap the [Additional Scan] keyRepeat this step until all originals have been scanned.Set the [Change Setting of Following Original] checkbox on the action panel to before tapping [Additional Scan] key as required and then change the scan or send settings of the next original.To cancel scanning:Tap the [CA] key. All settings including scanned data will be cleared.Tap the [Start] keyBack to top';
 body[260]='05-036.htm';
dai[260]='RETRIEVING STORED IMAGE SEND SETTINGS';
bun[260]='RETRIEVING STORED IMAGE SEND SETTINGSRETRIEVING STORED IMAGE SEND SETTINGS (CALL PROGRAM)OverviewThis function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation.For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.Send the same documents to each branch office.Transmit each page of a bound document is successively.Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmissionWhen a job program is not storedWhen a job program is storedEnter the address of each branch office.Select Dual Page Scan.Specify Erase.Tap the [Start] key.Scan and send the original.Tap the key of a stored program.Tap the [Start] key.Scan and send the original.This method requires multiple settings and takes time.Also, it may cause a setting error.This method requires no multiple settings and takes no time.Also, you can send the documents with no setting errors.The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission.The following contents cannot be stored in programs:Tapping the Custom Size, Card Shot, page move and unspecified erase during preview, Metadata Entry and Send Settings.Up to 48 programs can be stored.Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program. This function cannot be used in data entry mode.To store a program:Tap the [Program Registration] key that appears on the action panel when you operate any mode screen.STORING A PROGRAMOperationPlace the originalAccording to the function stored in the program, place the original in the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Call Program] key on the action panelTap the key of the program you want to retrieveThe stored settings of the program are applied.Configure additional settings as required Additional setting may not be allowed depending on the called program.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;.Back to top';
 body[261]='05-037.htm';
dai[261]='OTHERS SCREEN';
bun[261]='OTHERS SCREENOTHERS SCREENOverviewWhen you tap the [Others] key on the initial screen, the Others screen is displayed. After configuring each function, tap the or [Back] key on the Others screen to return to the initial screen.Some combination of functions are not used.The display screen varies depending on the selected mode.Scanner mode, and Data Entry mode[Job Build] keySENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES This option is displayed on the initial screen during Scan to FTP or Sent to Network Folder.[Slow Scan Mode] keyNNING THIN ORIGINALS[Mixed Size Original] keySCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES[Original Count] keyCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS[Erase] keyERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE[Dual Page Scan] keySCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES[Book Divide] keySPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY[Card Shot] keySENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE[Timer] keySTARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME[Verif. Stamp] keySTAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS[Suppress Background] keyWHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE[Blank Page Skip] keyELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM TRANSMISSION[Drop Out Colour] keyREMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION[Sharpness] keyADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE[Contrast] keyADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION[File] keySAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA[Quick File] keySAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA Back to top';
 body[262]='05-038.htm';
dai[262]='SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS';
bun[262]='SCANNING THIN ORIGINALSSCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE)OverviewUse this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. It helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAdjust the original guides slowly.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER If the originals are inserted using excessive force, they may crumple and misfeed.Specify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] keyA checkmark appears on the icon.After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the slow scan mode setting:Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalA beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending data. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more inforBack to top';
 body[263]='05-039.htm';
dai[263]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES';
bun[263]='SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZESSCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL)OverviewYou can scan originals of different sizes at the same time using the automatic document feeder; for example, when B4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;) size originals are mixed together with A3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;) size originals.When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original.This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below.A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, and A4 and B5A4R and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, and B5 and A511&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;, and 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; and 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;When Mixed Size Original is selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.After the original scan size has been selected, Mixed Size Original cannot be specified.This function is unavailable if [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting] is set to &quot;AB-3&quot; in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederInsert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] keyA checkmark appears on the icon.After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.For mixed size originals, set &quot;Original&quot; to &quot;Auto&quot;.To cancel the mixed size original setting:Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalA beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending data. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Back to top';
 body[264]='05-040.htm';
dai[264]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS';
bun[264]='CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETSCHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT)OverviewCounts the number of scanned original sheets and displays the count before transmission.Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when a 2-sided original is transmitted, the number &quot;1&quot; will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitteThe setting should be enabled separately for each mode for broadcasting.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] keyA checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the original count setting:Tap the [Original Count] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending data. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more inforWhen scanning is completed, check the number of original sheetsTap the [OK] key to start transmissionIf the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets:Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the document feeder tray again and tap the [Start] key to re-scan.Back to top';
 body[265]='05-041.htm';
dai[265]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE';
bun[265]='ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGEERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE)OverviewWhen scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image.Erase modesThis function erases part of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows. The erase width is synchronized with the zoom ratio setting. For example, if you reduce the size of the original to 70% of its origTo change the default erase width setting:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, tap [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment] and change the erase width setting.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] keySpecify an erase positionCheck the box of edge you wish to delete so that is displayed.[Outer Frame] key: Displays the Up, Down, Left, and Right checkboxes like .[Specify Frame + Centre] key: Displays all checkboxes like .Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides to scan a 2-sided original.If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to , the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.If the [Reverse erase position of back face] box is checked and is displayed, the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased.Specify the erase widthTap the numeric value display indicating the erase width on the front or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys. To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with .After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the erase setting:Tap the [Clear] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[266]='05-042.htm';
dai[266]='SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES';
bun[266]='SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGESSCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN)OverviewThe left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to send the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.Original scan sizeTransmitted imageA3 (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;1 pageA4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;2 pagesB4 (6.9&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;9.8&quot;)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;1 pageB5 (6.9&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;9.8&quot;)&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;2 pagePlace an original on the document glass.This function is enable when the original size is set to [Auto].You cannot use a combination of &quot;Centre Erase&quot; and &quot;Edge + Centre Erase&quot;.OperationPlacing Originals on the Document GlassDOCUMENT GLASSAlign the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark .Specify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] keyA checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting:Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalScan the next original. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[267]='05-043.htm';
dai[267]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY';
bun[267]='SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELYSPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE)OverviewThe opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order.When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].The document glass is not available for this function.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] keySelect the binding edge of the originalCheck the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the book divide setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalA beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[268]='05-044.htm';
dai[268]='SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE';
bun[268]='SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGESENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT)OverviewSend the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. Place the original on the document glass.If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.OperationPlace a card face down on the document glassDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] keyTap the [On] key, and specify the original size as requiredTap the areas displaying width and height sizes of the original respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. Or tap to enter the size.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.If you check the [Fit to Send Size] box to , the original is enlarged or reduced by the ratio appropriate to the original size.After selecting Card Shot, tap the [Original] key on the initial screen to change the original scan size or the send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you tap the scan size key. For the procedure for setting the send size, see &quotTo cancel the specified size settings, tap the [Size Reset] key.To cancel the Card Shot settings:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to scan the front side Tap the [Preview] key, and you can preview the output image before sending it. For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse sideBefore scanning the back of the card, tap the [Function Rev.] key on the touch panel to change the exposure.After checking the output by [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. Now, Step 7 is not required.Tap the [Read-End] keyA beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended. If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can tap the [Function Rev.] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size.Back to top';
 body[269]='05-045.htm';
dai[269]='STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME';
bun[269]='STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIMESTARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER)OverviewYou can set a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low. If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that transmission is finished.Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, and other functions) are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original image and settings are stored inIf a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job management screen, the timer will be cancelled. The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.SENDING A JOB WITH PRIORITY EVEN IF SCANNED LATERThe time can be specified up to a week in advance.Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.A timer transmission can be deleted on the job management screen.When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch &quot;&quot;. Transmission will not take place if the status is &quot;&quot; at the specified time.When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. You cannot leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission.Up to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] keyTap the [On] key The setting will show the current time. If the time is different, correct it in the setting mode before starting a job.To set the date and time of the machine:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Clock Adjust]. If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. In this case, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrSpecify a date, and then specify the time (hours and minutes) in 24-hour formatAfter the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys. Or tap to enter the size.To cancel the Timer Transmission setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. After checking the preview image, tap the [Start] key. For more The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.Back to top';
 body[270]='05-046.htm';
dai[270]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS';
bun[270]='STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALSSTAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP)OverviewThis function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned.Optional Verification Stamp unit must be installed to use the Verification Stamp function.When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.When the &quot;O&quot; mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the Verification Stamp cartridge. For the procedure for replacing the Verification Stamp cartridge, see &quot;VERIFICATION STAMP CARTRIDGE&quot;.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] keyA checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the verification stamp setting:Tap the [Verif. Stamp] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalA beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[271]='05-047.htm';
dai[271]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE';
bun[271]='WHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGEWHITENING FAINT COLOURS IN THE IMAGE (SUPPRESS BACKGROUND)OverviewThis function suppresses light background areas of originals.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Suppress Background] keyTap the [On] keySpecify the area to eraseTap or move the slider to adjust the contrast. The smaller the number, the darker the area to be erased will be.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the suppress background setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound toTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informatWhen the colour mode setting is [Mono2], the suppress background function will not operate.Back to top';
 body[272]='05-048.htm';
dai[272]='ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM TRANSMISSION';
bun[272]='ELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM TRANSMISSIONELIMINATING BLANK PAGES FROM TRANSMISSION (BLANK PAGE SKIP)OverviewIf the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them and sends only non-blank pages. If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not sent, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent.OperationPlacing Originals into the Automatic Document FeederAUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] keyTap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] keyAfter the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the blank page skip setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalA beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaCheck the confirmation message, and tap the [Execute] key to start transmissionOn the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of sheets to be sent excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are sBack to top';
 body[273]='05-049.htm';
dai[273]='REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[273]='REMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSIONREMOVING CHROMATIC COLOURS FROM THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (DROP OUT COLOUR)OverviewYou can erase a colour area of the scanned original and send the processed original.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Drop Out Colour] keyA checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.To cancel the Dropout Colour setting:Tap the [Drop Out Colour] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound toTap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informatIf you tap the [Function Rev.] key on the scan confirmation screen, you can change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size.Back to top';
 body[274]='05-050.htm';
dai[274]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE';
bun[274]='ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGEADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS)OverviewThis function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] keyAdjust the sharpness of send imageTap or move the slider to adjust the contrast.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the sharpness setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[275]='05-051.htm';
dai[275]='ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION';
bun[275]='ADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSIONADDING CONTRAST TO THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (CONTRAST)OverviewYou can increase the sharpness of the original image by increasing its contrast.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] keyAdjust the contrast levelTap or move the slider to adjust the contrast.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the contrast setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image. For more informaBack to top';
 body[276]='05-052.htm';
dai[276]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA';
bun[276]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATASAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA (FILE)OverviewIf you specify the File option for image transmission, the scanned original is saved as a file in the main folder or in a registered custom folder. As you can recall the stored file when required, you can retransmit the file without preparing its originalWhen a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.File Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Scan_04042011_112030)Stored to: Main FolderOperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [File] key You can also call the File Information screen by tapping the [File] key on the Action Panel.Tap the [On] key and set the file informationAfter the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence.To cancel the file information setting:Tap the [Off] key.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;.Back to top';
 body[277]='05-053.htm';
dai[277]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA';
bun[277]='SAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATASAVING SCANNED ORIGINAL DATA (QUICK FILE)OverviewIf you specify Quick File for image transmission, the scanned original data is saved as a file in the Quick File folder. As you can recall the stored file when required, you can retransmit the file without preparing its original.When a file is stored using Quick File, the user and file are automatically named as follows.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Scan_04042011_112030)Stored to: Quick File folderWhen user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. If data is stored with the Quick File option, you can change the file name and the storage location only.To delete all files in the Quick File folder with the exception of protected files:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Delete All Quick Files]. Configure settings to have all files deleted when the power is turned on as required.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSSpecify the destinationSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION USING THE SEARCH NUMBERENTER A DESTINATION MANUALLYSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM THE GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSPECIFYING A DESTINATION FROM TRANSMISSION LOGTap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick File] keyWhen you check the on-screen message and tap [OK], the icon is checked.After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. You can also set the Quick File option by tapping the [Quick File] key on the Action Panel.To cancel the Quick File setting:Tap the [Quick File] key to clear the checkmark.Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the originalIf you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key.A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to preview the output image before sending it. After you have scanned an original by tapping the [Preview] key, tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the next original. Tap the [Start] key to start sending an image.For more information, see &quot;CHECKING THE OUTPUT IMAGE BEFORE TRANSMISSION&quot;.Back to top';
 body[278]='05-074.htm';
dai[278]='METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)';
bun[278]='METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY)OverviewWhen the Application Integration Module is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated foBy linking the metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a sophisticated document solution environment can be built. Using the application integration module kit, information on a gen Back to top';
 body[279]='05-075.htm';
dai[279]='SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION)';
bun[279]='SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION)SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE SETTING MODE (WEB VERSION)OverviewTo configure the settings related to metadata, select [Application Settings] → [Metadata Entry] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;. Enable the Metadata Delivery.Storing Metadata SetsStore the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.Addresses specified in &quot;Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry&quot; when a metadata set is stored can be selected as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, or a global address book search. (AddressesBack to top';
 body[280]='05-077.htm';
dai[280]='TRANSMITTING METADATA';
bun[280]='TRANSMITTING METADATATRANSMITTING METADATAOverviewSelect a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery. Metadata is delivered by the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, deliver the metadata using document filing in [Document Operations] iIn data entry mode, configure metadata settings to perform metadata delivery. To perform transmission without sending metadata, switch the screen from data entry mode to a different mode and then perform transmission.When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in data entry mode, it will not be possible to switch to another mode.Before configuring metadata settings, specify addresses in all available modes. After metadata settings have been configured, specify only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata.OperationTap the [Data Entry] icon on the [Home Screen], and tap the [Metadata Entry] key on the action panel If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3. If no metadata sets have been stored, Metadata Entry is unavailable. Store metadata set in the setting mode (Web version) before performing transmission.Tap the key for the desired metadata setThe keys of the items stored in the metadata set will appear. Tap the key of the item that you wish to enterTap the key of the value that you wish to enter, and tap the [OK] keyTo directly enter the metadata value, tap the [Direct Entry] key. Tap the [OK] key on the soft keyboard screen, and you will return to the screen shown in step 3. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the selection of metadata entry:Tap the [Cancel] key.Configure image or other settings, and perform the scan send procedureConfigure job detail settings and then start transmission using the same operations as in other modes.When directly entering an address, tap [Touch to input File Name] to display the screen for selecting an address type. If the address type such as E-mail, or Network Folder is selected, the address type entry screen appears.Back to top';
 body[281]='05-078.htm';
dai[281]='METADATA FIELD';
bun[281]='METADATA FIELDMETADATA FIELDOverviewThe following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.Data automatically generated by the machineThese data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC.Previously defined fieldsThese fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields can be selected, and can only be included in the XML file if they are enabled in the setting mode (Web version).User defined fieldsCustom fields are added to the XML file. These fields can be selected and are defined in the setting mode (Web version).If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be filled in. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the Send Settings screen.Name entered in metadata fieldsDescriptionWhere enteredformNameName of the user who sent the job. If the name is not entered as metadata, the sender name determined by the usual rules for determining the sender name will be applied as metadata.[Reply-To](sender name of selected sender)replyToE-mail address to which the transmission result will be sent.[Reply-To](E-mail address of selected sender)documentSubjectJob name appearing in the e-mail &quot;Subject&quot; line. When the user enters a [Subject] in the Send Settings screen on the touch panel, the entered value is applied as metadata.[Subject](Blank until a value is set in the Send Settings screen.)fileNameEnter the file name of the image to be sent.[File Name](Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames] checkbox is selected in the metadata entry screen in the setting mode (Web version)) (Blank until a value is set in the Send Settings screen.)Back to top';
 body[282]='06-001.htm';
dai[282]='DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[282]='DOCUMENT FILINGDOCUMENT FILINGOverviewThis function saves the original scanned on the machine, or print data from a PC on the hard disk drive (HDD) of the machine or on an external memory device. The saved data can be printed or sent. Editing of the stored files, for example combining, is als Back to top';
 body[283]='06-002.htm';
dai[283]='USES OF DOCUMENT FILINGS';
bun[283]='USES OF DOCUMENT FILINGSUSES OF DOCUMENT FILINGSOverviewUsing the document filing function, you can additionally print out conference material using the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required.Additionally print out conference material using the same settings.Print out ledger sheets as required.Back to top';
 body[284]='06-003.htm';
dai[284]='TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[284]='TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILINGTYPES OF DOCUMENT FILINGOverviewData can be saved by document filing as follows: [Quick File] or [File] in copy mode or image send mode, [Scan to HDD] in document filing mode, and [Scan to External Memory Device].Quick FileWhen the original is copied or an image is sent, the data can be saved on the HDD simultaneously. You can easily save data without entering a file name and other information. Any person can access to the saved data. Do not use the Quick File function if yFileWhen the original is copied or an image is sent, the data can be saved on the HDD simultaneously. Unlike the Quick File function, you can add various control information to the data during saving. Also, you can protect data with a password.Scan to HDDThis function scans the original and stores it on the HDD. Similar to the File function, you can add various control information to the save data.Scan to External Memory DeviceThis function scans an original and stores it on an external memory device such as a USB memory device. Similar to the File function, you can add various control information to the save data.Back to top';
 body[285]='06-004.htm';
dai[285]='FOLDER TYPES';
bun[285]='FOLDER TYPESFOLDER TYPESOverview The document filing function can save data in the following three (3) folders on the HDD.Quick File Folder Tap the [Quick File] key to save the scanned data in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically assigned to each job.Main Folder Tap the [File] key to save the scanned data in this folder. You can use a previously registered user name and set a file name when saving data. You can protect a file with password (&quot;Confidential&quot; file saving) as required.Custom Folder You can name a folder and store it in the custom folder. When you tap the [File] key, data is scanned and saved in the registered holder. Similar to the Main folder, you can use a previously registered user name and set a file name when saviYou can create up to 1000 user folders on the HDD of the machine.Back to top';
 body[286]='06-005.htm';
dai[286]='CONVENIENT ITEMS TO STORE';
bun[286]='CONVENIENT ITEMS TO STORECONVENIENT ITEMS TO STOREOverviewWhen saving data usings [File] in Copy mode or Image Send mode, or using [Scan to HDD] in document filing mode, it is convenient to store the items below. This is not required when you save data using [Quick File].User NameThis is required when you set a user name to the data to save. The user name is also required to set a file search condition.Custom FolderThe Main folder is assigned by default to store data if [File] or [Scan to HDD] is used. The storage location can be changed to the Custom folder if it has been created. Also, you can set a password for Custom folder protection.My FolderYou can select an already created custom folder as &quot;My Folder&quot;, or you can create a folder as &quot;My Folder&quot;. If My Folder is already created during user authentication, My Folder is set as the default storage location when [File] or [Sca To create a Custom folder:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Control]. To store a user name and select &quot;My Folder&quot;:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [User List].Back to top';
 body[287]='06-006.htm';
dai[287]='APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF FILES AND PAGES YOU CAN STORE';
bun[287]='APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF FILES AND PAGES YOU CAN STOREAPPROXIMATE NUMBER OF FILES AND PAGES YOU CAN STOREOverviewThe following shows an approximate number of pages and files that you can store in the Custom and Main folders.Example of original typeNumber of pages *Number of filesFull-colour original (text and photos)Size: A4Up to 15000 pagesUp to 5000 filesBlack &amp; white original (Text)Size A4Up to 35000 pagesNumber of pages and files that can be stored in Quick File folderExample of original typeNumber of pages *Number of filesFull-colour original (text and photos)Size: A4Up to 700 pagesUp to 1000 filesBlack &amp; white original (Text)Size A4Up to 2000 pages*They are approximate number of pages if either full-colour originals or monochrome originals are stored.If you use the Sort function, data is saved in the storage area of Quick File folder. If the Quick File folder is filled with data, you may fail to sort data for a large copy job. If so, delete unnecessary files.The listed original types are reference only. The actual number of pages and files that you can store depend on the contents of original images and your settings for file storage.Back to top';
 body[288]='06-007.htm';
dai[288]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILE';
bun[288]='AUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILEAUTOMATIC DELETION OF FILEOverview You can automatically delete filed data from its folder by simply setting a deletion time and folder name. You can protect sensitive information and increase free HDD space by periodic data deletion. Data can be deleted once every day, every week, or eve To automatically delete document filing data periodically:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Automatic Deletion of File Settings].Print the list to check your settings.Once the automatic data deletion is set, all files are deleted from specified files at the specified time. Never store important files in the folders if automatic file deletion is set for them. To print the file deletion cycle list:In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [List Print] → [Administrator Settings List], and print the list of administrator settings including document filing settings.To print a list of deletion folders:In the &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [List Print (User)] and print a list of folder names of document filing.Back to top';
 body[289]='06-008.htm';
dai[289]='INFORMATION ADDED TO FILES';
bun[289]='INFORMATION ADDED TO FILES INFORMATION ADDED TO FILES OverviewWhen saving a file using &quot;File&quot;, you can add the following information to distinguish it from others. You cannot add information when saving a file with Quick File. User Name The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. File Name Names a file. Stored to Specifies a folder to store files. Property Sharing Any user can display and operate files having the &quot;Sharing&quot; property. Protect Once &quot;Protect&quot; is set, its file cannot be edited, moved, and deleted. No password setting is required. The protected files are identified by &quot;&quot; in each mode. Confidential You can set a password (5 to 32 digits long) for file protection. The confidential files are identified by &quot;&quot; in each mode. You can rename a file and change its property even after you have saved the file. CHECKING THE SAVED FILES/CHANGING THE FILE NAME AND PROPERTY Even if you have saved a file using the Quick File function, you can change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Protect&quot;. To store a user name: In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [User Control] → [User List]. If you cannot remember the password for confidential files and folders: in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Administrator Authority Setting] and set the [Password Change] box to . Now, you can open any confidential file and confidential folder usi Back to top ';
 body[290]='06-009.htm';
dai[290]='IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[290]='IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILINGIMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILINGOverviewTake the following notes when using the document filing function.When you save data using [Quick File], it is saved as a file having the &quot;Sharing&quot; property. Any person can recall this file and can print or send it out. If you need to protect sensitive data from access by others, never use the [Quick File] funWhen saving a file with [File], you can save it with the &quot;Confidential&quot; property. You can set a password to protect &quot;Confidential&quot; files from being access by others. Always take care not to disclose the password to others.Even if you have saved a file to have the &quot;Confidential&quot; property, you can change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Protect&quot;. Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the disclosure of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or File function,Back to top';
 body[291]='06-010.htm';
dai[291]='SELECTING DOCUMENT FILING MODE';
bun[291]='SELECTING DOCUMENT FILING MODESELECTING DOCUMENT FILING MODEYou can select the document filing mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows:OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the [HDD File retrieve] mode icon The initial document filing screen is displayed. Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode displayTap the [Document Filing] buttonThe initial document filing screen is displayed.Changing modes from the Job Management ScreenTap the [HDD File Retrieve] Tab The initial document filing screen is displayed. Back to top';
 body[292]='06-011.htm';
dai[292]='INITIAL DOCUMENT FILING SCREEN';
bun[292]='INITIAL DOCUMENT FILING SCREENINITIAL DOCUMENT FILING SCREENOverviewBack to top';
 body[293]='06-012.htm';
dai[293]='SAVING DATA';
bun[293]='SAVING DATA SAVING DATA OverviewYou can save data by specifying it from the action panel in each operation mode.Saving Data During Copying or Image SendingWhen you save data simultaneously with a copy or image sending, tap the [File] key or [Quick File] key. File Store OnlyIf you use document filing only, specify it from the action panel during document filing mode. In printer mode: When you use document filing in printer mode, select it using the printer driver. For details, see &quot;SAVING AND USING PRINT DATA&quot;. Back to top ';
 body[294]='06-013.htm';
dai[294]='QUICK FILE';
bun[294]='QUICK FILEQUICK FILEOverviewWhen you copy or send an image, you can save this original in the Quick File folder of the machine at the same time.As you can recall this image later, you need not prepare the original when you copy or send the image.When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Copy_04042011_112030)Stored to: Quick File FolderWhen user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File folder can be changed as required.To delete all files in the Quick File folder with the exception of protected files:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Delete All Quick Files]. Configure settings to have all files deleted when the power is turned on as required.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Quick File] key to turn it toWhen a message relating to saving confidential information appears, tap the [OK] key.Start to copy or send an imageSave the original as an image to the Quick File folder.When you tap the [Start] key (or [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key in Copy mode), a confirmation message appears saying that data is saved in Quick File folder.To change the message display time, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Operation Settings] → [Message Time Setting].To cancel Quick File:Tap the [Quick File] key to turn it to .Back to top';
 body[295]='06-014.htm';
dai[295]='FILE';
bun[295]='FILEFILEOverviewWhen you copy or send an image, you can save this original in the Main folder or Custom folder at the same time. As you can recall this image later, you need not prepare the original when you copy or send the image.When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.User Name: User UnknownFile Name: Mode_Day-Month-Year_Hour-Minute-Second(Example: Copy_04042011_112030)Stored to: Main FolderOperationThe following explains how to copy and &quot;file&quot; data simultaneously.Place the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [File] key to set the file informationTo configure the user name, file name, folder, and property settings, see &quot;DETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILING&quot;.After the settings are completed, tap .Select copy settings and then tap the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] key Simultaneously with starting copy, the original is stored as a file.The selected copy settings are also saved.Back to top';
 body[296]='06-015.htm';
dai[296]='DETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILING';
bun[296]='DETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILINGDETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILINGOverviewIf you set the file property, user name, file name, and storage folder location, they are useful when you search or control storage data. Also, if you set the file property to [Confidential] and set its password, the file is protected from access by otherPropertyYou can set the Sharing, Protect, or Confidential property to each file.A user can delete a file having the &quot;Sharing&quot; property.To protect a file from being moved or deleted by erroneous operations or from automatic data deletion, set its property to &quot;Protect&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot;.SharingAny user can display and operate files having the &quot;Sharing&quot; property.ProtectOnce &quot;Protect&quot; is set, its file cannot be edited, moved, and deleted. No password setting is required. The protected files are identified by &quot;&quot; in each mode.Confidential&quot;Confidential&quot; files are protected by password. The confidential files are identified by &quot;&quot; in each mode. You can change the property of a file even after you have saved it.CHECKING THE SAVED FILES/CHANGING THE FILE NAME AND PROPERTY Even if you have saved a file using the Quick File function, you can change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Protect&quot;.Restrictions on changing the propertyIf files are already stored in the Quick File folder, you can change their property to either &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Protect&quot; only. You cannot change the file property to &quot;Confidential&quot;. To do so, move the file to the Main folder or aYou cannot set two or more properties to a single file.OperationChanging the propertyTap the [Property] box on the File Information screen, and select &quot;Sharing&quot;, &quot;Protect&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot;If you select [Confidential], tap the [Password] box to display the software keyboard and enter the password (5 to 32 digits)The password is shown by &quot;&quot;.Specifying a user nameTab the [User Name] text boxWhen user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not necessary. The user name must first be stored by selecting [User Control] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [User List].Tap the desired user name keyYou can also select the user by tapping the [Call by User Number] key and by entering the user number.You must first enter the user number by selecting the [User Control] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [User List].After the settings are completed, tap .Name a fileTap the [File Name] text box, and enter a file nameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File nameIf you enter an existing file name, a tilde (~) and a serial number are added after the file name. This is saved as a different file. The file name is not case-sensitive.For example, if the &quot;test.txt&quot; file already exists and you specify the &quot;TEST.TXT&quot; file, the file will be saved as &quot;TEST.TXT~1&quot; file.If the length of file name exceeds the limit, excess characters will be omitted and a serial number will be added after the file name.Specifying the storage locationTap the [Stored to] text boxIf My Folder has been set, it is selected automatically.Tap the storage folder key, and tap theIf a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen appears. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits) from the numeric keys, and tap the .Creating PDF for PC browsing Check the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] box to , and a PDF for PC browsing is created during file storage.Back to top';
 body[297]='06-016.htm';
dai[297]='SAVING ON THE HDD';
bun[297]='SAVING ON THE HDDSAVING ON THE HDDAn original is scanned, and its data is stored on the HDD of the machine. No data is printed or sent out.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSTap the [Scan to HDD] key on the action panelSet a file name and a storage locationFor original scan settings, see the explanation of copy or image send mode.If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-sided Tablet] key or the [2-sided Booklet] key as appropriate for the original.Tap the [Start] key to start scanningWhen the original is scanned and a peep sounds, the data has been stored.Back to top';
 body[298]='06-017.htm';
dai[298]='SAVING IN AN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE';
bun[298]='SAVING IN AN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICESAVING IN AN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICEAn original is scanned and its data is stored on an external memory device. No data is printed or sent out.OperationPlace the originalPlace the original in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDERDOCUMENT GLASSInsert an external memory device into the USB socket of the machineTap the [Scan to External Memory Device] key on the action panelSet a file name and a storage locationFor original scan settings, see the explanation of copy or image send mode.If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-sided Tablet] key or the [2-sided Booklet] key as appropriate for the original.Tap the [Start] key to start scanningBack to top';
 body[299]='06-017a.htm';
dai[299]='CHECKING THE SAVED FILES / CHANGING THE FILE NAME AND PROPERTY';
bun[299]='CHECKING THE SAVED FILES / CHANGING THE FILE NAME AND PROPERTYCHECKING THE SAVED FILES / CHANGING THE FILE NAME AND PROPERTYOverviewYou can check the settings of saved files on the detailed information screen.Also, you can rename a saved file and change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot;, &quot;Protect&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot; from this screen. You can also change the settings to create a PDF for PC browsing or not.If files are already stored in the Quick File folder, you can change their property to either &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Protect&quot; only. You cannot change the file property to &quot;Confidential&quot;. To do so, move the file to the Main folder or aOperationOn the initial document filing screen, tap the key of folder that contains the desired fileIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (up to 8 digits) with the numeric keys and tap .Tap the desired file keyIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (up to 32 digits) and tap .A checkmark appears on the icon.Tap the [See Detail Information] key on the action panel The detailed information screen appears.Check the file information If you wish to change other settings, go to the next step.To rename a file, tap the [File Name] text box and enter the file nameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File nameIf you enter an existing file name, a tilde (~) and a serial number are added after the file name. This is saved as a different file. The file name is not case-sensitive.For example, if the &quot;test.txt&quot; file already exists and you specify the &quot;TEST.TXT&quot; file, the file will be saved as &quot;TEST.TXT~1&quot; file.If the length of file name exceeds the limit, excess characters will be omitted and a serial number will be added after the file name.To change the property, tap the [Property] box and select &quot;Sharing&quot;, &quot;Protect&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot;If you select [Confidential], tap the [Password] box to display the software keyboard and enter the password (5 to 32 digits).To change the settings to create PDF for PC browsing, tap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkboxBack to top';
 body[300]='06-018.htm';
dai[300]='USING A STORED FILE';
bun[300]='USING A STORED FILEUSING A STORED FILEOverviewThe screen display and operations differ between the normal operation and when user authentication is set. The following explains user operations in these cases. For information on user authentication procedures, see &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER&quot; or &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD&quot;. For user authentication settings and user name registration, see &quot;USER LIST&quot; and "DEFAULT SEYou can use document filing in setting mode (Web version) as well. In setting mode (Web version), select [Document Operations] → [Document Filing], and tap the folder having the desired data. Also, you can preview a stored file on the Web page.OperationSwitch to document filing modeSELECTING DOCUMENT FILING MODERecall a fileSelect the storage folder, and recall a file from the file list.You can also recall a file by searching.FILE SELECTION SCREENSELECTING A STORED FILESEARCHING A STORED FILESelect an operation Select the desired operation.FILE SELECTION SCREENPRINTING A STORED FILESENDING A STORED FILEMOVING A STORED FILEDELETING A STORED FILECHECKING A STORED FILE IMAGECOMBINING STORED FILESBack to top';
 body[301]='06-019.htm';
dai[301]='FILE SELECTION SCREEN';
bun[301]='FILE SELECTION SCREENFILE SELECTION SCREENOverviewYou can select a file from the &quot;List screen&quot; which lists files, or from the &quot;Thumbnail screen&quot; which thumbnails files.ListThumbnail Displaymode iconAn icon indicating document filing mode is displayed on each file key.CopyPrinter (RGB)Printer (CMYK)Scan to E-mailFile StoreScan to FTPScan to Network FolderBroadcast transmissionBack to top';
 body[302]='06-020.htm';
dai[302]='SELECTING A STORED FILE';
bun[302]='SELECTING A STORED FILESELECTING A STORED FILESelect a stored file as follows.OperationTap the [HDD File retrieve] key If you are using the user authentication and if you select [User Control] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [User List], My Folder is opened.Tap the key of folder having the desired fileIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (up to 8 digits) with the numeric keys and tap the .Tap the desired file keyIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (up to 32 digits) and tap the .Tap the [Print Now] key to print the file using the settings used for its storage.To display files of each job separately, tap the [By Job Display] key.Tap the [File Name], [User Name], or [Date] key to display files in ascending order of the selected item.Select [User Control] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Authority Group List]. Then, in authority group setting for the users who are currently logged in, select [Job Settings] → [Document Filing] and set [Display only the Files of Logged-inBack to top';
 body[303]='06-021.htm';
dai[303]='PRINTING A STORED FILE';
bun[303]='PRINTING A STORED FILEPRINTING A STORED FILEOverviewA file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before printing by changinA file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be printed in colour.You cannot print a long-size document if you have saved it using the &quot;Scan to HDD&quot;, &quot;Scan to External Memory Device&quot;, &quot;E-mail&quot;, &quot;FTP&quot; or &quot;Network Folder&quot;.If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of prints.The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.OperationPrint a file using the same settings as those used to save it. Select a file and tap the [Print Now] key. If you wish to delete data after its printing, check the [Print and Delete the Data] box to display the . To print a file in monochrome mode, check the [Print B/W] box to display the .Print a file with different settings. Select a desired file, and proceed as follows.SELECTING A STORED FILETap the [Choose Print Settings] keyChange the print settingsCheck the [Delete] box to display the , and the data will be deleted after printing. Check the [Print B/W] box to display the , and the colour data will be printed in monochrome mode.Tap the [Start] key Tapping the [Proof Print] key prints only one set of copies so that you can check the output. If you are satisfied with the result, tap the [Start] key to print the remaining sets of copies. If the output result is not correct, change settings and output Back to top';
 body[304]='06-022.htm';
dai[304]='PRINTING MULTIPLE FILES';
bun[304]='PRINTING MULTIPLE FILESPRINTING MULTIPLE FILESYou can select multiple files from a folder and print them at one time.OperationSelect multiple file keys for printingYou cannot print a Confidential file together with other property files.You cannot print files in different folders at the same time.Tap the [Print] key on the action panelIf you change the number of copies that was saved as settings data, check the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job] box to display the If you do not set a number of copies but use the settings data instead, go to Step 5.Set a number of copies using theCorrect the number of copies by tapping numeric keys directly.If you wish to delete a file after its printing, check the [Delete] box to display theTap the [OK] keyBack to top';
 body[305]='06-023.htm';
dai[305]='BATCH PRINTING FILES';
bun[305]='BATCH PRINTING FILESBATCH PRINTING FILESYou can batch print all files of a folder that have the same user name and password.OperationTap the [Batch Print] keyTap the [User Name] text boxSelect the user nameAfter selecting the user name, tap the . Tap the [All Users] and [User Unknown] keys if you have already selected the [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Document Filing Settings] → [Batch Print Settings] and if you have unchecked both the [Selection of [All Users]If files are protected by password, tap the [Password] keyEnter the password (5 to 32 alphanumerics), and tap the . The data protected by the same password are only selected.If you change the number of copies that was saved as settings data, check the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job] box to display theWhen printing the same number of copies you made at the time data is saved, go to Step 7.Set a number of copies using theCorrect the number of copies by tapping numeric keys directly.If you wish to delete files after their printing, tap the [Delete] keyTap the [Start] key If you tap the [Delete the Data] key on the action panel, all files that match the current conditions are deleted.Back to top';
 body[306]='06-025.htm';
dai[306]='MOVING A STORED FILE';
bun[306]='MOVING A STORED FILEMOVING A STORED FILEOverviewChanges the file storage location. (The file is moved to another folder.) A file with the &quot;Protect&quot; property cannot be moved. To delete a protected file, change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot;.OperationSelect a desired file, and follow the steps below.SELECTING A STORED FILETap the [Move] key on the action panelTap the [Move to] text boxNo file can be moved to the Quick File folder. In such case, the file is renamed and moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the &quot;Save As&quot; command on a PC, the file is not copied to the specified folder with the original file remaining in the oriTo rename a file, tap the [File Name] key.Tap the destination folder keyIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (5 to 8 digits) from the numeric keys and tap the .Tap the [Move] keyBack to top';
 body[307]='06-026.htm';
dai[307]='DELETING A STORED FILE';
bun[307]='DELETING A STORED FILEDELETING A STORED FILEOverviewYou can delete unnecessary files from the storage. A file with the &quot;Protect&quot; property cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to &quot;Sharing&quot; or &quot;Confidential&quot;.OperationSelect a desired file, and follow the steps below.SELECTING A STORED FILETap the [Delete] keyTap the [Yes] keyBack to top';
 body[308]='06-027.htm';
dai[308]='CHECKING A STORED FILE IMAGE';
bun[308]='CHECKING A STORED FILE IMAGECHECKING A STORED FILE IMAGEOverviewYou can check an image of file that has been saved by document filing.Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected.The following data cannot be divided into chapters in edit mode.File-merged dataLong original dataOperationSelect a desired file, and follow the steps below.SELECTING A STORED FILETap the [Check Image] key on the action panelCheck the file imageBack to top';
 body[309]='06-028.htm';
dai[309]='COMBINING STORED FILES';
bun[309]='COMBINING STORED FILESCOMBINING STORED FILESOverviewYou can combine files that have been saved by document filing.When you select a single file only, the [Combine File] key is not displayed.The file name is a combination of the &quot;first file name&quot;, &quot;tilde (~)&quot;, and &quot;serial number&quot;. You can rename the file later if required.OperationSelect the two desired files, and follow the steps below.SELECTING A STORED FILETap the [Combine File] key on the action panelSet the file information To configure the user name, file name, folder, and property settings, see &quot;DETAILED SETTINGS FOR FILING&quot;. To delete the original file, check the [Delete] box.Tap the [Execute] key When files are combined, the &quot;Combining complete&quot; message is displayed.To cancel the operation, tap the [Cancel] key. You cannot cancel the operation if files are already combined and the original files are being deleted.Back to top';
 body[310]='06-029.htm';
dai[310]='RETRIEVING A STORED FILE FROM THE JOB MANAGEMENT SCREEN';
bun[310]='RETRIEVING A STORED FILE FROM THE JOB MANAGEMENT SCREENRETRIEVING A STORED FILE FROM THE JOB MANAGEMENT SCREENOverviewWhen you store a file using the Quick File or the File function, its key is displayed on the job management complete screen. This is useful to print the copied data again.OperationTap on the Job Management display panelTap the desired file tab, and tap the [Complete] key.Tap the file you wish to recallYou can recall files that have been saved using the Quick File function or the File function.Tap either the [Send] key or [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelSENDING A STORED FILEPRINTING A STORED FILE To check the file details, select the desired file and tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel. Back to top';
 body[311]='06-030.htm';
dai[311]='SEARCHING A STORED FILE';
bun[311]='SEARCHING A STORED FILEWhen you tap a folder key, the files of this folder are listed. Tap the desired file in the list.SEARCHING A STORED FILEOverviewIf many files are stored, you may take some time to locate a file. Use the search function to find a file quickly. You can search a file using part of a file name or folder name. Also, you can specify a folder as the scope of search.When searching a file whose name contains &quot;meeting&quot;OperationWhen you search files in a specific folder, tap the folder keyIf the password input screen appears, enter the password (5 to 8 digits) from the numeric keys.Tap theSet the search conditions Tap the text box and set the search conditions. When you search files within the current folder, check the [Search Just Within the Folder] box to display the . [User Name] Search using the user name. Select the user from the User Selection screen, and tap the . [Login Name] Search using the login name. Enter the file name or folder name, and tap the [OK] key. [File or Folder Name] Search using the file name Enter the login name and tap the [OK] key. [Date] Search using the date when the file was created. When you select the [Today] or [Date Set], set the date and time.Tap the [Start Search] key The files or folders that match your search conditions will be listed. When you select the desired file from the list, the job settings screen appears. Tap the [CA] key to return to the initial document filing screen. Tap the [Search Again] key to search a file again in different conditions.If you search a file using the [File or Folder Name] option, the matching user folders are also listed.You can search files in setting mode (Web version) as well. From the setting mode (Web version) menu, click [Document Operations] → [Document Filing] → [Search]. Back to top';
 body[312]='06-031.htm';
dai[312]='PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE';
bun[312]='PRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILEPRINTING AN EXTERNAL FILE You can print files stored in the FTP server, a USB memory device, or network folder of a PC.OperationPrint a file of FTP serverTap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panelSelect the FTP serverSelect a file to printTap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelChange the print settingsFor details, see PRINTING A STORED FILE. Check the [Fit To Page] box to display the , and the file will be printed out appropriate to the paper size. Check the [Print B/W] box to display the , and the colour data will be printed in monochrome mode.Tap the [Start] key to print the filePrint a file of USB memoryTap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panelSelect a file to printTap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelChange the print settingsFor details, see PRINTING A STORED FILE. Check the [Fit To Page] box to display the , and the file will be printed out appropriate to the paper size. Check the [Print B/W] box to display the , and the colour data will be printed in monochrome mode.Tap the [Start] key to print the filePrint a file of PC network folderTap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panelSelect the server Specify a workgroup and a server in this sequence. When you enter the path to the network folder directly, tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key on the action panel.Select a network folderWhen you tap , the workgroup selection screen appears.When you tap , the server selection screen appears.Select a file to print When you tap , the next lower folder is displayed.When you tap , the print screen appears.When you tap , the next higher folder is displayed.When you tap , the top screen of the network folder is displayed. This does not appear if there is just one upper level.Tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panelChange the print settingsFor details, see PRINTING A STORED FILE. Check the [Fit To Page] box to display the , and the file will be printed out appropriate to the paper size. Check the [Print B/W] box to display the , and the colour data will be printed in monochrome mode.Tap the [Start] key to print the fileBack to top';
 body[313]='07-001.htm';
dai[313]='MANUAL FINISHING';
bun[313]='MANUAL FINISHINGMANUAL FINISHINGOverview In manual finishing mode, you can set for finish on copied or printed pages. You can select the manual finishing mode if the inserter is installed. When the finisher, saddle finisher, punch module, or folding unit is installed, finishing operations, suchManual finishing cannot be used if the use of manual finishing or inserter is prohibited in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.To specify whether or not to prohibit the use of manual finishing or inserter:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Disable Manual Finishing] to set the use of manual finishing. Select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Inserter] to set the use of the inserBack to top';
 body[314]='07-002.htm';
dai[314]='SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE';
bun[314]='SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODESELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODEYou can select the manual finishing mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows:OperationChanging modes from the Home ScreenTap the [Manual Finishing] mode iconThe initial screen of the manual finishing mode is displayed.Changing mode from each modeTap on the mode displayTap the [Manual Finishing] keyThe initial screen of manual finishing mode is displayed.Back to top';
 body[315]='07-003.htm';
dai[315]='INITIAL SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE';
bun[315]='INITIAL SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODEINITIAL SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODEOverviewThe display will vary depending on the devices installed.Back to top';
 body[316]='07-004.htm';
dai[316]='CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER';
bun[316]='CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPERCHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPEROverview You can check the type and size of paper loaded in the inserter on the display to the right of [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key. The paper size is automatically detected when paper is loaded. The paper type that is specified in [Inserter(Upper)] or [InseIf the paper loaded is different from the type that is indicated on the right of the key, specify the correct type in &quot;Setting mode&quot;.Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.To change the paper settings for the paper you load in the inserter:In &quot;Setting mode&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Inserter(Upper)] or [Inserter(Lower)]. If the paper size is not correctly detected or paper of a non-standard size or type is loaded, specify this setting.Back to top';
 body[317]='07-005.htm';
dai[317]='PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION';
bun[317]='PAPER LOADING ORIENTATIONPAPER LOADING ORIENTATIONOverview When using the staple, punch or the paper folding function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.StapleTouch panel keyPaper loading orientationResultTo use the staple function, you need to mount a finisher or saddle finisher.To use the saddle stitch function, you need to mount a saddle finisher (large stacker).FoldTouch panel keyOrientationResultA folding unit is required to be installed in order to use paper folding functions other than saddle folds.To use the saddle fold function, you need to mount a saddle finisher.PunchTouch panel keyOrientationResultA punch module is required for paper punch.The illustration for the touch panel key is example. It varies depending on the installed punch module.Back to top';
 body[318]='07-006.htm';
dai[318]='USING MANUAL FINISHING';
bun[318]='USING MANUAL FINISHINGUSING MANUAL FINISHINGOverviewChange from the Home Screen or each mode to manual finishing mode, and carry out the following procedure.SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODEOperationSet the guides to the size of the paper Grasp the guide lock lever to adjust the guide. When you have finished the adjustment, release the lock lever.When loading paper larger than A4R, or 8-1/2" × 11"R, extend the bypass tray all the way out. If it is not pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be detected correctly.Load paper into the upper or lower tray The paper orientation varies depending on the manual finishing function.CHANGING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPERORIENTATIONUp to 200 sheets of paper can be loaded into each of the upper and lower trays.Insert the paper along the guides all the way into the tray.If the guide width is not correctly adjusted to match the paper width, paper may be jammed, skewed, or crease. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of the paper.Select the appropriate finishing methodSTAPLE FUNCTIONPAPER FOLDING FUNCTIONPUNCH FUNCTIONChange the paper tray or output tray as requiredTO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAYTO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAYTap the [Start] key to begin manual finishingTo stop manual finishing:Tap the [Stop] key.Back to top';
 body[319]='07-007.htm';
dai[319]='STAPLE FUNCTION';
bun[319]='STAPLE FUNCTIONSTAPLE FUNCTIONOverviewWhen a finisher is installed, you can staple loaded papers into a sheaf. (Staple function)When a saddle finisher is installed, you can staple papers in two places on the centreline and fold them before being output. (Saddle stitch function)StapleSaddle Stitch You can use the saddle stitch function for size A4R to A3W (8-1/2"x11"R to 13"x19") papers.&bull;The saddle stitch function cannot be used with other manual finishing functions.&bull;If you load only one sheet of paper while the staple function is ON, the staple function is temporarily turned OFF and the sheet is not stapled.Copies/Pages functionIf you wish to staple multiple sets at once, use the Copies/Pages. Load sorted paper and tap the [Copies/Pages] key to enter the number of copies and the number of pages per set.The settings on the Copies/Pages will not be effective for the paper folding and punch functions.Trimmer SettingIf a trimmer module is installed, you can trim off excess edges of paper for a finer finish.OperationSelecting staple functionTap your desired staple key in the [Staple]. The output tray is automatically selected based on the selected staple key.To cancel the staple function:Tap the selected staple key again.Setting the number of copies (number of pages)Tap the [Copies/Pages] keyTap the [Manual] keySpecify the number of output copies and the number of pages per setTap the Number of Copies display and the Number of Pages per Set display, and enter the values using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap the key to enter the values. After the settings are completed, tap .If you select [All Pages] for the number of copies/number of pages, specify &quot;1&quot; for the number of sets to be printed.If you set more copies or pages than the number of copies or pages that can bestapled, a message is displayed and the [Start] key is disabled.See "Specifications" in the "Quick Start Guide" and specify the number of copiesor pages that can be stapled.Trimmer Setting (when Saddle Stitch is selected)To select the Trimmer Setting, a trimmer module must be installed.With Saddle Stitch selected, tap the [Trimmer Setting] keyTap the [On] key, and specify the trimming width Tap the numeric value display field of the trimming width, and enter the allowable range using the numeric keys. Otherwise, tap the key to enter the values. After the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the trimmer setting:Tap the [Off] key.Back to top';
 body[320]='07-008.htm';
dai[320]='PAPER FOLDING FUNCTION';
bun[320]='PAPER FOLDING FUNCTIONPAPER FOLDING FUNCTIONOverviewWhen a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold. When a saddle finisher is installed, you can use saddle folds.The paper sizes that can be selected vary depending on the type of paper fold.Types of folds and paper sizes availableTypes of FoldsFolding resultsPaper SizeSaddle FoldA3, B4, A4R, SRA3, 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quoZ-FoldA3, B4, A4R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RC-FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RAccordion FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RDouble FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RHalf FoldA4R, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;RSpecial media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole punch function. However, it can be used with them if the paper size for Z-fold is A3, B4 or 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;.Multiple Fold (when Saddle Fold is selected)If Saddle Fold is selected, multiple sheets can be folded together. Five sheets of paper are folded at a time.When four or less papers are set, four or less papers are folded at a time.If five or more papers are set and if four or less papers remain, the remaining number of papers are folded at a time.Some types of paper reduces the number of sheets that are folded every set. For example, three sheets are folded at a time in the case of heavy paper.OperationSelecting the paper folding functionTap your desired fold key in the &quot;Fold&quot;.The output tray is automatically selected based on the selected fold key.To cancel the paper folding function:Tap the selected fold key again.Setting Multiple Fold (when Saddle Fold is selected)With Saddle Fold selected, tap the [Detail] keySet the [Fold Multiple Sheets Together] checkbox toAfter the settings are completed, tap .To cancel the multiple fold function:Set the [Fold Multiple Sheets Together] checkbox to .Back to top';
 body[321]='07-009.htm';
dai[321]='PUNCH FUNCTION';
bun[321]='PUNCH FUNCTIONPUNCH FUNCTIONOverviewIf a punch module is installed, holes can be punched in paper. The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module. Paper sizes that are available for the punch function are B5R to A3 (8-1/2"x11"R to 11"x17"). You cannot use A3W (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;) size papers, and special media such as transparency film and tab papers.The punch function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or paper folding functions. However, it can be used with them if the paper size used is A3, B4 or 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot; for Z-fold.OperationTap the key under &quot;Punch&quot;.To cancel the punch function:Tap the key again.Back to top';
 body[322]='07-010.htm';
dai[322]='TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAY';
bun[322]='TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAYTO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAYOverviewThe paper tray is automatically detected when paper is loaded in the inserter. If you need to specify a paper tray when, for example, paper has been loaded into both the upper and lower trays on the inserter, tap the [Upper Tray] or [Lower Tray] key to spBack to top';
 body[323]='07-011.htm';
dai[323]='TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAY';
bun[323]='TO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAYTO CHANGE THE OUTPUT TRAYOverviewThe output tray is automatically selected based on the output function you set. If Z-Fold, Half Fold, or Punch is selected, you can select the middle or offset tray for the output tray. Tap the [Offset Tray] or [Middle Tray] key in &quot;Output Tray&quot; and select the output tray you require.Relation between output function and output trayAn output tray is automatically selected as shown below based on the output function you set. Depending on the output function that is originally deselected, it may be deselected if you tap the [Middle Tray] or [Offset Tray] key to change the output tray.Output functionDeliver toStapleOffset Tray (A)Z-Fold/Half Fold/PunchOffset Tray (A) or Middle Tray (B)Saddle Stitch/Saddle FoldSaddle Stitch Tray (C)C-Fold/Accordion Fold/Double FoldFolding Unit Tray (D)Back to top';
 body[324]='08-001.htm';
dai[324]='SETTING MODE';
bun[324]='SETTING MODESETTING MODEOverview This mode allows management of various functions that will make it easier to use the machine, such as default registration for each function, network connection setting, and log check of operation status. Setting mode can also be selected using the Web bAdministrator passwordTo maintain security, the machine administrator should promptly change the password after the machine is purchased. (For the default administrator password, see Quick Start Guide.) To change the password, see &quot;CHANGE PASSWORD&quot;. * To ensure a higBack to top ';
 body[325]='08-002.htm';
dai[325]='HOW TO DISPLAY SETTING MODE';
bun[325]='HOW TO DISPLAY SETTING MODEHOW TO DISPLAY SETTING MODEOverviewThe setting mode can be displayed from the Home Screen of the machine touch panel. When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC&rsquo;s Web browser. From the setting mode of the machine, print thOperationDisplaying the setting mode on the machineTap the [Settings] key on the Home ScreenThe setting mode screen appears on the touch panel.To quit the setting mode, tap the [End] key in the upper right corner of the screen.For the user authentication setup, see &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER&quot;, &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD&quot;.Displaying the setting mode using the Web browserTap the [Settings] keyFrom the menu, tap [System Settings] → [List Print (User)]Tap the [Print] key on the [All Custom Setting List]Check the IP address on the printed list.Start the Web browser on the PC, and enter the IP address of the machineStart a Web browser on a PC on the same network the machine is on, and enter the IP address of the machine.Recommended Web browsers: Internet Explorer: 6.0 or later (Windows&reg;) Netscape Navigator: 9 (Windows&reg;) Firefox: 2.0 or later (Windows&reg;) Safari: 1.5 or later (Macintosh) Depending on the machine settings, user authentication may be required to display the setting mode (Web version). For password and other information required for user authentication, contact the administrator of the machine.Back to top';
 body[326]='08-003.htm';
dai[326]='TOP PAGES LIST';
bun[326]='TOP PAGES LISTTOP PAGES LISTOverviewThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStatusMachine Identification-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[327]='08-004.htm';
dai[327]='STATUS LIST';
bun[327]='STATUS LISTSTATUS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStatusDevice Status-YesYesNetwork Status-YesYesPower Reset-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[328]='08-005.htm';
dai[328]='ADDRESS BOOKS LIST';
bun[328]='ADDRESS BOOKS LISTADDRESS BOOKS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAADDRESS BOOK-YesYesCategory Setting-YesYesGlobal Address Book-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[329]='08-005_01.htm';
dai[329]='ADDRESS BOOKS LIST';
bun[329]='ADDRESS BOOKS LISTDOCUMENT OPERATIONS The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item.Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator/AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Operations*Document FilingYesYesQuick File Folder-YesYesMain Folder-YesYes Custom Folder-YesYes Search-YesYes File Batch Print-YesYes Filing Data Backup-NoYes Export Settings-NoYes Import Settings-NoYes Submit Print Job-YesYes Print Settings-YesYes* This cannot be set on the machine. Select [Document Operations] in Setting mode (Web version). (Some items require administrative rights.)Back to top ';
 body[330]='08-006.htm';
dai[330]='USER CONTROL LIST';
bun[330]='USER CONTROL LISTUSER CONTROL LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAUser ControlUser List-NoYesCustom Index-NoYesDefault SettingsNoYesUser Authentication-NoYesUser AuthenticationDisableNoYesAuthentication Method SettingAuthenticate a User by Login Name and PasswordNoYesDevice Account Mode SettingDisableNoYesActions when the Limit of Pages for Output JobsJob is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is ReachedNoYesA Warning when Login FailsDisableNoYesDisabling of Printing by Invalid UserDisableNoYesAutomatically print stored jobs after loginDisableNoYesDefault Network Authentication Server Setting-NoYesPerform LDAP server access controlDisableNoYesDisplay Usage Status after LoginEnableNoYesLogin Name DisplayDisplay login nameNoYesInclude Job Management in user authenticationDisableNoYesAutomatic Logout SettingEnable (60 sec)NoYesEdit Help Display of Login Screen-NoYes User Information Print-NoYes Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel-NoYesReset Counter After Sending E-mail StatusDisableNoYesOrganization /Group List-NoYesPage Limit Group List-NoYesMachine Page Limit Setting-NoYesAuthority Group List-NoYesFavorite Operation Group List-NoYesCustomized Key List-NoYesHome Screen List-NoYesUser CountView user count-NoYesSave User Count-NoYesCard Area SettingNoYes Import from Configuration file-NoYesCard Scan Test-NoYes Check Facility Code in HID ModeDisableNoYesCard Type/Reader SettingsNoYes Card Type/Card Reader-NoYesUse IC Card for AuthenticationDisableNoYes Card Reader Device Registration-NoYes*This cannot be set on the machine. Select [User Control] in Setting mode (Web version). (Administrator rights are required.)Back to top ';
 body[331]='08-007.htm';
dai[331]='SYSTEM SETTINGS LIST';
bun[331]='SYSTEM SETTINGS LIST*6 When the punch module is installedSYSTEM SETTINGS LISTOverviewThe following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.TOTAL COUNTU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUATOTAL COUNT-YesYesJob Count-YesYesDevice Count-YesYesDefault SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADefault SettingsYesYesClock AdjustYesYesSpecify Time Zone-YesYesDate&amp;Time Settings-YesYesSynchronize with Internet Time ServerDisableYesYesDaylight Saving Time SettingVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYes Select Setting TypeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesStart TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesCompleting TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesAdjustment TimeVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesDefault FormatVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesKeyboard SelectVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesList Print (User)U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAList Print (User)YesYesAll Custom Setting List-YesYesPrinter Test Page-YesYesSending Address List-YesYesDocument Filing Folder List-YesYesPaper Settings List-YesYesPaper Tray SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPaper Tray Settings/Paper SettingsYesYes Auto Switching of TrayEnableNoYesTray 1Plain, A4 (8-1/2" × 11")YesYesTray 2Plain, A4 (8-1/2" × 11")YesYesTray 3Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesTray 4YesYesTray 5*1, 2, 3Plain, A4 (8-1/2&quot; × 11&quot;)*1,2Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch) *3YesYesTray 6*3Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYes Tray 7*4Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYes Tray 8*4Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesBypass*5Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesSelect Similar Sizes for Auto DetectionAuto-AB: 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2&quot; x 13&quot;) Auto-Inch: 8-1/2&quot; x 14&quot;YesYesInserter (Upper)*6Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesInserter (Lower)*6Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)YesYesCustom Size Registration (Bypass)Custom 1 to 7: X = 420 mm (17"), Y = 297 mm (11")YesYes*1 When a large capacity tray (MX-LC12) is installed*2 When a large capacity tray (MX-LC13 N) is installed*3 When the large capacity trays are installed *4 When two large capacity trays are installed*5 When a bypass tray is installed *6 When an inserter is installedPaper Type RegistrationU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPaper Type Registration-YesYesRegistration pf Paper SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUARegistration pf Paper Settings-YesYesPrinter Condition SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPrinter Condition SettingsYesYesDefault SettingsYesYesCopies1 sets of copiesYesYesOrientationPortraitYesYesDefault Paper SizeA4 (8-1/2" x 11")YesYesDefault Output TrayVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesDefault Paper TypePlain paperYesYesStandard Print ModeHigh QualityYesYesDisable Blank Page PrintDisableYesYesLine Thickness5YesYes2-Sided Print1-SidedYesYesColour ModeAutoYesYesN-Up Print1-UpYesYesFit To PageEnableYesYesOutputVaries depending on the machine configurationYesYesPrint per UnitEnableYesYesStaple Position*DisabledYesYesPunch*DisableYesYesFold*DisableYesYesSaddle Fold*InsideYesYesZ-Fold Paper Size*All EnabledYesYesC-Fold*Print Side: Inside FddOrientation: Open RightYesYesAccordion Fold* Fold Orientation: Open RightYesYesDouble Fold* Print Side: Inside FddOrientation: Open RightYesYesHalf Fold* Print Side: InsideYesYesTrimming Width Settings*2.0 mmYesYesQuick FileDisableYesYesPCL SettingsYesYesPCL Symbol Set SettingPC-8YesYesPCL Font SettingInternal Font, 0: CourierYesYesPCL Line Feed Code0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FFYesYesWide A4DisableYesYesPostScript SettingsYesYesScreen SettingsStandardYesYesPrint PS ErrorDisableYesYesBinary ProcessingDisableYesYesStore Print Data in PS FormatDisableYesYes * Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings. Document Filing ControlU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Filing Control-YesYesUSB-Device CheckU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAUSB-Device Check-YesYesRecognized Device-YesYesDriver-YesYesOperation SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAOperation SettingsNoYesEnlarge Display ModeDisableNoYesKeys Touch SoundMiddleNoYesKey Touch Sound at Initial PointDisableNoYesAuto Clear Setting60 secondsNoYesCancel TimerDisableNoYesMessage Time Setting6 secondsNoYesMFP Display Language SettingVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesDefault Display SettingsHome ScreenNoYesDisplay Favourite Menus as DefaultDisableNoYesDisplay Action Panel as defaultEnableNoYesDisabling of Job Priority OperationDisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass PrintingDisableNoYes Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job ManagementRemaining SetsNoYesDisplay the estimated job and timeEnableNoYesKey Operation Setting0.0 secondsNoYesDisable Auto Key RepeatDisableNoYes Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch0.5 secondsNoYes Double Tap Interval Setting0.5 secondsNoYesDisabling of Clock AdjustmentDisableNoYesDisabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisableNoYesDisable Manual FinishingDisableNoYesSet Keyboard Priority*1Soft KeyboardNoYesDisplay current path in System SettingsEnableNoYesEnable link of current pathEnableNoYesInitial Original Count SettingAll InvalidNoYesUnify 10-key number in ascending order from upper leftDisableNoYesMFP Display Pattern SettingPattern 1NoYesPreview SettingNoYesFile Retrieve of Document FilingNoYesMain Folder/Quick File FolderListNoYesCustom FolderListNoYes Paper SettingsNoYesInitial Status Setting for Switching Unit of Measurement of Paper WeightVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesRemote Operation SettingsNoYesRemote Software OperationNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesOperation from Specified PCNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesHostname or IP Address of PC-NoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesOperation by User Who Has PasswordNoYesOperational AuthorityProhibitedNoYesView Password Entry ScreenDisplay in Both PC and MFPNoYesCookie SettingsNot storedNoYesSoft Keyboard Template Setting-NoYesCustomize Key Setting*2-NoYes Mode Key Display Setting-NoYesHome Screen Settings*2-NoYes*1 When an external keyboard is installed*2 This cannot be set on the machine. It can be set in Setting mode (Web version). (Administrator rights are required.)Device ControlU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADevice ControlNoYesOriginal Size Detector SettingNoYesOriginal Detection Size CombinationAB-1 (INCH-1)NoYesCancel Detection at Document GlassDisableNoYesDisabling of Document FeederDisableNoYesOriginal Feeding ModeAll DisabledNoYesDisabling of DuplexDisableNoYesDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette*1DisableNoYesDisabling of Tray Settings/Paper SettingsDisableNoYesDisabling of Finisher*2DisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass-Tray*3DisableNoYesDisabling of Inserter*4DisableNoYesDisabling of Offset*2DisableNoYesDisabling of Stapler*2DisableNoYesAutomatic Saddle StitchEnableNoYesFold Position Adjustment for Saddle Stitch/Saddle FoldAll 0 mmNoYesStaple Position Fine Adjustment for Saddle Stitch*50NoYesDisabling of Punch*6DisableNoYesDisabling of Folding Unit*7DisableNoYesDisabling of Trimming Module*8DisableNoYes Disabling of Stacker 1*10DisableNoYes Disabling of Stacker 2*10DisableNoYesDisabling of Colour Mode*9DisableNoYesAuto Paper Selection SettingPlain paperNoYes Stacker Settings*10NoYes Stack Setting for Additional JobsNot AllowedNoYes Auto SwitchingSetting NoNoYesTandem Connection SettingNoYesIP Address of Slave Machine0.0.0.0NoYesPort Number50001NoYes Tandem ModeDisableNoYesDisabling of Master Machine ModeDisableNoYesDisabling of Slave Machine ModeDisableNoYesDetect Standard in Auto Colour Mode3 (Normal)NoYesDouble Feed Detection SettingEnableNoYesAuto Switching of Finisher Trays*2-NoYesRegistration Adjustment-NoYesOptimization of a Hard Disk-NoYesFusing Cleaning ModeEnableNoYesPTC Cleaning Mode-NoYesMC Cleaning Mode-NoYesList PrintOne SidedNoYesBlack Streak ReductionDisableNoYes Status Indicator Setting*11Pattern 1NoYesDisplay warning message for black streaks detection.DisableNoYes*1 When a large capacity tray is installed*2 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed*3 When the bypass tray is installed*4 When the inserter is installed*5 When the saddle finisher is installed*7 When the folding unit is installed*8 When the trimming module is installed*9 When a colour-related problem has occurred *10 When two stacker are installed*11 When the status indicator is installedCopy Function SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUACopy Function SettingsNoYesInitial Status SettingsNoYesColour ModeFull ColourNoYesPaper Tray-NoYesExposure TypeAutoNoYesCopy Ratio1NoYes2-Sided Copy1-Side to 1-SideNoYesOutputVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYes OffsetEnableNoYesCopy Function SettingsNoYesCopy Exposure AdjustmentNoYesColourDocument Glass: 5 (Normal)Document Feeder: 5 (Normal)NoYesBlack &amp; WhiteDocument Glass: 5 (Normal)Document Feeder: 5 (Normal)NoYesRotation Copy SettingRotation copyNoYesAdd or Change Extra Preset Ratios-NoYesSetting a Maximum Number of Copies9999NoYesInitial Margin Shift SettingNoYesSide 110 mm (1/2")NoYesSide 210 mm (1/2")NoYesErase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCard Shot SettingsNoYesOriginal SizeX: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8")NoYesFit to PageDisableNoYesAutomatic Saddle Stitch*EnableNoYesInitial Tab Copy Setting10 mm (1/2")NoYesDisable Registration of ProgramDisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisableNoYesDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisableNoYesAuto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the PaperDisableNoYesDisabling Registration of Custom ImageDisableNoYesDisabling sending while copyingDisableNoYesB/W 600 dpi&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpi Scanning Mode for Document FeederDisableNoYesB/W Quick Scan from Document GlassEnableNoYesAuto Clear Before Copy Job ExecutionDisableNoYesColour AdjustmentsNoYesInitial Colour Balance SettingFactory default stateNoYesAuto Colour Calibration-NoYes* When a saddle finisher installedPrinter SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAPrinter SettingsNoYesDefault SettingsNoYesProhibit Notice Page PrintingEnableNoYesProhibit Test Page PrintingDisableNoYesA4/Letter Size Auto ChangeVaries depending on the machine configurationNoYesPrint Density LevelNoYesColour3 (Normal)NoYesBlack &amp; White3 (Normal)NoYesCMYK Exposure AdjustmentAll 0NoYesBypass Tray Settings*NoYesEnable Detected Paper Size in Bypass TrayDisableNoYesEnable Selected Paper Type in Bypass TrayEnableNoYesExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectDisableNoYesJob Spool QueuingEnableNoYesDisabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisableNoYesDisabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisableNoYesDisabling sending while printingDisableNoYesInterface SettingsNoYesHexadecimal Dump ModeDisableNoYesI/O Timeout60 secondsNoYesEnable USB PortEnableNoYesUSB Port Emulation SwitchingAutoNoYesEnable Network PortEnableNoYesNetwork Port Emulation SwitchingAutoNoYesPort Switching MethodSwitch at End of JobNoYesAuto Colour Calibration-NoYes* When the bypass tray is installedImage Send SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAImage Send SettingsNoYesOperation SettingsNoYesHold settings for a while after scanning has been completedAll InvalidNoYesDefault SettingsNoYesHold address for a while after scanning has been completed.DisableNoYesDefault Display SettingsE-mailNoYesAddress Book Default SelectionNoYesApply Addresses of Sending Modes OnlyEnableNoYesCategory to be Displayed as DefaultNoneNoYesDisplay all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently.DisableNoYesEnlarging the Address BookEnableNoYesImage OrientationPortraitNoYesInitial Resolution SettingNoYesScanApply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, 200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpiNoYesE-mailApply the Resolution Set when Stored: Disabled, 200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpiNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeTextNoYesSharpness3 (Normal)NoYesContrast3 (Normal)NoYesMust Input Next Address Key at Broadcast SettingDisableNoYesScan Complete Sound SettingMiddleNoYesDisable Switching of Display OrderDisableNoYesDefault Verification Stamp*1DisableNoYesErase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesEnable/Disable SettingsNoYesSettings to Disable RegistrationNoYesDisable Registering Destination from Operation PanelAll InvalidNoYesDisable Registering Destination on Web Page*2All InvalidNoYesDisable Registration of ProgramAll InvalidNoYesDisable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*2All InvalidNoYesDisabling of Forwarding via NetworkDisableNoYesSettings to Disable TransmissionNoYesDisable Selection from Address BookAll InvalidNoYesDisable Direct EntryAll InvalidNoYesScan SettingsNoYesScan SettingsNoYesDefault Sender Set-NoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsNoYesScanner Common(No item)AutoNoYes(No item)GreyscaleNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisableNoYesCommon to e-mails(No item)AutoNoYes(No item)GreyscaleNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisableNoYesInitial File Format SettingScanner CommonNoYesFile FormatPDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYes Bk Letter EmphasisDisableNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisableNoYesNumber of Pages1NoYesE-mailNoYesFile FormatPDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisableNoYesNumber of Pages1NoYesCompression Mode at BroadcastingNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMH (G3)NoYesColour/GreyscaleMiddleNoYes Bk Letter EmphasisDisableNoYesMaximum Size of E-mail AttachmentsUnlimitedNoYesMaximum Size of E-mail Attachments (FTP/Network Folder)UnlimitedNoYesBcc SettingNoYesEnable BccDisableNoYesDisplay Bcc Address on the Job Management ScreenDisableNoYesDisable Scan FunctionNoYesPC ScanDisableNoYesDefault Address SettingDisableNoYes*1 When the verification stamp unit is installed*2 When the network connection is enabled *3 This function is not available in some countries and regions. Document Filing SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUADocument Filing SettingsNoYesDefault Mode SettingsSharing ModeNoYesSort Method SettingDateNoYesAdministrator Authority SettingNoYesDelete FileDisableNoYesDelete FolderDisableNoYesChange PasswordDisableNoYesDelete All Quick FilesNoYesDelete Now-NoYesDelete quick files at power upEnableNoYesImage OrientationPortraitNoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeTextNoYesInitial Resolution Settings600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpiNoYesColour Data Compression Ratio SettingMediumNoYesScan Complete Sound SettingMiddleNoYesDefault Output Tray*1Varies depending on the machine configurationNoYesDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintDisableNoYesBatch Print SettingsNoYesSelection of [All Users] is not allowedEnableNoYesSelection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.EnableNoYesErase Width AdjustmentNoYesEdge Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCentre Clearance Width10 mm (1/2")NoYesCard Shot SettingsNoYesOriginal SizeX: 86 mm (3-3/8"), Y: 54 mm (2-1/8")NoYesFit to Store SizeDisableNoYesSetting of store/delete after file printStoreNoYesScan to External Memory Device SettingNoYesDefault Colour Mode SettingsAutoNoYesDisable Change of B/W Setting in Auto ModeDisabledNoYesInitial File Format SettingNoYesFile TypePDFNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: MiddleNoYesEmphasize Black LetterDisabledNoYesSpecified Pages per FileDisableNoYesDefault Exposure SettingsAutoNoYesDefault Original Image TypeAutoNoYesInitial Resolution Settings200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpiNoYesDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceDisableNoYesDefault Setting of PDF Format for PC BrowsingNoYesBlack &amp; WhiteNoYesCompression ModeMMR (G4)NoYesColour/GreyscaleNoYesCompression RatioMiddleNoYesCopyDisableNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisableNoYesPrinterDisableNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisableNoYesScan toDisableNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisableNoYesScan to HDDDisableNoYesApply the resolution at job executionDisableNoYesDocument Output OptionsNoYesPrintNoYesCopyEnableNoYesPrinterEnableNoYesScan SendDisableNoYesScan to HDDEnableNoYesScan SendNoYesCopyDisableNoYesPrinterDisableNoYesScan SendEnableNoYesScan to HDDEnableNoYesAutomatic Deletion of File SettingsAll InvalidNoYes*1 When the exit tray unit is installedList Print (Administrator)U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAList Print (Administrator)NoYesAdministrator Settings List-NoYesImage Sending Activity Report-NoYesData Receive/Forward List-NoYesWeb Settings List*1-NoYesMetadata Set List*2-NoYes*1 When the network is enabled*2 When the application integration module is installedSharp OSA SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUASharp OSA SettingsNoYesExternal Account Setting*1NoYesExternal Account ControlDisableNoYesEnable Authentication by External ServerDisableNoYesUSB Driver Settings*2NoYesExternal KeyboardUse Internal DriverNoYesCard Reader/WriterUse Internal DriverNoYesUSB MemoryUse Internal DriverNoYesLevel of EncryptionNoneNoYesJob Priority Preference-NoYes*1 When an external account module is installed*2 When an external account module or application communication module is installedEnable/Disable SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAEnable / Disable SettingsNoYesPrinter Condition SettingsNoYesDisable Blank Page PrintDisableNoYesUser ControlNoYesDisabling of Printing by Invalid UserDisableNoYesOperation SettingsNoYesCancel Auto Clear TimerDisableNoYesDisabling of Job Priority OperationDisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass PrintingDisableNoYesDisable Auto Key RepeatDisableNoYesDisabling of Clock AdjustmentDisableNoYesDisabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisableNoYesDisable Manual Finishing*1DisableNoYesDevice ControlNoYesDisabling of Document FeederDisableNoYesDisabling of DuplexDisableNoYesDisabling of Large Capacity Cassette*2DisableNoYesDisabling of Tray Settings/Paper SettingsDisableNoYesDisabling of Finisher*3DisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass-TrayDisableNoYesDisabling of Inserter*4DisableNoYesDisabling of OffsetDisableNoYesDisabling of Stapler*3DisableNoYesDisabling of Punch*5DisableNoYesDisabling of Folding Unit*6DisableNoYesDisabling of Trimming Module*7DisableNoYes Disabling of Stacker 1*8DisableNoYes Disabling of Stacker 2*9DisableNoYesDisabling of Colour Mode*10DisableNoYesDisabling of Master Machine ModeDisableNoYesDisabling of Slave Machine ModeDisableNoYesCopy Function SettingsNoYesDisable Registration of ProgramDisableNoYesDisabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisableNoYesDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisableNoYesDisabling Registration of Custom ImageDisableNoYesDisabling sending while copyingDisableNoYesPrinter SettingsNoYesProhibit Notice Page PrintingEnableNoYesProhibit Test Page PrintingDisableNoYesExclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectDisableNoYesDisabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisableNoYesDisabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisableNoYesDisabling sending while printingDisableNoYesImage Send SettingsNoYesDisable Switching of Display OrderDisableNoYesSettings to Disable RegistrationNoYesDisable Registering Destination from Operation PanelDisableNoYesDisable Registering Destination on Web Page*11DisableNoYesDisable Registration of ProgramNoYesDisable All Program Item RegistrationDisableNoYesDisable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search*11DisableNoYesDisabling of Forwarding via Network*11DisableNoYesSettings to Disable TransmissionNoYesDisable [Resend] on Image Send ModeDisableNoYesDisable Selection from Address BookAll InvalidNoYesDisable Direct EntryAll InvalidNoYes Disable Scan FunctionNoYesPC ScanDisableNoYesDocument Filing SettingsNoYesDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintDisableNoYesBatch Print SettingsNoYesSelection of [All Users] is not allowedEnableNoYesSelection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.EnableNoYesDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceDisableNoYesWeb Browser SettingsNoYesDisable URL EntryDisableNoYesDisable Additional Edit of FavouriteDisableNoYesDisable Registration/Edit of Home PageDisableNoYesDisable Print from Web Browse ModeDisableNoYesDisable display of HistoryDisableNoYesSecurity SettingsNoYesHidden Pattern Print SettingNoYesDisable Direct EntryDisableNoYes*1 When the inserter is installed*2 When a large capacity tray is installed*3 When the saddle finisher or the finisher is installed *4 When the inserter is installed*5 When the punch module is installed *6 When the folding unit is installed *7 When the trimming module is installed *8 When the stacker is installed *9 When two stackers are installed*10 When a colour-related problem has occurred*11 When the network connection is enabledDATA BACKUPU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAData BackupNoYesStorage Backup-NoYesDevice Cloning-NoYesAddress Book Forward-NoYesProduct KeyU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAProduct Key*NoYesSerial Number-NoYesBarcode Font Kit-NoYesE-mail Alert and Status-NoYesApplication Integration Module-NoYesApplication Communication Module-NoYesExternal Account Module-NoYesXPS expansion kit-NoYes* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.Storing/Calling of System SettingsU: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAStoring/Calling of System SettingsNoYesRestore Factory Defaults-NoYesStore Current Configuration-NoYesRestore Configuration-NoYesBack to top';
 body[332]='08-008.htm';
dai[332]='NETWORK SETTINGS LIST';
bun[332]='NETWORK SETTINGS LISTNETWORK SETTINGS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUANetwork SettingsQuick SettingsNoYesIPv4 Settings-NoYesIPv6 Settings-NoYesNetwork Name Settings-NoYesDNS Settings-NoYesSMTP Settings-NoYesLDAP Settings-NoYesPublic Folder / NAS Setting-NoYesGeneral SettingsNoYesGeneral SettingsNoYesPrint Status on StartupDisableNoYesNetwork Settings-NoYesReset the NIC-NoYesPROTOCOL SETTINGSNoYesTCP/IPNoYesTCP/IP SettingsNoYesTCP/IPEnableNoYesIPv4 SettingsNoYesDHCP/BOOTPDisableNoYesRARPDisableNoYesIPv6 SettingsNoYesIPv6DisableNoYesDHCPv6EnableNoYesPing CommandNoYesNetWareNoYesNetWare SettingsNoYesNetWareDisableNoYesFrame Type802.2NoYesOperation ModePSERVERNoYesPSERVER SettingsNoYesBindery ModeEnableNoYesRPRINTER Settings-NoYesEtherTalkNoYesEtherTalk SettingsNoYesEtherTalkDisableNoYesNetBIOSNoYesNetBIOS SettingsNoYesNBT/WINSDisableNoYesSERVICE SETTINGSNoYesDNS-NoYesWINS-NoYesSMTP-NoYesSNMP-NoYesKerberos-NoYesSNTP-NoYesmDNS-NoYesPRINT PORT SETTINGSNoYesLPDNoYesLPD SettingsNoYesLPDEnableNoYesTimeout0 secondsNoYesUse BannerDisableNoYesRAWNoYesRaw Print SettingsNoYesRaw PrintEnableNoYesPort Number9100NoYesTimeout90 secondsNoYesUse BidirectionalDisableNoYesWSDNoYesWSD SettingsNoYesWSD PrintEnableNoYesUse Multicast DiscoveryEnableNoYesLDAP SettingsNoYesLDAP SettingsEnableNoYesGlobal Address Books List-NoYesPublic Folder / NAS SettingNoYesPublicUse of StorageAllowedNoYesSharedUse of StorageAllowedNoYesProxy SettingNoYesProxy Server Address-NoYesUser Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesPort Number8080NoYesAddress without Using Proxy-NoYesHTTP Access SettingsNoYesNumber of Users who can Log-in at the Same Time32NoYesAuto Logout Time60NoYesView Login User-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[333]='08-009.htm';
dai[333]='APPLICATION SETTINGS LIST';
bun[333]='APPLICATION SETTINGS LISTAPPLICATION SETTINGS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAApplication SettingsText / Image Printing-YesYesText Settings (Stamp)-YesYesCustom Stamp-YesYesCustom Watermark-YesYesNetwork Scanner Settings-YesYesSubject Name Settings-YesYesFile Name Settings-YesYesMessage Body Settings-YesYesAdministration SettingsNoYesAdvanced SettingsNoYesDisabled Selection of Reply-toDisableNoYesFile Naming-NoYesDefault SubjectScanned image from: (Name)NoYesAdd Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message BodyEnableNoYesAdd a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message BodyDisableNoYesMail Footer Registration-NoYesDocument Administration FunctionNoYesForwarding Destination Settings (Send Data)NoYesForward Send DataDisableNoYesFile FormatTIFF (Multi)NoYesMetadata EntryNoYesMetadata EntryNoYesMetadata DeliveryDisableNoYesMetadata Set List-NoYesExternal Applications SettingsStandard Application Settings-NoYesExternal Accounting Application SettingsNoYesExternal Account ControlDisableNoYesWeb Browser SettingsNoYesHow to handle Cookie?NotifyNoYesDisable URL EntryDisableNoYesDisable Additional Edit of FavouriteDisableNoYesDisable Registration/Edit of Home PageDisableNoYesDisable display of HistoryDisableNoYesUse Proxy ServerDisableNoYesAlways display Proxy Authentication DialogueDisableNoYesUSB Driver SettingsNoYesExternal KeyboardUse Internal DriverNoYesCard Reader/WriterUse Internal DriverNoYesUSB MemoryUse Internal DriverNoYesLevel of EncryptionNoneNoYesE-mail Print SettingsNoYesE-mail Print SettingsNoYesE-MAIL PRINTDisableNoYesPOP3 Server-NoYesPort Number110NoYesPOP AuthenticationDisableNoYesUser Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesCheck Interval5 min.NoYesEnable SSLDisableNoYesConnection Test-NoYesSetting for Print from the MFP (FTP)-NoYesSetting for Print from the MFP (SMB)-NoYesSetting for Print from the PCNoYesFTP PRINTEnableNoYesPort Number21NoYesUse BannerDisableNoYes Back to top ';
 body[334]='08-010.htm';
dai[334]='ENERGY SAVE SETTINGS LIST';
bun[334]='ENERGY SAVE SETTINGS LISTENERGY SAVE SETTINGS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAEnergy SaveNoYesEco SettingNoYesEco Mode SettingFollowing the Power ManagementNoYesEco Scan SettingNoYesEco Scan SettingEnableNoYesHome ScreenDisableNoYesCopyDisableNoYesImage SendNoYesScan SendEnableNoYesMetadata SetEnableNoYesDocument FilingNoYesHDD StoreEnableNoYesScan to Ext.Memory Dev.EnableNoYesPrintEnableNoYesSendEnableNoYesExternal Data AccessEnableNoYesSystem SettingsEnableNoYesSharp OSANoYesWeb Browse*EnableNoYesOthersNoYesManual Finishing*EnableNoYesPower Management SettingDisableNoYesPreheat Mode Setting1 min.NoYesTurn Off the panel display in the Preheat modeEnableNoYesAuto Power Shut-OffEnableNoYesAs soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.EnableNoYes Energy Saving Pattern List-NoYes Sleep Mode Power LevelLow PowerNoYes Specific Date Operation Settings-NoYes Display a Message to Delay the Time of Entry in to Preheat Mode/Auto Power Shut-Off ModeDisableNoYes Toner Save Mode-NoYesPower ON/OFF Schedule Setting-NoYes*When the inserter is installedBack to top ';
 body[335]='08-011.htm';
dai[335]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS LIST';
bun[335]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS LISTE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSStatus Message-NoYesAlerts Message-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[336]='08-012.htm';
dai[336]='JOB LOG LIST';
bun[336]='JOB LOG LISTJOB LOG LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUAJob logJob log Operation-NoYesView Job Log-NoYesBack to top ';
 body[337]='08-013.htm';
dai[337]='SECURITY SETTINGS LIST';
bun[337]='SECURITY SETTINGS LISTSECURITY SETTINGS LISTOverview The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.U: General user; A: System administrator / AdministratorItemFactory default settingUASecurity SettingsChange Password-NoYesPort ControlNoYesServer PortNoYesHTTPEnableNoYesPort Number80NoYesHTTPSEnableNoYesPort Number443NoYesFTP PRINTEnableNoYesPort Number21NoYesRaw PrintEnableNoYesPort Number9100NoYesLPDEnableNoYesPort Number515NoYesIPPEnableNoYesPort Number631NoYesIPP-SSLDisableNoYesPort Number443NoYesTandem Output ReceiveEnableNoYesPort Number50001NoYes PC ScanEnableNoYesPort Number52000NoYesRemote Operation PanelEnableNoYesPort Number5900NoYesSNMPDEnableNoYesTelnetEnableNoYesNBT/WINSDisableNoYesJCPDisableNoYesRARPDisableNoYesSMTPEnableNoYesWSDEnableNoYesUSB-Device Expansion*1EnableNoYesSharp OSA (Extended Platform)NoYesHTTPEnableNoYesPort Number10080NoYesHTTPSEnableNoYesPort Number10443NoYesClient PortNoYesHTTPEnableNoYesHTTPSEnableNoYesFTPEnableNoYesFTPSEnableNoYesSMTPEnableNoYesSMTP-SSLEnableNoYesPOP3EnableNoYesPOP3-SSLEnableNoYesSNMP-TRAPEnableNoYesNotify Job EndEnableNoYesLDAPEnableNoYesLDAP-SSLEnableNoYesSMB/WINSEnableNoYesSNTPDisableNoYesmDNSDisableNoYesTandem Output SendEnableNoYesFilter SettingDisableNoYesIP Address Filter SettingsNoYesFilter ModeAllowedNoYesFilter Addresses 1 to 4NoYesStart IP Address0.0.0.0NoYesEnd IP Address0.0.0.0NoYesMAC Address Filter SettingsNoYesFilter Addresses 1 to 100NoYesSSL SettingsNoYesServer PortNoYesHTTPSEnableNoYesIPP-SSLDisableNoYesRedirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Page AccessDisableNoYesClient PortNoYesHTTPSEnableNoYesFTPSEnableNoYesSMTP-SSLEnableNoYesPOP3-SSLEnableNoYesLDAP-SSLEnableNoYesLevel of EncryptionLowNoYesCertificate Information-NoYesIEEE802.1X SettingNoYesIEEE802.1X AuthenticationDisableNoYesEAP Authentication MethodEAP-TLSNoYesEAP User Name-NoYesPassword-NoYesServer AuthenticationEnableNoYesEAP Timeout10 secondsNoYesNumber of EAP Retries3 timesNoYesCertificate Information-NoYesData Clearance SettingsDisableNoYesRelease Lock on File/Folder Operation-NoYesIPsec Settings&nbsp;NoIPsecDisableNoYesIKEv1 Settings&nbsp;NoPre-Shared Key-NoYesSA Lifetime (time)28800 secondsNoYesSA Lifetime (size)28800 KBNoYesIKE Lifetime30 secondsNoYesIPsec Rules-NoYesHidden Pattern PrintNoYesDefault Settings&nbsp;&nbsp;Hidden Pattern Print SettingStandardNoYesPrint ColourBlackNoYesExposureStandardNoYesFont Size48 pointsNoYesAngle0 deg.NoYesFont StyleStandardNoYesCamouflage PatternPattern 1NoYesPrint MethodPositiveNoYesPrint Contents SettingNoYesPre-Set WordDO NOT COPYNoYesPre-set TextDisableNoYesUnit Serial NumberDisableNoYesAccount Job IDDisableNoYesLogin Name/User NumberDisableNoYesControl No.DisableNoYesDate/TimeDisableNoYesDisable Direct EntryDisableNoYesContrastNoYesBlack5NoYesMagenta5NoYesCyan5NoYes Yellow5NoYesCustom Text Registration-NoYesTracking Information Print-NoYesTracking Information Print SettingDisableNoYesPrint InformationNoYesUnit Serial NumberEnableNoYesTextDisableNoYesAccount Job IDEnableNoYesLogin Name/User NumberEnableNoYesDate/TimeEnableNoYesSelect the Print ColourBlackNoYesPrint PositionNoYesVertical PositionNoYesPrint Upper Side of PaperDisableNoYesPrint Lower Side of PaperEnableNoYesHorizontal positionNoYesPrint Left Side of PaperEnableNoYesPrint Right Side of PaperDisableNoYesSelect the Job to PrintNoYesCopyEnableNoYesPRINTEREnableNoYesPrints (Document Filing)EnableNoYesList PrintEnableNoYesInitialize Private Data/Data in Machine-NoYes*1&nbsp; Displayed when the application communication module or external account module product key is enabled*2&nbsp; Displayed when the network scanning function is enabledBack to top ';
 body[338]='08-014.htm';
dai[338]='TOP PAGE';
bun[338]='TOP PAGETOP PAGETop Page The top page displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location.ItemDescription[Update] keyUpdates the information displayed.Unit Serial NumberIndicates the serial number of the machine.NameIf you have logged in as an administrator, you can enter the name. If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the Machine Identification screen appears.Model NameDisplays the standard model name of the machine.Machine LocationIf you have logged in as an administrator, you can enter the machine location.If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the Machine Identification screen appears.Current StatusDisplays the current status of the machine. If two or more errors occur at the same time, only one status is displayed according to the priority order. The errors are displayed in the following priority order.Printer ErrorAccount LimitIncorrect PaperOverdue Service MaintenancePaper JamMarker Supply MissingToner EmptyReplace Used Toner Container.Cover OpenPaper EmptyInput Tray EmptySpecified Input Tray OpenSpecified Output Tray FullOfflinePrinter WarningToner LowPaper LowInput Tray OpenOutput Tray FullOutput Tray Nearly FullNear to overdue service maintenanceOnlineAuto Power Shut-OffWarming UpBUSYMemoDisplays text that the administrator entered. If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the Machine Identification screen appears.Device StatusGraphically displays the current status of the machine.[Reboot the MFP] keyDisplays the restart screen.[Enter the Power Save Mode] keyDisplays the power save mode screen.Machine Identification Screen If you have logged in as an administrator, you can enter the following items on the Machine Identification screen. The entered information are reflected on the top page screen.ItemDescriptionNameEnter the model name and other information of the machine.Machine CodeEnter the machine code of the machine.Machine LocationEnter the name of the place where the machine is installed (e.g., section name).MemoEnter the contact or other information of the administrator.Back to top ';
 body[339]='08-015.htm';
dai[339]='DEVICE STATUS';
bun[339]='DEVICE STATUSDEVICE STATUSDevice Status This screen shows the device status.ItemDescription[Update] buttonUpdates the information displayed.[Back] buttonReturns to the top page.Paper Input Tray StatusDisplays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine.Output Tray StatusDisplays the current status of the output tray installed in the machine.Supply StatusDisplays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed.Device ConfigurationDisplays the information of options installed in the machine.HDD StatusDisplays the usage status of the hard disk drive.Back to top ';
 body[340]='08-016.htm';
dai[340]='NETWORK STATUS';
bun[340]='NETWORK STATUSNETWORK STATUSNetwork Status The Network Status screen shows the general status information and the statuses relevant to, TCP/IP, NetWare, EtherTalk, and NetBIOS protocols.ItemDescriptionGeneralDisplays the information common to the network.Link Status: Displays the data transfer rate of the NIC and cable information.Duplex Mode: Displays the duplex mode of the NIC.Hardware Address: Displays the MAC address of the NIC.Print Status on Startup: Displays whether or not status is printed upon startup.Device Name: Displays the device name.Domain Name: Displays the domain name.TCP/IPDisplays the current status of the TCP/IP protocol.IPv4 Settings: Displays the IPv4 protocol settings.DHCP/BOOTP: Selects whether or not the IP address is obtained from the DHCP/BOOTP server.RARP: Displays the status of the RARP protocol.IPv4 Address: Displays the IPv4 address.Subnet Mask: Displays the current subnet mask.Default Gateway: Displays the current default gateway.IPv6 Settings: Displays the IPv6 status.DHCPv6: Displays the status of the DHCPv6 server.Manual Address: Displays the IPv6 address that has been manually specified.Default Gateway: Displays the current default gateway.Link-Local Address: Displays the link-local address.Stateless Address 1: Displays the stateless address.Stateless Address 2: Displays the stateless address.Stateful Address: Displays the stateful address.DNSDisplays the status of the DNS server.Primary Server: Displays the current IP address of the primary DNS server.Secondary Server: Displays the current IP address of the secondary DNS server.Domain Name: Displays the current domain name of the DNS server.WINSDisplays the status of the WINS server.Primary Server: Displays the current IP address of the primary WINS server.Secondary Server: Displays the current IP address of the secondary WINS server.Primary Server (DHCP): Displays the current IP address of the primary WINS server (DHCP).Secondary Server (DHCP): Displays the current IP address of the secondary WINS server (DHCP).Scope ID: Displays the current WINS scope ID.Scope ID (DHCP): Displays the current WINS scope ID (DHCP).NetWare StatusDisplays the NetWare status.NetWare: Displays the status of the NetWare protocol.Frame Type: Displays the frame type.Network Number: Displays the network number.Operation Mode: Displays the operation mode.PSERVER Name: Displays the print server name.NDS Tree: Displays the NDS tree name.NDS Context: Displays the NDS context.EtherTalk StatusDisplays the EtherTalk status.EtherTalk: Displays the status of the EtherTalk protocol.Zone Name: Displays the zone name.Type Name: Displays the type name.Object Name: Displays the object name.NetBIOS StatusDisplays the NetBIOS status.NBT/WINS: Displays NBT/WINS protocol status.Master Browser: Displays the Master Browser.Back to top ';
 body[341]='08-017.htm';
dai[341]='POWER RESET';
bun[341]='POWER RESETPOWER RESETPower ResetIn this screen, you can reboot the machine or shift the machine to Auto Power Shut-Off mode.ItemDescriptionReboot the MFPRestarts the machine. When you tap the [Execute] key, the Restart screen appears. When you tap the [Execute] key again, the machine will restart.Enter the Power Save ModeShifts the machine to power save mode. When you tap the [Execute] key, the Power Save Mode screen appears. When you tap the [Execute] key again, the machine will switch to the Auto Power Shut-Off mode. In some environments, the machine cannot be restarted or shifted to Auto Power Shut-Off mode.Back to top';
 body[342]='08-018.htm';
dai[342]='CATEGORY SETTING';
bun[342]='CATEGORY SETTINGCATEGORY SETTINGCategory Setting A category can be renamed for greater ease of use. Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters). The factory default names are &quot;Category 1&quot; to &quot;Category 32&quot;.Back to top ';
 body[343]='08-019.htm';
dai[343]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[343]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKGLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKGlobal Address Book This screen display the &quot;Global Address Books List&quot;. When you tap the &quot;Global Address Books List&quot; name, the Global Address Book setting screen appears.Global Address Book setting screenYou can configure the following items for the selected Global Address Book.ItemDescriptionNameChange the name.Applicable Destination TypeSelect the applicable destination type from E-mail Address. Allow selection on operation panelSpecify whether or not to enable the global address to be selected on the operation panel of the machine.To Be Used as DefaultSpecify whether or not to use the selected global address as default.Authenticate a User in Global Address SearchSelect whether or not to authenticate a user when a global address is searched for.Back to top ';
 body[344]='08-019_01.htm';
dai[344]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[344]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKDOCUMENT FILINGData saved by Document Filing can be manipulated from the Web.Quick File Folder Files in the Quick File Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete].ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleSaved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Main Folder The files that are in the Main Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleSaved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Custom Folder The files that are in the Custom Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionIndexThe displayed Custom Folder names can be filtered by index.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Search A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “Password of File”.ItemDescriptionUser NameEnter the user name (maximum of 32 characters).Select from User ListClick the [Setup] button and search for users from the list.Login NameEnter the login name (maximum of 30 characters).Search FolderSet the folder.File NameEnter the file name (maximum of 30 characters).Password of FileEnter the password that is set for the file (1 to 32 digits).Stored DateSet the date and time the file was saved.Search ResultDisplay the results of the data search.ItemDescriptionDisplay StyleThe files that were found can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format.Job ClassificationThe found files can be filtered by job.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.File Batch PrintMultiple files can be printed at once by batch printing. Search for the files using search conditions, and then select multiple files from the displayed search results.If you want to use the number of copies set when each file was saved by Document Filing, select “Apply the Number of Copies Stored in Each File”. If you want to set a different number of copies, enter the desired number in “Enter the Number”. Click [PrItemDescriptionSearch ConditionUser NameEnter the user name (maximum of 32 characters).Select from User ListClick the [Setup] button and search for users from the list.Login NameEnter the login name (maximum of 30 characters).Password of FileEnter the password that is set for the file (1 to 32 digits).Search ResultJob ClassificationThe found files can be filtered by job.Back to top ';
 body[345]='08-019_02.htm';
dai[345]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[345]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKSUBMIT PRINT JOBYou can print a file on your computer. The machine can print following file types:PDF(V1.6)(*) with file extensions pdf. TIFF with file extensions tif and tiff. JPEG with file extensions jpeg, jpg, jpe and jfif. PCL with file extensions pcl. PS(*) with file exte(*) Available only if the MFP supports PostScript.(**) Available only if the XPS expansion kit is installed.Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files described above.Enter the password for the encrypted PDF data on Spool Queue of the Job Management screenPrint Settings Select print settings. Select the file you want to print in “Select File”, select settings, and then click [Print].ItemDescriptionNumber of PrintsSet the number of copies to be printed.Paper SizeSet the print size. OrientationSelect portrait or landscape for the print orientation. 2-Sided PrintSelect one-sided printing, two-sided printing (booklet), or two-sided printing (tablet). OutputIf printing by set, select the “Print per Unit” checkbox. Separator PageSelect settings for the separator page insertion position and paper tray. StapleSelect staple settings. PunchSelect the punch settings. Trimmer SettingSelect the trimmer settings. Print B/WPrint the file in black &amp; white. Fit To PagePrint with the file expanded to the full paper size. Output TraySelect the output tray for the print job. Quick FileSave the print data in the Quick File Folder of the machine. Print GlossySelect this checkbox if the print job will be printed on glossy paper.Back to top ';
 body[346]='08-019_03.htm';
dai[346]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK';
bun[346]='GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOKFILING DATA BACKUPYou can back up a file saved with Document Filing, and restore a backed up file to the machine.Export SettingsSelect the folder you want to back up and click [Execute]. The files are saved to your computer.ItemDescriptionIndexThe displayed Folder names can be filtered by index.Display ItemsSet the number of files that are displayed.Import SettingsYou can restore a file to the machine that was saved with “Export Settings”. Enter a maximum of 200 characters for the path of the saved file in “Import settings from file”, and click [Execute].Back to top ';
 body[347]='08-020.htm';
dai[347]='USER LIST';
bun[347]='USER LISTUSER LISTUser ListThis screen displays the Default User List and User List.From the User List, you can narrow the display by alphabet or user index by selecting the [Index] list and can select a number of users to be displayed at a time using the [Display Items].DEFAULT USER LIST The following users are stored in the machine at the factory.Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default.System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This account cannot execute jobs.User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.)Vender: The account used when a coin is fed into the new coin vender.Vender2: The account used when a coin is fed into the old coin vender.Device Account: An account to which the colour prohibited authority is granted.Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.)For settings related to each of the users, see the following table.User NameAdministratorSystem AdministratorUserDevice AccountVenderVender2Other UserLogin Nameadminsysadminuserdevice accountVenderVender2OtherPassword(See &quot;Quick Start Guide.&quot;)*1sysadmin*1users*1deviceaccount*1-My FolderNoneMain folderNoneMain folderNoneAuthentication SettingsLogin Locally-Pages Limit GroupUnlimited*1Authority Group*2AdminSystem Administrator*1User*1Colour Prohibited Authority*1User*1Guest*1Favourite Operation GroupFollowing the System Settings*1*1 Items that can be changed*2 For detailed information about each of the settings, see &quot;List of settings and factory default settings of template groups&quot; The [Vender] and [Vender2] options are displayed only when the vender is connected.Adding or editing a userWhen you tap the [Add] key, the user registration screen appears. Up to 1000 network folders can be registered.When a user name is tapped, the registration screen of this user appears and you can edit its settings.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionUser NameStore a user name consisting of up to 255 characters. This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. (The user name must be unique.)Apply User Name to Log-in Name*1Select this to enter the entered user name in the login name.InitialThis determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Enter a maximum of 10 characters for the initials.IndexSelect a custom index to be stored. The custom index names are the same as those used in the address book.User Number*2Enter a user number using 5 to 8 digits.Login Name*1Enter the login name that is used when authentication by login name and password is enabled (up to 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.)Password*1, 3Enter the password, consisting of 1 to 255 characters, that is used for user authentication by login name and password. (the password is optional)E-mail AddressEnter the e-mail address that is used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (up to 255 characters). Home Directory PathEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the home directory path.Use Login Name And Password at User Authentication.Set whether the login name / password for user authentication is used for the user name / password for home directory path authentication.User NameEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication.PasswordEnter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home directory path authentication.My FolderStore a folder to be used for document filing as the dedicate user folder (or My folder). A stored folder can be selected, or you can create and specify a new folder.Authentication Settings*1Select either [Login Locally] or [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) for authentication.Organization/GroupSet a group to which the user belongs.Up to 8 groups can be assigned.Authentication ServerWhen the [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user authentication from the LDAP server list that is stored using Setting mode (Web version).Pages Limit GroupSpecify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory default setting is [Unlimited].For more information, see &quot;PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST&quot;.Authority GroupSpecify the user authority by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory default setting is [User].For more information, see &quot;AUTHORITY GROUP LIST&quot;.Favourite Operation GroupDisplays the operation group that is applied upon login. The factory default setting is [Following the System Settings].To change the settings, select [User Control] in Setting mode (Web version). (Administrator rights are required.)*1 It is not displayed when &quot;User Number&quot; is selected for the authentication method.*2 It is displayed only when &quot;User Number&quot; is selected for the authentication method.*3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used.Deleting a userSet the checkbox to at the left of the user name and tap the [Delete] key, and the selected user is deleted.Tapping the [Delete All Users] key deletes all registered users. (Excluding users stored as factory default.) Only the administrator of the machine can use this function.Tapping the [Delete All Auto-registered users] key deletes all auto-registered users.For information about auto-registration users, see &quot;AUTO-REGISTERED USERS&quot;. If the login authentication in device account mode is set, the &quot;Delete All Users&quot; option cannot be used.Custom Index Tapping "Custom Index" from the left menu display the custom index screen.You can change a custom index name by tapping the name.Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name (up to 127 characters).The factory default names are &quot;User 1&quot; to &quot;User 32&quot;.Back to top ';
 body[348]='08-021.htm';
dai[348]='DEFAULT SETTINGS';
bun[348]='DEFAULT SETTINGSDEFAULT SETTINGSDefault Settings You can change the default settings.User Authentication This setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method.When the user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, the separate authentication settings apply to the user. This function allows greater control of security and cost management than that on previous machinEven if user information is not stored in the machine, you can directly enter the user information stored in an LDAP server to log in to the machine if necessary. In this case, the authentication information of the &quot;User&quot; being stored as factoryFor user registration procedure, see &quot;ADDING OR EDITING A USER&quot;.For the user authentication setup, see &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER&quot; or &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD&quot;.User AuthenticationIf [User Authentication] is enabled, the authentication screen appears before an operation is carried out in any mode except for the job management screen*.Log in as an already registered user.After logging in, you can move freely through the modes.* The login screen appears when a document filing file is used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted from the job management screen.Authentication Method SettingThis selects the authentication method. When using user authentication, be sure to configure this setting first. The items to be configured for users stored after setting the user authentication method vary depending on the selected authentication method.ItemDescriptionAuthenticate a User by Login Name and PasswordStandard authentication method using a login name and password.Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and E-mail AddressThis authentication also checks the e-mail address, in addition to the login name and password of the user.Authenticate a User by User Number OnlyUse this option for simple authentication if you skip the network authentication.The login screen will vary depending on the authentication method that is selected.For details, see &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER&quot; or &quot;AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD&quot;.When &quot;Authenticate a User by User Number Only&quot; is selected for the authentication method, network authentication cannot be used.Device Account Mode SettingA specific user can be registered as an auto login user. When this option is enabled, the registered user can log in to the machine automatically.This function can eliminate each login procedure on the authentication screen and apply the selected user settings (such as network authentication and favourite operations). As an example, this enables uses such as &quot;authentication for colour copyingAlso, you can temporarily log in as a user other than the auto login user, and operate the machine with the privileges of this user. To allow other users to log in temporarily when [Device Account Mode] is enabled, select [Allow Login by Different User]. To log in as a user other than a fixed user when [Allow Login by Different User] is enabled, tap the [Logout] key to cancel the fixed user login state. When the user authentication screen appears, log in as the desired user again. After you have used the If you have logged in as the Auto Login user, and if you have failed automatic login due to some reasons or if you do not have the administrator\'s privileges, you cannot use the general setting modes or Setting mode. In that case, the administrator shoulActions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs This setting determines whether or not a job will be completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in progress.The following settings can be configured.Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is ReachedJob is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is ReachedJob is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached and the Receiving Job is DeletedA Warning when Login Fails If a login fails three times in succession, a warning is displayed and further login is disabled for five minutes. This prevents an unauthorised person from attempting to guess a password. (The number of failed login attempts is retained even if the powe Locking of the operation panel for five minutes can be cancelled by selecting [User Control] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Default Settings] → [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel].Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Printing by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode (Web version), can be prohibited. When a print job is executed by a user who is not registered in the machine, the &quot;Other User&quot; registered as factory default is used as the login user.For more information, see &quot;DEFAULT USER LIST&quot;.Automatically print stored jobs after login When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in.Default Network Authentication Server Setting Use this to set the default network authentication server.When you log into Setting mode (Web version) or send a print job to the machine using user information that is not registered in the machine, the authentication server is not known. This setting is used to select one of the LDAP servers registered in the When login is performed by network authentication using user information that is not registered in the machine, the login user will be the &quot;User&quot; registered as factory default. For more information, see &quot;DEFAULT USER LIST&quot;.Perform LDAP Server Access Control Register the access control information for page count limits, authorities, and favourite operations can be registered on an LDAP server in advance. By using this LDAP server for network authentication, perform the user authentication based on the registUse this function when user authentication is performed by network authentication using an LDAP server or a directory service (Active Directory, etc.).Before using this function, configure settings for authentication by LDAP server, obtain control numbers for the &quot;Pages Limit Group&quot;, &quot;Authority Group&quot;, &quot;Favourite Operation Group&quot;, and &quot;My Folder&quot; (including base sTo use this function, add the properties associated with &quot;Pages Limit Group&quot;, &quot;Authority Group&quot;, &quot;Favourite Operation Group&quot;, and &quot;My Folder&quot; to the directory information of the LDAP server used for user authenticatThe property information is indicated below. Settings previously stored in the machine cannot be changed.PropertyName of property in factory default stateSettingPages Limit GrouppagelimitA registration number of the storing page limit group which has been stored in the machine.Or a group name already stored in the machine.Unlimited: unlimitedAuthority GroupauthorityA registration number of the authority group which has been stored in the machine.Or a group name already stored in the machine.Admin: adminUser: userGuest: guestFavourite Operation GroupfavouriteA registration number of the favourite operation group which has been stored in the machine.Or a group name already stored in the machine.Following the System Settings: systemsettingsMy FoldermyfolderFolder name of user folder stored in the machine.Do not enter if the default folder is specified. Rename the properties that the machine obtains from the LDAP server as follows. In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [Network Settings] → [LDAP Settings]. From the Global Address Book setting screen, select [Linkage with User Control FunctThe [Pages Limit Group], [Authority Group], and [Favourite Operation Group] information that is registered in each machine determines the authority and settings that the user is actually granted. To use this function to ensure that users are granted the sFor [My Folder], register the folder that has the same name in [Custom Folder] in each machine.The directory information of the LDAP server that is used cannot be changed from the machine. Consult the administrator of the LDAP server.Auto-registered usersWhen access control is enabled and login is performed by network authentication, the user information in the LDAP server is automatically registered in the machine.The information stored is as follows:ItemDescriptionUser NameInformation is acquired from the LDAP server.*Initial1IndexUser 1Password-Authentication Settings-Authentication ServerNetwork AuthenticationE-mail AddressInformation is acquired from the LDAP server.My FolderPages Limit GroupAuthority GroupFavourite Operation Group*If the user name cannot be acquired, the first 16 characters of the text string entered as the user name for network authentication is used. If the login name is different but the user name received from the LDAP server is the same, or if the user name is already registered in the machine, &quot;Cannot login because the user name entered has been previously registered&quot; will appear and itIf automatic registration by LDAP authentication is attempted when 1,000 users are already registered, the following message will appear and it will not be possible to log in: &quot;Maximum entries for User Name is 1,000. Old or unused user names will beIf a user that is registered in the machine is authenticated by network authentication, the user registration settings in the machine will be given priority for the page count limit group, authority group, favourite operations group, and my folder.If the access control obtained from the LDAP server is not registered in the machine, the factory default user authority will be applied.When this function is not enabled and a user is authenticated by network authentication as a non-registered user, the factory default user authority will be applied. If access control information cannot be obtained from the LDAP server used for authentication, user authentication will not be possible.Display Usage Status after Login When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to display the page counts of a user when the user logs in.Login Name Display When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to display the login name.Include Job Management in user authentication When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to include the job management in user authentication.Automatic Logout Setting When user authentication is enabled, this setting specifies whether or not to enable automatic logout.The time until logout can be specified up to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds.Edit Help Display of Login Screen Settings you have created here is displayed in the login screen.User Information Print Prints the following item lists.User ListList of Number of Pages UsedPage Limit Group List*Authority Group ListFavourite Operation Group List*All User Information PrintSelect each item and tap the [Print] key to print it out.* Cannot be printed when no groups are stored.In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [List Prints].In All User Information Print, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis.User ListList of Number of Pages UsedPage Limit Group ListFAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LISTReset Counter After Sending E-mail Status After Status Message has been sent, the counter is reset.Back to top ';
 body[349]='08-022.htm';
dai[349]='ORGANIZATION / GROUP LIST';
bun[349]='ORGANIZATION / GROUP LISTORGANIZATION / GROUP LISTOrganization /Group List This is used to store user groups. Tap each group name to enter them directly.Back to top ';
 body[350]='08-023.htm';
dai[350]='PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST';
bun[350]='PAGE LIMIT GROUP LISTPAGE LIMIT GROUP LISTPage Limit Group List This is used to register the page limit settings in advance for each group. When you register a user, you can set a page limit for the user by selecting one of these registered groups.Add or edit a groupWhen you tap the [Add] key, the group registration screen appears. Up to 20 network folders can be registered. When a user name is tapped, the registration screen of this user appears and you can edit its settings.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionGroup NumberEnter a Page Limit Group number within the range of 1 to 20.Group NameStore a name of group (up to 32 characters).Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.Function NamesThe name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function.Page LimitIf [Prohibited] is selected for a model, an input or output to/from the mode is prohibited. If [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, the number of pages is not limited that can be input or output in that mode. If [Limited] is selected, you can enter a pageReturn a group to &quot;Unlimited&quot;To return the Page Limit of a group to &quot;Unlimited&quot;, set the checkbox to at the left of the group name and tap the [Return to the Defaults] key.Back to top ';
 body[351]='08-024.htm';
dai[351]='MACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTING';
bun[351]='MACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTINGMACHINE PAGE LIMIT SETTINGMachine Page Limit Setting Sets the page limit for the machine.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionFunction NamesThe name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function.Page LimitIf [Prohibit] is selected for a mode, an input or output to/from the mode is prohibited. If [Unlimited] is selected, the number of pages is not limited that can be input or output in that mode. If [Limited] is selected, you can enter a page limit within tBack to top ';
 body[352]='08-025.htm';
dai[352]='AUTHORITY GROUP LIST';
bun[352]='AUTHORITY GROUP LISTAUTHORITY GROUP LISTAuthority Group List This is used to store the settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. When you register a user, you can set an authority group for the user by selecting one of these authority groups.Add or edit an Authority GroupWhen you tap the [Add] key, the authority group registration screen appears. Up to 20 network folders can be registered.When a group name is tapped, the registration screen of this group appears and you can edit its settings.List of settings and factory default settings of template groupsItemDescriptionGroup NameStore a name of group (up to 32 characters).Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.The factory default groups and their settings are shown below.&nbsp;AdminSystem Administrator AuthorityUserGuestCopyColour Mode Approval SettingAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedUsing OthersAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedUtilize sending function at copyAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedPRINTERColour Mode Approval SettingAllowedAll prohibitedAllowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedFTP Pull PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedUSB Memory Direct PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedNetwork Folder Pull PrintAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedSending while printingAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedToner Save Mode Usage Approval Setting*1No Toner SavingNo Toner SavingNo Toner SavingNo Toner SavingPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedImage SendApproval Settings for Each ModeE-mailFTPNetwork FolderAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedAll allowedColour ScanAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedUsing OthersAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedProgram RegistrationAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedApproval Setting for AddressingApproval Setting for Direct EntryApproval Setting to Use a Local Address BookApproval Settings to Use a Global Address BookAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedAll allowedDocument FilingScan to HDDColour Mode Approval SettingAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedUsing OthersAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedPDF Creation for PC BrowsingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedScan to Ext.Memory Dev.Colour Mode Approval SettingAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedUsing OthersAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedPrints (Document Filing)Colour Mode Approval SettingAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedOnly Black &amp; White AllowedUsing OthersAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedDocument Filing Image CheckAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedDisplay only the Files of Logged-in UsersProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedSharp OSASharp OSA Approval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedWeb BrowsingWeb Browsing Approval SettingAllowedProhibitedAllowedAllowedCommon FunctionsApproval Settings for 2-Sided Print[1-Sided/2-Sided Approved][1-Sided/2-Sided Approved][1-Sided/2-Sided Approved][1-Sided/2-Sided Approved]Output Approval SettingsAll allowedAll prohibitedAll allowedAll prohibitedSecurityPrint Jobs Other than Print Hold JobAllowedAllowedAllowedAllowedFile Saving: Quick File/Sharing ModeProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedProhibitedFile Saving: Confidential ModeAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedPattern Print Input - Direct EntryAllowedProhibitedAllowedProhibitedSYSTEM SETTINGSSYSTEM SETTINGSSystem Settings*2Allowed*3Allowed*3Only user authority settings are allowedAll settings prohibitedWeb SettingsDisplay of Device/Network StatusAllowedAllowedAllowedProhibitedPower ResetProhibitedMachine IdentificationProhibitedApplication Settings(Except for Pre-set Text, Forwarding / Storing Table)ProhibitedRegistration of Pre-set Text/Forward TableAllowedE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSProhibitedJob logsProhibitedPort Control/Filter SettingsProhibitedCustom Link SettingProhibitedOperation Manual DownloadAllowed*1&nbsp; This function is not available in some countries and regions.*2&nbsp; For information on each setting, see the setting mode list.*3&nbsp; All allowed except for Change Administrator Password. Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.Return the Authority Group to factory defaultsTo return an authority group to factory defaults, set the checkbox at the left of &quot;No.&quot; to . From the &quot;Return to the Defaults&quot; list, select [Return to the Administrator Authority], [Return to the System Administrator Authority], [ReturTap the [Execute] key, and the group status is returned to the factory default.Back to top ';
 body[353]='08-026.htm';
dai[353]='FAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LIST';
bun[353]='FAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LISTFAVOURITE OPERATION GROUP LISTFavourite Operation Group List The preferred operation environment can be set for each group. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by registering the language in a favouritDepending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.Add or edit a groupWhen you tap the [Add] key, the favourite operation group registration screen appears. Also, you can tap a group name and call the registration screen of this favourite operation group, and edit its settings.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionGroup NameStore a name of group (up to 32 characters).Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied.CopyInitial Status SettingsSelect settings for Colour Mode, Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, 2-Sided, Output, Offset, Separator Page, Output Tray, and Staple Position.Image SendInitial Status SettingsSelect settings for Image Orientation, Exposure, Resolution, Colour Mode, File Format, and Original Image Type. Select settings for Specified Pages per File.Document FilingInitial Status SettingsSelect settings for Colour Mode, Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution.Scan to Ext.Memory Dev.: Initial Status SettingsSelect settings for Colour Mode, File Format, Specified Pages per File, Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution.Prints (Document Filing)Set the default output tray for document filing print.SYSTEM SETTINGSLarge Character ModeTurn this option ON to display large characters on the Setting mode screen.Original Size Detector SettingSelect whether AB sizes or inch sizes are detected, or disable detection on the document glass.Display Language SettingSelect the display language. Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job ManagementSelect whether to display the number of progress sets or remaining sets as the job management.Key Operation SettingSet the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting.Long-touch Detection TimeSelect a time when a long key touch is detected.Double Tap Interval SettingSelect an interval when a double tap is detected.Keys Touch SoundSet the sound made when keys are touched.Keyboard SelectSet the language that appears on the keyboard.MFP Display Pattern SettingSelect the colour pattern used in the touch panel.Automatically print stored jobs after loginWhen retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in.Customize Key SettingSelect to use System Settings or use the registered customized key settings for performing Customize Key Setting.Home Screen SettingsSelect to use System Settings or use the stored home screen settings for performing Home Screen Settings.Preview SettingDefault List/Thumbnail DisplaySelect the default preview settings.File Retrieve of Document FilingSelect the default display for document filing.Return the Favourite Operation Group to &quot;Unlimited&quot;To return the selected Favourite Operation Group to the factory defaults, set the checkbox to at the left of the &quot;No.&quot; indication and tap the [Return to the Defaults] key.Customized Key List Assign shortcut keys to frequently used functions. They will be displayed in the base screen of each mode. Select a list and tap the [Return to the Factory Default Setting] key, and the current settings are returned to the factory default.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionKey NameEnter a name for the customized key (maximum of 20 characters).Function Menu/Program/OthersSelect the function that you wish to assign to the key. The functions that can be selected vary by mode.HideIf this item is enabled, the customized keys are not displayed. It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.Home Screen List Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionRename Home ScreenEnter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name.Select the Group Name to be the Registration ModelSelect one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied.TemplateA template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the selected template can be reviewed.Key Layout of the ScreenThe layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.Home buttonRegisters the function to use for the selected key number.Fixed buttonRegisters the function to use for the selected key number. This button is displayed on all pages of the home screen.TemplateSelect a layout pattern of the registered key.Rename Home ScreenEnter a home screen name to change the existing name.Text ColourSelect a text colour.Icon StyleSelect a shape and a colour of each button from the default designs.Back to top ';
 body[354]='08-027.htm';
dai[354]='USER COUNT';
bun[354]='USER COUNTUSER COUNTDisplaying User CountThis displays the total number of pages printed by each user. The count display in each mode, and the display count type can also be selected. From the User List, you can narrow the display by alphabet or user index by selecting the [Index] list and can sView user count Set the checkbox to at the left of the user name and tap the [Show] key, and the user count list is displayed.You can narrow the display items by selecting a mode name and a peripheral device from the [Select Function].You can narrow the count type using the [Selection Count Number to be Displayed].List of Display ItemsItemDescriptionNextDisplays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).PreviousDisplays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).Show CountsDisplays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function.Page LimitThe page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count. If peripheral devices are not mounted, their count is not displayed.Resetting user countsReset all counts.To reset all count of the selected user, set the checkbox to at the left of the user name and tap the [Clear Count] key.Reset count of each itemTo reset the selected count, display the user count, set the checkbox of each count display to , and tap the [Clear Count] key.ItemDescriptionNext (displayed only when a single user is selected)Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).Previous (displayed only when a single user is selected)Displays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).Show CountsDisplays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function.Clear CountReset the count of the selected item to zero (0).Clear All CountClears all counts of the selected user to zero (0).Back to top ';
 body[355]='08-028.htm';
dai[355]='CARD AREA SETTING';
bun[355]='CARD AREA SETTINGCARD AREA SETTINGCard Area Setting The data check during card reading can be set.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescription Import from Configuration fileWhen you enter the configuration file name and tap the [Execute] key, the card area settings are read from the configuration file. If you tap the [Clear] key, all files that match the current search conditions are deleted.Check Facility Code in HID ModeChecks the facility code of a HID card.Facility CodeEnters the facility code of a HID card. When you tap the [Store] key, the facility code is stored.Card Scan TestWhen you tap the [Execute] key, the card reader test starts and the test result is displayed.Back to top ';
 body[356]='08-029.htm';
dai[356]='CARD TYPE / CARD READER SETTINGS';
bun[356]='CARD TYPE / CARD READER SETTINGSCARD TYPE / CARD READER SETTINGSCard Type / Card Reader Settings Use these settings for authentication and for use of a Felica, HID or other IC card.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionCard Type/Card ReaderEnter the card type and card reader information. Use IC Card for AuthenticationUse these settings for authentication and for use of a Felica, HID or other IC card.Card Reader Device RegistrationIn this setting, the product ID and vender ID of the connected HID card reader are displayed. To store the HID card reader, touch the [Read] key.* For settings that enable an HID card to be used, consult your service representative.Back to top';
 body[357]='08-030.htm';
dai[357]='TOTAL COUNT';
bun[357]='TOTAL COUNTTOTAL COUNTTotal Count This function shows the page count in each mode.Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the &quot;Others&quot; count.The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.Before printing the number of pages used, select [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Device Control] → [List Prints].Among the All Sending Address Lists, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis.Individual ListGroup ListBack to top';
 body[358]='08-031.htm';
dai[358]='DEFAULT SETTINGS';
bun[358]='DEFAULT SETTINGSEurope* Australia, New ZealandDEFAULT SETTINGSOther countriesDefault Settings This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine.Clock AdjustUse this to set the date and time in the machine\'s built-in clock.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionSpecify Time ZoneIf your region is ahead of GMT (Greenwich Mean Time), select [+]. If your region is behind GMT, select [-]. Next, specify the time difference between your region and GMT in hours and minutes. (Example: If your region is Japan, + 9 hours 00 minutes.)Date&amp;Time SettingsSelect and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.Synchronize with Internet Time ServerThis can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet. The machine\'s time is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet time server. If [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Operation Settings] → [Disabling Clock Adjustment] are selected, you cannot change the date and time.Daylight Saving Time Setting Enable daylight saving time.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionDaylight Saving Time SettingSelect whether or not the Daylight Saving Time Setting is enabled. If disabled, the following settings will not be possible.Select Setting TypeSpecify whether the starting and ending day of daylight saving time are to be set using the day of the week or the date.Start TimeSet the starting time of daylight saving time. If you selected &quot;Day of the Week&quot; in &quot;Select Setting Type&quot;, set the starting week of daylight saving time and then the starting day. If you selected &quot;Date&quot; in &quot;Select SettinCompleting TimeSet the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting time.Adjustment TimeSet the time to be adjusted when daylight saving time begins.When this function is used, the time changes at the beginning and end of daylight saving time as indicated in the table below. AreaStandard time → Daylightsaving time Daylight saving time → Standard time Last Sunday in March, 1:00 to 2:00 AMLast Sunday in October, 1:00 to 0:00 AM Last Sunday in October, 2:00 to 3:00 AMLast Sunday in March 3:00 to 2:00 AM Select the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. The clock setting is configured to normal time plus one hour. When the is selected, clock returns tonormal time.* In some countries, the starting and ending times of daylight saving time may be different thanthe times set in the machine. If [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Operation Settings] → [Disabling Clock Adjustment] are selected, you cannot change the date and time.Default Format The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionCurrent SettingThe current time appears in the format set in Date Format.FormatSet a display order of the year, month, and day.SeparatorSelect one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.Day-Name PositionSelect whether the day name appears before or after the date.Time DisplaySelect 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time.24-Hour Display: 00:00 to 23:5912-Hour Display: 00:00 AM to 11:59 AM/00:00 PM to 11:59 PM If [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Operation Settings] → [Disabling Clock Adjustment] are selected, you cannot change the date and time.Keyboard Select The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed.The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below.English (US)English (UK)JapaneseFrenchGermanSwedishNorwegianFinnishDanishRussianGreekTurkishBack to top ';
 body[359]='08-032.htm';
dai[359]='LIST PRINT (USER)';
bun[359]='LIST PRINT (USER)LIST PRINT (USER)List Print (User) Lists showing the settings and information registered in the machine can be printed.List of Print TypesList nameDescriptionAll Custom Setting ListPrints all hardware status, software status, printer environment settings, and paper tray settings.Printer Test PageThis is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page (network interface settings, etc.).PCL Symbol Set ListPCL Internal Font ListPCL Extended Font ListPS Font ListPS Extended Font ListNIC PageSending Address ListLists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine.Individual ListGroup ListAll Sending Address ListDocument Filing Folder ListThis shows the folder names for document filing. Paper Settings ListThe names and settings of all properties registered using Paper Settings can be printed.In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [List Prints].Among the All Sending Address Lists, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis.Individual ListGroup ListThe items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.You cannot print the printer test page if you have selected, from the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Default Settings] and if you have set the [Prohibit Test Page Printing] option.Back to top ';
 body[360]='08-033.htm';
dai[360]='PAPER TRAY SETTINGS';
bun[360]='PAPER TRAY SETTINGSDouble Feed Detection Setting Select whether to detect double feed.PAPER TRAY SETTINGS Tray Settings/Paper Settings These settings specify the automatic tray switching function, and the paper type and size for each paper tray. When this setting is enabled and the tray used is automatically changed, the front of the Front/Back XY Print Position Settings may change due to the change of tray.Auto Tray Switching When a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of paper is automatically selected and printing continues.Settings of each trayThese settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray.When a tray name is tapped, the tray registration screen appears.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionTypeSelect a type of paper to be loaded into the tray.The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For more information, see &quot;Tray Settings&quot;.To set a user type, see &quot;Paper Type Registration&quot;.SizeSelect the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray. The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected above. For more information, see &quot;Tray Settings&quot;.If the desired size does not appear in the list, select [Size Input] and directly enter the size (for tray 4 to 8 and bypass tray). For more information, see &quot;Tray Settings&quot;.Feeding Approved JobSelect the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be used with the selected tray, disable the function.When the &quot;Type&quot; is other than plain paper, recycled paper, coloured paper, or a user type. Selection of Paper SettingsPaper Properties can be selected when [User Type] is selected for the “Tray Registration” type. Select properties set in Paper Properties as appropriate for the paper. To add a new Paper Settings, tap [Add]. For the procedure for adding Paper Settings, reIf the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray, a problem or misfeed may occur when printing.To change the paper size in a tray, see &quot;BEFORE USING THE MACHINE&quot;.Paper properties such as &quot;Fixed Paper Side&quot; are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray properties cannot be changed in this screen.In the &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, if you have selected [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Tray Settings], you cannot configure the tray settings (except for the bypass tray).The paper tray settings may prevent some Paper Properties from being selected.Tray SettingsPaper TrayPaper TypeSizeTray 1Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, User TypeA4, B5, letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;)Tray 2A4, letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;)Tray 3Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, User TypeAuto-AB (A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)),Auto-Inch (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;(A3W), 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 7-1/4&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;10-1/2&quot;R)216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A4W (9&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;12&quot;), 8K, 16K, 16KRTray 4Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, Embossed, User Type Auto-AB (A3W (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)), Auto-Inch (12" × 18"(A3W), 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11", 8-1/2" ×Size Input-AB, Size Input-Inch, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A4W (9&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;12&quot;), 8K, 16K, 16KRLabelsAuto-AB (A4, A4R, B5, B5R), Auto-Inch (Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R),Size Input-AB, Size Input-InchTransparency Auto-AB (A4, A4R), Auto-Inch (Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R),Size Input-AB, Size Input-InchTab paperAuto-AB (A4), Auto-Inch (Letter (8-1/2&quot; × 11&quot;))Tray 5 (when the MX-LC12 is installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1A4, B5, Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;)Tray 5 (when the MX-LCX3 N is installed)A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A3W (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;), Legal (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbTray 5 (when the MX-LC13 is installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, Heavy Paper 3*1, Heavy Paper 4*1, Thin Paper, Glossy Paper, Labels, Embossed, User Type Auto-AB (A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4W, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)), Auto-Inch (13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;), Legal (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;), Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quotSize Input-AB,Size Input-Inch, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), SRA3 (320 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;450 mm), SRA4 (225 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;320 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KRTransparencySame as for Tray 4Tab paperSame as for Tray 4Tray 6 (when the MX-LC13 is installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, Heavy Paper 3*1, Heavy Paper 4*1, Thin Paper, Tab Paper, Transparency, Glossy Paper, Labels, Embossed, User TypeSame as for Tray 5 (when the MX-LC13 is installed). Tray 7 (When two large capacity trays are installed)Same as for Tray 5 (when the MX-LC13 is installed).Same as for Tray 5 (when the MX-LC13 is installed).Tray 8 (When two large capacity trays are installed)Same as for Tray 6 (when the MX-LC13 is installed).Same as for Tray 5 (when the MX-LC13 is installed).Bypass tray (on the machine)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, Heavy Paper 3*1, Heavy Paper 4*1, Glossy Paper, Embossed, User TypeAuto-AB (A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, SRA3 (320 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;450 mm), SRA4 (225 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;320 mm), 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&rdquo;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;& Auto-Inch (13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;(A3W), Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;), Legal (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;), Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quotSize Input-AB, Size Input-Inch, A4W (9&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;12&quot;), 8K, 16K, 16KREnvelopeCOM-10, Monarch, DL, C5TransparencySame as for Tray 4Tab paperSame as for Tray 4LabelsSame as for Tray 4Bypass tray (when the MX-LC13 is installed)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, Thin Paper, Transparency, User TypeAuto-AB (A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4W, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; )*2, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm*2, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm*2), Auto-Inch (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;(A3W), Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;), Legal (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;), Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R), InvoiSize Input-AB, Size Input-Inch, 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, SRA3 (320 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;450 mm), SRA4 (225 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;320 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KRTransparencySame as for Tray 4Tab paperSame as for Tray 4Inserter (Upper)Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Colour, Heavy Paper 1*1, Heavy Paper 2*1, User TypeAuto-AB (A3W(12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;), A3, B4, A4W(9&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;12&quot;), A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm*2, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsAuto-Inch (12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot;(A3W), Ledger (11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;), Legal (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;), Letter (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;), Letter R (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R), InvoiceSize Input-AB, Size Input-Inch, 13&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;19&quot;, SRA3 (320 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;450 mm), SRA4 (225 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;320 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KRInserter (Lower) *1&nbsp; Heavy paper 1: 106&nbsp;g/m2 to 176&nbsp;g/m2 (28 lbs. to 46 lbs.)Heavy paper 2: 177&nbsp;g/m2 to 220&nbsp;g/m2 (47 lbs. to 58 lbs.)Heavy paper 3: 221&nbsp;g/m2 to 256&nbsp;g/m2 (59 lbs. to 68 lbs.) Heavy paper 4: 257&nbsp;g/m2 to 300&nbsp;g/m2 (69 lbs. to 79 lbs.) *2&nbsp; The size that is automatically detected is set in &quot;Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection&quot; in the bypass tray settings screen (see below).Select Similar Sizes for Auto DetectionThe &quot;Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection&quot; is used to select the paper size that is automatically detected from similar sizes during automatic paper size detection.When a paper size is optionally selected, any size of paper is detected as the selected one.TrayAuto-ABAuto-InchTray 5/Tray 6 (when the large capacity trays are installed)216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot; × 14&quot;Tray 7/Tray 8 (When two large capacity trays are installed)Bypass tray (on the machine)216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;)8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot; × 13-1/2&quot; (216 mm × 343 mm)Bypass tray (when the large capacity trays are installed)216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A4R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 8-1/2&quot; × 14&quot;Inserter (Upper)216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A4R8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 8-1/2&quot; × 14&quot;Inserter (Lower)Custom Size Registration (Bypass) If you frequently use a non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, register that paper size in advance.Registering the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you need to use it.Up to three paper sizes can be registered.Tap the key ([Custom 1] to [Custom 7]) in which you wish to register or change a paper size, and the registration screen appears. Select whether you wish to enter the size in mm (&quot;Size Input-AB&quot;) or inches (&quot;Size Input-Inch&quot;), and then set the X and Y dimensions of the paper.List of Set Up ItemsInch selectionLocation of paper traySetting range Size Input-ABInstalled in the machineX-axis direction: 140 mm to 1200 mmY-axis direction: 90 mm to 330 mmLarge capacity trayX-axis direction: 140 mm to 1200 mmY-axis direction: 100 mm to 330 mmSize Input-InchInstalled in the machineX-axis direction: 5-1/2&quot; to 47-1/4&quot;Y-axis direction: 3-5/8&quot; to 13Large capacity trayX-axis direction: 5-1/2&quot; to 47-1/4&quot;Y-axis direction: 4&quot; to 13Registration of Paper SettingsWhen [Add] is tapped in Paper Settings selection in the paper tray settings, the Paper Settings registration screen appears. By selecting advanced settings in Paper Properties for the paper to be used, you can print using the most suitable conditions forItemDescriptionNameEnter a name for the Paper Settings (maximum of 50 half or full width characters).Search NumberSet a search number.[Default Settings] tabPaper Weight SettingSet the paper weight to be used.&nbsp;UnitSet the units used for the Paper Weight.Paper TypeSet the paper type by glossiness.Paper informationSet when Color paper, Tab Paper, or Pre-Punched paper is used.Paper SettingsSet the properties of the paper to be used.For the properties, refer to the settings in “Paper Type Registration”.[Detail] tabFusing Temperature SettingsSet the appropriate fusing unit temperature for the paper to be used.Double Feed Detection SettingSpecify whether double feeds are detected. This function cannot be used when paper heavier than 68 lbs. (256 g/m2) is used.Primary Transfer Current Value SettingSet the current of the primary transfer unit that is used to transfer toner to the transfer belt. By adjusting the current of the primary transfer unit, transfer problems such as insufficient transfer to the transfer belt can be improved.Select settings fSecondary Transfer Current Value SettingSet the current of the secondary transfer unit that is used to transfer toner from the transfer belt to the paper. By adjusting the current of the secondary transfer unit, transfer problems such as insufficient transfer to the paper can be improved.When UPTC Current Value SettingSet the PTC discharge current. The PTC discharge current can be adjusted to obtain transferability suitable for the paper being used.When Embossed is selected for the [Paper Type]Set for both black & white and color.When other than Embossed is selected foFront/Back XY Print Position SettingsConfigure settings to make the front and back centers match in duplex printing. This corrects front and back misalignment.Front/Back XY Ratio SettingsConfigure settings to equalize the size of the image in duplex printing. This adjusts the size of the image on the front and back sides of the paper.Depending on the tray being used, there may be restrictions on the setting options that can be selected, or a setting may not be possible.The parameters that can be set vary depending on the peripheral devices that are installed.The Front/Back XY Ratio Settings can only be selected when the machine is used as a printer.Front/Back XY Ratio Settings/Front/Back XY Print Position SettingsFront/Back XY Ratio SettingsThe Front/Back XY Ratio Settings are used to eliminate print deviation by changing the front/back ratio so that the print sizes match.Tap [Change] in the Front/Back XY Ratio Settings to display the advanced settings screen of the Front/Back XY Ratio SettiPrint a test patternBefore starting, print a test pattern from [Test Print] in Tray Settings/Paper Settings in the home screen. Three pages of patterns for settings are printed by duplex printing. Select the pattern among the three patterns that is suitable for adjustment.For the measurement patterns, refer to “Measurement patterns for Front/Back XY Ratio Settings / Front/Back XY Print Position Settings”.Calculate the values from the pattern and enter the values.[AB sizes]Measure the length of (a-1) in mm. Divide 10000 by the measured length of (a-1), and enter that value in [Y] for the front.Measure the length of (b-1) in mm. Divide 10000 by the measured length of (b-1), and enter that value in [X] for the front.[Inch sizes]Measure the length of (a-2) in inches. Divide 500 by the measured length of (a-2), and enter that value in [Y] for the front.Measure the length of (b-2) in inches. Divide 500 by the measured length of (b-2), and enter that value in [X] for the front.Calculate the values for the back in the same way as the front, and enter in X and Y for the back.Measuring using a measurement line other than the aboveWhen measuring from a position other than the above, such as when the paper width is 100 mm or less, use the following formula.Length specified by measurement line interval ÷ actual distance between measurement lines x 100 = X, Y valuesFor the “Length specified by measurement line interval”, refer to the table below.Measurement Line(Measurement Marker)Length specified by measurement line intervalAssistant Line (25mm)50 mm (1.969 inch)100 mm200 mm300 mm400 mm5 inch10 inch15 inchTap [OK].Return to step 1 and check the result of adjustment.If the size has deviated as a result of adjustment, repeat adjustment until the deviation is eliminated.If the print position has shifted due to these settings, configure the Front/Back XY Print Position Settings.The Front/Back XY Ratio Settings can only be used when the machine is used as a printer.Front/Back XY Print Position SettingsThe Front/Back XY Print Position Settings are used to make the centers of the front and back print positions match to remove printing misalignment.Tap the [Change] button in Front/Back XY Print Position Settings to display the advanced settings screen ofSelect the units used in the Front/Back XY Print Position SettingsTap [mm] or [Inch] to select the units used for the settings.Print a test patternBefore starting, print a test pattern from [Test Print] in Tray Settings/Paper Settings in the home screen. Three pages of patterns for settings are printed by duplex printing. Select the pattern among the three patterns that is suitable for adjustment.For information on the measurement patterns, refer to “Measurement patterns for Front/Back XY Ratio Settings / Front/Back XY Print Position Settings.”Calculate numeric values from the patterns and enter the values.Measure the intervals between (A), (B), (C), and (D) on the front sideSubtract (B) from (A), divide the result by 2, and enter in [X] for the front. Subtract (D) from (C), divide the result by 2, and enter in [Y] for the front.Calculate the values for the back in the same way as the front, and enter in X and Y for the back.Tap [OK].Return to step 2 and check the result of adjustment.If the size has deviated as a result of adjustment, repeat adjustment until the deviation is eliminated.The measurement line content of the measurement pattern varies depending on the paper size. Measure from the measurement line closest to the edge of the paper.When the length of the paper in the Y direction is 301 mm (11-55/64") or more, the Y length on the front cannot be adjusted.When the vertical or horizontal width is 100 mm or less, measure from the assistant line (25 mm).If you need to use this setting together with the Front/Back XY Ratio Settings, specify the Front/Back XY Ratio Settings first.Changes in the environment of the machine, such as humidity and temperature, may cause a deviation of about 1 mm in the Front/Back XY Print Position.Measurement patterns for Front/Back XY Ratio Settings / Front/Back XY Print Position SettingsTo specify Front/Back XY Print Position Settings and Front/Back XY Ratio Settings, print a pattern for measurement.Content of the measurement patternNo.ItemDescription1Measurement LineReference line for measurement.Measurement lines for AB sizes and inch sizes have been created.2Dot LineThis line is visible through the front side and back side to let you visually check for misalignment. The line is printed at the same position on the front and back. If visual inspection reveals that the lines are not aligned, the print positions on the f3Assistant Line (25mm)Assistant line located 25 mm from the center of the paper. When the paper size is 100 mm or less, use this line for measurement.4Measurement MarkerMarkers placed on the measurement line. Solid black markers indicate AB measurement, and outline markers indicate inch measurement. The number of markers increase as the distance from the center increases.5Assistant Line (Central)Assistant lines that indicate the center of the paper. The intersection of the lines is the center.6Notes (Front/Back)These indicate the front and back.7Notes (X/Y axis)When entering the settings, these indicate the X and Y axes of the paper.8Assistant Line (Magnification)Indicates a position that is ±1% of the measured distance.The same measurement pattern content is printed at the same size, regardless of the paper size. The outer perimeter of the measurement pattern is trimmed to match the paper size.Example: Content trimmed for an AB sizeExample: Content trimmed for an inch sizeBack to top ';
 body[361]='08-034.htm';
dai[361]='PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION';
bun[361]='PAPER TYPE REGISTRATIONPAPER TYPE REGISTRATIONPaper Type Registration Store a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of paper properties.Up to 11 paper types can be registered.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionType NameRegister any name.The factory default names are &quot;User Type 1&quot; to &quot;User Type 11&quot;.Fixed Paper SideUse this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used.Disable DuplexUse this setting when paper loaded cannot be used for 2-sided printing.Disable StapleUse this setting when paper used cannot be stapled.Disable PunchUse this setting when paper used cannot be punched.Disable FoldUse this setting when paper used cannot be folded. The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.Back to top ';
 body[362]='08-036.htm';
dai[362]='PRINTER CONDITION SETTINGS';
bun[362]='PRINTER CONDITION SETTINGSPRINTER CONDITION SETTINGSDefault Settings If you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (that is, if you print data using the MS-DOS system or if you print data using the PC that does not have the provided printer driver installed), set the detailed printing conditionsList of Set Up ItemsItemSettingCopies1 to 9999 setsOrientationPortraitHorizontalDefault Paper SizeA3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 320 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;450 mm (SRA3), 225 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;320 mm (SRA4), 234 mm × 318 mm, 220 mm × 312 mm, 318 mm × 469 mm, 312 mm × 440 mm, 12&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;18&quot; (A3W), 9&quot; × 12&quot; (A4W), 11&quot;&nbsp;&timDefault Output TrayOffset Tray*1Finisher Upper TrayFinisher Middle TrayFinisher Lower TrayTop Tray (1,2)Stacker Tray (1,2)Default Paper TypePlain Paper, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Recycled, ColourStandard Print ModeNormalHigh QualityUltra FineDisable Blank Page Print (Disabled) (Enabled)Line Thickness*10-92-Sided Print1-Sided2-Sided (Booklet)2-Sided (Tablet)Colour ModeAutoB/WN-Up Print*2N-Up1-Up2-Up4-Up8-UpLayoutLeft To Right*3Right To Left*3Upper-Left To Right*4Upper-Left To Lower*4Upper-Right To Left*4Upper-Right To Lower*4Fit To Page*5 (Use Fit to Page) (Do not use Fit to Page)OUTPUT (Use Print per Unit) (Do not use Print per Unit) (Insert Before Job)Paper tray: Trays 1 to 8, bypass tray, inserter (upper/lower) (Do not Insert Before Job) (Insert After Job)Paper tray: Trays 1 to 8, bypass tray, inserter (upper/lower) (Do not Insert After Job)Staple Position: None, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, 2 Staples (Top) (Slant Staple)*1 (Do not Slant Staple)*1 (Use Punch) (Do not use Punch) Punch Position 2holes, 3holes, 4holesFold Enabled DisabledSaddle FoldZ-FoldC-FoldAccordion FoldDouble FoldHalf FoldTrimming Width Settings2.0 to 20.0 mmQUICK FILE (Save data in Quick File mode) (Do not save data in Quick File mode)*1&nbsp; This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics. Except for CAD and other specialized uses, there is normally no need to change this setting. When &quot;0&quot; is selected, all lines are printed at a width of 1 dot.*2&nbsp; Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;,11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp*3&nbsp; Can be selected when 2-Up is selected.*4&nbsp; Can be selected when 4-Up/8-Up is selected.*5&nbsp; Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.When printing using the printer driver, the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings.The display varies depending on the peripheral devices installed.PCL Settings This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionSettingPCL Symbol Set SettingSpecify the symbol set used for printing.Select from 35 itemsPCL Font SettingSelect a font used for printing.Internal FontExtended Font(List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not installed)PCL Line Feed CodeThis setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received.0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF Wide A4When this is enabled, 80 characters per line are printed on the A4 (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;) size paper using a 10-pitch font. (When this setting is disabled, up to 78 characters are printed per line.) (Enabled) (Disabled)PostScript Settings When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionSetting Screen SettingSelect print quality settings.NormalText/PhotoTextPhotoDot (High Line Number)Dot (Low Line Number)Print PS ErrorWhen a PS (PostScript) error occurs during PostScript printing, this setting determines whether or not an error notice is printed. (Enabled) (Disabled)Binary ProcessingReceive PostScript data in binary format. (Enabled) (Disabled) Store Print Data in PS FormatSave the print data in PS format. (Enabled) (Disabled)Back to top ';
 body[363]='08-037.htm';
dai[363]='DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL';
bun[363]='DOCUMENT FILING CONTROLDOCUMENT FILING CONTROLDocument Filing Control Document Filing Control is used to create, edit, and delete custom folders for document filing. From the Custom Folder List, you can narrow the display by alphabet or user index by selecting the [Index] list and can select a number of users to be displayed at a time using the [Display Items].Registration and editing of Custom FolderWhen you tap the [Add] key, the Custom Folder Registration screen appears. Up to 1000 network folders can be registered. Also, when you tap a custom folder name, its registration screen appears and you can edit its settings.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionFolder NameEnter a name (maximum of 28 characters) for the custom folder to be created. A name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder.Initial of FolderEnter up to 10 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the position of the one-touch key in the index.Password of FolderTo set a password for the folder, enter the desired number (5 to 8 digits).Select User NameSelect the desired user name from the user list.Deleting a Custom FolderSet the checkbox to at the left of the user name and tap the [Delete] key, and the selected custom folder is deleted.If the folder has a password, the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted.A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.Back to top ';
 body[364]='08-038.htm';
dai[364]='USB-DEVICE CHECK';
bun[364]='USB-DEVICE CHECKUSB-DEVICE CHECKUSB-Device Check Check the current connection of USB devices to the machine. The connection of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear.Back to top ';
 body[365]='08-039.htm';
dai[365]='OPERATION SETTINGS';
bun[365]='OPERATION SETTINGSOPERATION SETTINGSOperation SettingsThe machine operations can be set as follows.Various settingsSets various operations.Enlarge Display ModeEnlarges characters displayed on the screen. When the Enlarge Display mode is enabled, is displayed in the system area.Keys Touch SoundAdjusts the key touch sound. You can stop to sound it. You can also have three peeps sound at initial values when setting the ratio in copy mode or when adjusting the exposure in any mode.Screen in which setting is effectiveInitial valueRatio setting screen in base screen of copy modeRatio 100%Exposure setting screen in base screen of copy modeExposure level: 3 (medium)Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of network scanner modesExposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing modeAuto Clear SettingThe time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds from 10 to 240 in increments of 10 seconds. If the machine is not used for the duration of time set here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that have been selected and rCancel TimerThis is used to disable the auto clear function.Message Time SettingThe duration of time that messages appear in the touch panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12.MFP Display Language SettingThe language that appears in the touch panel can be changed to any language. When user authentication is enabled and a display language is specified in the favourite operation group, that setting is given priority.Default Display SettingsSet the screen that appears after auto clear and login. You can select from Copy, E-mail, Network Folder, FTP, Data Entry, Address Book, Document Filing, Home Screen, or the Sharp OSA Screen*. * When the application communication module is installed. Display Favourite Menus as DefaultYou can specify to display the &quot;Favourite&quot; first during mode selection.Display Action Panel as defaultSpecify whether or not to display with the action panel on the screen.Disabling of Job Priority OperationThe job priority function can be disabled. When this is done, the [Priority] key will not appear on the job management screen.Disabling of Bypass PrintingThis setting is used to disable bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the paper required for the job is not available in any of the trays). * This does not include cases where the paper ran out during the job. Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job ManagementSelect whether to display the number of progress sets or remaining sets as the job management.Key Operation SettingThis setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered. The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. By lengthening the time setting, key input can be prevented when a key is tapDisable Auto Key RepeatThis is used to disable key repeat. Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously not only each time the key is tapped but while a key is tapped.Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long TouchSelect a time when a long key touch is detected.Double Tap Interval SettingSelect an interval when a double tap is detected.Disabling of Clock AdjustmentDisables the date and time from being changed.Disabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisables the use of the covers and inserts function.Disable Manual FinishingDisable Manual FinishingSet Keyboard PrioritySelects to use the soft keyboard or an external keyboard to enter characters if the external keyboard is attached.Display current path in System SettingsWhile the Setting mode of the machine is in use, the menu position is displayed in hierarchical form at the top of the touch panel.Enable link of current pathIf &quot;Display current path in System Settings&quot; is turned ON, the link of the current path is enabled.Initial Original Count SettingSpecifies whether or not &quot;Original Count&quot; in Others is enabled for each function.FunctionFunction TypesCopyCopyImage SendScannerData EntryDocument FilingScan to HDDScan to Ext.Memory Dev.Unify 10-key number in ascending order from upper leftArranges numeric keys in ascending order from the left top position.MFP Display Pattern SettingSelect a colour pattern in the touch panel from seven colour patterns. A sample of the selected template can be reviewed.Preview SettingFile Retrieve of Document FilingMain Folder/Quick File Folder: Select whether the default display format of the document filing main folder and temporary folder screens is list or thumbnails.Custom Folder: Select whether the default display format of the document filing custom folder screen is list or thumbnails. Paper SettingsInitial status settings for switching unit of measurement of paper weight.Select the paper weight units used on the machine.Remote Operation Settings Configure settings required for remote operation of the machine from a PC connected to the same network.Remote Software OperationOperation Authority: This is used when remote software is used to operate the machine remotely.View Password Entry Screen: When remote software is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Operation from Specified PCOperation Authority: This is used to allow remote operation of the machine using the specified PC.Host Name or IP Address of PC: Enter the host name or IP address of the PC to be connected to the machine. Enter a maximum of 127 characters.View Password Entry Screen: When a specified PC is used to operate the machine remotely, you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Operation by User Who Has PasswordOperation Authority: This is used to allow a user who has a password to operate the machine remotely. For information on the password, consult your service technician.View Password Entry Screen: When a user who has a password operates the machine remotely, he or she can have a password entry screen appear on the machine, on the PC, or both.Soft Keyboard Template Setting Register text that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance. Enter a maximum of 16 characters.Customize Key Setting Assign frequently used functions to shortcut keys. They will be displayed in the favourite screen in the base screen of each mode. Select the customize key setting mode by clicking the &quot;Copy&quot; or &quot;Scan&quot; tab, and set the customize keys.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionCustomized Keys 1 to 40Enter a name for the customized key (maximum of 20 characters).ItemSelect the function that you wish to assign to the key. The functions that can be selected vary by mode.Return to the DefaultsThe selected favourite settings are returned to the factory default.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.MODE KEY DISPLAY SETTINGThe mode selection keys can be displayed at the top of the screen. ItemDescriptionDisplay mode keys in screenThe mode selection keys can be displayed at the top of the screen.Display of mode keysSelect the modes shown in the mode selection keys.Display mode keys in home screenSet whether the modes selection keys are shown in the home screen. When this is disabled, the mode selection keys do not appear in the home screen even when &quot;Display mode keys in screen&quot; is enabled.Home Screen Settings You can configure the home screen that appears when the [Home Screen] button is clicked.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine. When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears. The following settings can be configured.&quot;Item&quot; tabItemDescriptionHome keys 1 to 60Set the scroll keys at the top of Home screen. When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears.Fixed keys 1 to 10Set the scroll keys always displayed at the bottom of the Home screen. When a name is tapped, the key storage screen appears.TemplateSelect one of six patterns. The key layout of the pattern selected with the [Key Layout of the Screen] is displayed.Text ColourSelect a text colour.Icon StyleSelect an icon style.&quot;Image&quot; tabItemDescriptionBackground ImageDisplays the selected background image file name. You can change the image by tapping the [Change] key.Back to top ';
 body[366]='08-040.htm';
dai[366]='DEVICE CONTROL';
bun[366]='DEVICE CONTROL DEVICE CONTROLDevice ControlVarious devices mounted on the machine can be set.ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTOR SETTING One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection function.SelectionsDetectable original sizesDOCUMENT GLASSDocument feeder tray (automatic document feeder)AB-1A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5RAB-2A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;)AB-3A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KRA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot;), 8K, 16K, 16KRAB-4216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot;)AB-5216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;), A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5RA3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;343 mm (8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-1/2&quot;) Inch-111&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;14&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A3, A4Inch-211&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;330 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A3, A4Inch-311&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5&quot; (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;11&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;17&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;13-2/5 (216 mm&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;340 mm), 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;, 8-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;11&quot;R, 5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;, A3, A4Cancel Detection at Document GlassOriginal size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document glass are treated as special size originals.Disabling of devices/Staple settingDisabling of Document FeederUse this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.)Original Feeding ModeThe following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, scan to HDD, and saved in external memory device modes. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time youMixed Size Original (Same Width (Copy mode only)/Different Width)Slow scan modeBlank Page SkipDisabling of DuplexThis is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions.Disabling of Large Capacity CassetteThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the large capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of Tray Settings/Paper SettingsThis setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for the bypass tray) and paper settings.Disabling of FinisherThis setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of Bypass-TrayDisables use of the bypass tray.Disabling of InserterDisables use of the inserter.Disabling of OffsetDisables use of the offset tray.Disabling of StaplerThis setting is used to prohibit use of the stapler, such as when the stapler of the finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Automatic Saddle StitchSaddle stitch stapling take place automatically when the pamphlet copy function is used.Fold Position Adjustment for Saddle Stitch/Saddle FoldThis setting is used to adjust both the fold and staple positions when a saddle finisher is installed and the saddle stitch function is used.Specify a value within +/- 2.0 mm in increments of 0.25 mm.Staple Position Fine Adjustment for Saddle StitchThis setting is used to adjust the staple position when a saddle finisher is installed and the saddle stitch function is used.Set the staple position using the "Saddle Fold/Stitch Position Adjust" setting value as the standard.Specify a value within +/- 3.0 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.Disabling of PunchThis setting is used to prohibit the use of punch, such as when the punch module of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Disabling of Folding UnitThis setting is used to disable the folding unit. You can use the saddle folding with the saddle finisher even if the folding unit is disabled.Disabling of Trimming ModuleThis setting is used to disable the trimming module. Disabling of Stacker 1This setting is used to disable the primary high capacity stacker.Disabling of Stacker 2This setting is used to disable the secondary high capacity stacker.Disabling of Colour Mode (When a colour-related problem has occurred) When a colour-related problem has occurred and printing is not possible, the use of colour mode will be temporarily blocked. This function is only for use as an emergency measure. Once this setting is enabled, only a service technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact your dealer or authorised service representative to have a service technician cancel the settings andAuto Paper Selection Setting The paper types* that the Auto Paper Selection function will select can be specified. Select one of the following settings:Plain paperPlain paper and Recycled paperRecycled paperThe Auto Paper Selection function will not select any paper types other than the paper types specified with this setting. * The paper type set for each paper tray by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [Paper Tray Settings] Stacker SettingsStack Setting for Additional JobsSpecify whether to additionally load paper for new jobs if the stacker tray of the high capacity stacker is already loaded with paper.Auto Switching SettingWhen two high capacity stackers are installed, specify whether to output paper to the other high capacity stacker if the current one becomes full.Tandem Connection Setting When two machines are used as network printers using TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port number and IP address of the machine used as the tandem slave machine.Disabling of Master Machine ModeTo prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)Disabling of Slave Machine ModeTo prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.) The factory default setting for the port number is "50001". Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not change the port number. To use the tandem function when user authentication is enabled, the same login name and password must be used on both the master machine and slave machine. If the same login name and password are not used, the page count may not be added to the appropriaDetect Standard in Auto Colour Mode When colour mode is set to auto, the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are colour or black and white can be set to one of 5 levels. When set to [Closer to B/W], the originals are easier to recognize as black and white. When set to [CloAuto Switching of Finisher Trays When the Finisher Upper Tray is filled with papers, the output tray is switched to the Lower Output Tray automatically. If the Finisher Lower Tray is selected for paper output, papers are output to the Finisher Lower Tray only.Fusing Control Settings These are used to control the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper.These settings apply to plain paper, recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, coloured paper, and user type paper.You can select &quot;60g/m2 to 89g/m2&quot; or &quot;90g/m2 to 105g/m2&quot; (&quot;16 to 23 lbs.&quot; or &quot;23+ to 28 lbs.&quot;).Be sure to use only paper that is in the same weight range as the weight range set here. Do not mix plain or other paper that is outside the range with the paper in the tray.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.List PrintTo specify [One Sided] or [Two Sided] printing in List Print.Black Streak ReductionSpecify to use the black streak reduction or not. The black streak reduction can be used for Scan Original, Copy, Image Send, and Scan to HDD functions. If the black streak reduction is enabled, select any of the following options.Process Black Thin StreaksNormalProcess Black Thin and Thick StreaksDisplay warning message for black streaks detection.Set this option to display a warning message when black streaks are detected by the document feeder. Status Indicator Setting The status indicator on the back of the machine lights up or blinks according to the status of the machine.You can change this setting to specify the machine status that causes the green indicator (status indicator) to light up or blink.The indicator goes off when Auto Power Shut-Off is enabled.Status indicator (green) :You can specify which job management and original scanning status respectively cause the indicator to light up and blink.Green indicator (Status indicator) :This indicator lights up or blinks when an error occurs on the machine.Green indicator (Status indicator) lights up and blinks the same way regardless of the pattern you select.StatusPattern 1Pattern 2Green indicator (Status indicator)The machine is executing a job.Green: Light up-The machine can accept a job.-Green: Light upThe machine is scanning an original.Green: Blink-The machine is scanning an original/processing data.-Green: BlinkThe machine is in a status other than the above.Green: OffGreen: OffRed indicator (Error indicator)An error has occurred but the machine is able to be operated.Red: Light upRed: Light upAn error has occurred and the machine is not able to be operated.Red: BlinkRed: BlinkThe machine is in a status other than the above.Red: OffRed: OffRegistration Adjustment Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. If the colours are out of place on the printed surface when colour printing is performed, the print positions of the colours can be adjusted. Tap the [Auto Adjustment] key to adjust the exposure. A message appears when the key is tapped. Tap the [ExecuteOptimization of a Hard Disk Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. This function optimizes the hard drive of the machine by defragmenting data. If a job is in progress, a message will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is finished. During optimization, the following operations are not possible:Access to Setting mode (Web version), and reception of print dataUse of keys on the operation panelTurning off the power with the main power switch of the machine.Auto Power Shut-OffWhen optimization is completed, the machine will automatically restart. When the document filing function is frequently used and output of files seems somewhat slow, optimizing the hard drive may improve performance.Fusing Cleaning Mode Use this function to clean the machine\'s fusing unit when dots or other dirt appear on the printed side of the paper. When this function is executed, &quot;V&quot; printed paper is output and the fusing unit is cleaned. If improvement is not noticed after the first time you use the function, try executing the function again.PTC Cleaning Mode This machine periodically executes automatic cleaning and normally it is not necessary to execute this mode. Only in case, however, that coloured lines (linear colour unevenness) appear on the printed paper, execute this mode.MC Cleaning Mode This machine periodically executes automatic cleaning and normally it is not necessary to execute this mode. Only in case, however, that black or coloured lines (linear colour unevenness) appear on the printed paper, execute this mode.Do not use this function when no black or coloured lines appear. Using this function under the normal condition may cause deterioration of the cleaner.Back to top ';
 body[367]='08-041.htm';
dai[367]='COPY FUNCTION SETTINGS';
bun[367]='COPY FUNCTION SETTINGSCOPY FUNCTION SETTINGS&quot;Initial Status Settings&quot; Tab Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).The copier settings are reset to the initial state when the [POWER] button is turned on, when the [CA] key is tapped, or when the Auto Clear Interval has elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionColour ModeConfigure default colour mode settings.Paper TraySpecify the paper tray that is selected by default.Exposure TypeConfigure default exposure mode settings.Copy RatioSpecify the copy ratio that is selected by default.2-Sided CopyConfigure the 2-sided mode settings that are selected by default.If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex function to any setting other than &quot;1-Side to 1-Side&quot; and the duplex function or automatic document feeder fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to &quot;1-Side to 1-SiOUTPUTSet the print output method and output tray that are selected by default.Trimming Width SettingsSets the default trimming width for trimmer function.This option is displayed when the saddle finisher and the trimmer module are installed.Return to the DefaultsThis returns all items to the factory default settings.&quot;Copy Function Settings&quot; Tab The following settings are related to copying.Copy Exposure AdjustmentAdjusts the exposure level when [Auto] is used for the copy exposure.ItemDescriptionColourSets the copy exposure level in colour mode for the document glass and for the automatic document feeder.B/WSets the copy exposure level in black &amp; white mode for the document glass and for the automatic document feeder.Rotation Copy SettingWhen the original and paper are placed in different orientations, this function automatically rotates the image 90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper. Enable the Rotation Copy setting to copy an A5 (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;) size original on A5R (5-1/2&quot;&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;8-1/2&quot;R) paper.Add or Change Extra Preset RatiosAdd or Change Extra Preset Ratios Add two enlargement preset ratio values (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratio values (25% to 99%).Also, you can change the preset ratio if necessary. Preset ratios other than added preset ratios cannot be changed.Setting a Maximum Number of CopiesThis is used to set the maximum number that can be entered for the number of copies (number of continuous copies). Any number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.Initial Margin Shift SettingThis is used to set the default margin shift amount. Specify a value from 0 mm (0&quot;) to 50 mm (2&quot;) in increments of 3 mm (1/8&quot;) for both the front and reverse sides.Erase Width AdjustmentThis is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0&quot;) to 25 mm (1&quot;) in increments of 3 mm (1/8&quot;) for both Edge Clearance Width and Centre Clearance Width.Card Shot SettingsThis is used to set the default original size for the card shot function.Specify a value from 25 mm (1&quot;) to 216 mm (8-1/2&quot;) in increments of 3 mm (1/8&quot;) for both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the original. If the &quot;Fit to Page&quot; checkbox is set to , the [Fit to Page] key always appear on the card shot screen.Automatic Saddle StitchSaddle stitch stapling take place automatically when the pamphlet copy function is used.Initial Tab Copy SettingThis is used to set the default image shift width (tab width) for tab copying.Specify a value from 0 mm (0&quot;) to 25 mm (1&quot;) in increments of 3 mm (1/8&quot;).Disable Registration of ProgramThis is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy settings stored in job programs.Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies.The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or damage to the unit may result. If specDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisables the Auto Paper Selection function.When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document feeder does not take place.Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the PaperWhen this setting is enabled and paper is loaded into a tray while the machine is on standby in copy mode, that tray is automatically selected.Disabling Registration of Custom ImageDisables storage of a custom image.Disabling sending while copyingDisables the Image Send function during copy.B/W 600 dpi&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpi Scanning Mode for Document FeederThe resolution for copying in black and white using the automatic document feeder can be changed from 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi to 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpi (high quality mode).When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the scanning speed is slower. When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi and attain the fastest speed.The copy ratio must be set to 100%.Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.[Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.Do not copy in black and white with the [Colour Start] key.B/W Quick Scan from Document GlassThe resolution for copying in black and white using the document glass can be changed from 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpi to 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi (high speed mode).When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is quicker, however, the copy image is not as clear. When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi and attain the fastest speed.The copy ratio must be set to 100%.Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.[Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.Do not copy in black and white with the [Colour Start] key.Auto Clear Before Copy Job ExecutionEnables the Auto Clear function during copy even when a copy job is not completed. This protects the machine from being held due to the incomplete copy job.Colour Adjustments The following settings are related to colour.Initial Colour Balance Setting If you have adjusted the colour balance using the Colour Balance Adjustment of another function and you have registered them in program (up to 48 settings), you can call any of them and set as the standard setting*. If the adjusted setting or the colour* The default values to be shown when the &quot;Colour Balance&quot; adjustment screen of another function is displayed.Return to the DefaultsThe registered adjustment values are returned to the factory defaults (all colours at 8 levels are returned to zero).Auto Colour Calibration Performs automatic colour correction when the colour in colour copies is off. The machine prints a test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is automatically corrected.After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic calibration. Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below (so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to the left). Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Execute] key.Before executing Auto Colour Calibration, check to see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the registration adjustment is incorrect, perform &quot;Registration Adjustment&quot;.If the colour is still off after performing Auto Colour Calibration, repeating Auto Colour Calibration once again may improve the colour.Back to top ';
 body[368]='08-042.htm';
dai[368]='PRINTER SETTINGS';
bun[368]='PRINTER SETTINGSPRINTER SETTINGSCondition SettingsPrinter condition settings are described below.Prohibit Notice Page PrintingDisables to print a notice page.Prohibit Test Page PrintingDisables to print the test page. If this setting is enabled, [System Settings] → [List Print (User)] → [Printer Test Page] in &quot;Setting mode&quot; cannot be used to print test pages.A4/Letter Size Auto ChangeWhen printing an 8-1/2 x 11" (A4) size image, this setting allows A4 (8-1/2 x 11") size paper to be used if 8-1/2 x 11" (A4) size paper is not loaded.Print Density LevelThis lightens or darkens the print density of colour and black and white images. The print density can be adjusted to five levels.CMYK Exposure AdjustmentAdjusts the density of cyan (C), magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K). The exposure of each colour can be adjusted to 17 levels.Bypass Tray SettingsThis is displayed only when a bypass tray is installed.ItemDescriptionEnable Detected Paper Size in Bypass TrayThis is used to prohibit printing when the paper size specified for a print job is different from the paper size inserted in the bypass tray.Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass TrayThis is used to prohibit printing when the paper size specified for a print job is different from the paper size inserted in the bypass tray.Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectWhen [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the bypass tray is excluded from the trays that can be selected. This is recommended when special paper is often placed in the bypass tray.Job Spool QueuingWhen this function is enabled, received print jobs are displayed in the spool queue of the job management screen. The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have not yet been analyDisabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisables the function for directly printing of a file on a USB memory device.Disabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisables direct printing from a network folder.Disabling sending while printingDisables the Image Send function during printing.Interface Settings These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine.Hexadecimal Dump ModeThis function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text. &quot;Hexadecimal Dump Mode&quot; allows you to check whether or not print data from the PC is being transmitted to the printerI/O TimeoutThe I/O timeout can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 999. The I/O timeout function temporarily breaks the connection if the set duration of time elapses without any data being received by the port. After the connection is broken, the pEnable USB PortEnables printing from the USB port.USB Port Emulation SwitchingIf the machine is connected using the USB port, select the emulated printer language. The following settings can be configured.AutoPost ScriptPCL The settings are the same as those of &quot;Network Port Emulation Switching&quot;. Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting &quot;Auto&quot;.Enable Network PortEnables printing from the network port.Network Port Emulation SwitchingThis setting is used to select the emulated printer language when the machine is connected by a network port. The following settings can be configured.AutoPost ScriptPCL The settings are the same as those of &quot;USB Port Emulation Switching&quot;. Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting &quot;Auto&quot;.Port Switching MethodSelects when port switching takes place.ItemDescriptionSwitch at End of JobThe port changes to auto selection when printing ends.Switch after I/O TimeoutWhen the time set by &quot;I/O Timeout&quot; elapses, the port changes to Auto Selection. The following two print ports are available on the machine:USB portNetwork portAuto Colour Calibration Performs automatic colour correction when the colour in colour copies is off. The machine prints a test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the colour is automatically corrected. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Execute] key. Before executing Auto Colour Calibration, check to see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the registration adjustment is incorrect, perform &quot;Registration Adjustment&quot;. If the colour is still off after performing Auto Colour Calibration, repeating Auto Colour Calibration once again may improve the colour.Back to top ';
 body[369]='08-043.htm';
dai[369]='IMAGE SEND SETTINGS';
bun[369]='IMAGE SEND SETTINGSIMAGE SEND SETTINGSOperation Settings - &quot;Default Settings&quot; Tab This tab is used to configure items that are related to the Default Settings for image send settings.Hold address for a while after scanning has been completed.Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates).Default Display SettingsSelect a base screen that appears when the [Image Send] key is tapped.E-mailNetwork FolderFTPData Entry (when the application integration module is installed)Address Book Default SelectionItemDescriptionApply Addresses of Sending Modes OnlyWhen an address is selected from the address book, only the addresses displayed in narrowing mode are applied.Category to be Displayed as DefaultSelect a category to be displayed with the default.NoneFrequent UseCategories 1 to 32Display all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently.Displays all destinations regardless of the displayed mode when this setting is enabled.Enlarging the Address BookAn enlarged address book list appears.Image OrientationSets the default image orientation.Initial Resolution SettingThe following settings are available for the default resolutions of common to scans and E-mail mode.Setting the &quot;Apply the Resolution Set when Stored&quot; checkbox to applies the resolution setting that was stored with the image when an image stored by document filing is used. It can be configured for each item.ItemDescriptionScanner Common100&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 dpi, 150&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;150 dpi, 200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpi, 300&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;300 dpi, 400&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi, 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpiE-mail100&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 dpi, 150&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;150 dpi, 200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpi, 300&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;300 dpi, 400&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi, 600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpiDefault Exposure SettingsThis is used to set the defauflt exposure settings for scanning a document in image send mode. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original (only in scan mode and USB memory device scan mode).The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPhotoPrinted PhotoMapNo original type can be selected if the Initial Exposure Settings is set to [Auto].SharpnessThis is used to emphasize the outline of image and show it clearly for scanning a document in image send mode. It can be set to any of 5 levels.ContrastThis is used to adjust the contrast of image for scanning a document in image send mode. It can be set to any of 5 levels.Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast SettingThis setting is used to require that the be tapped before the next address is entered when performing a broadcast transmission.When this setting is enabled, cannot be omitted even if the next address is entered with a one-touch key unless you tap .If a user attempts to enter the next address without tapping , a double-beep alarm will sound and the entry will be rejected.Scan Complete Sound SettingSets the scan complete sound to be heard when an original is scanned.Disable Switching of Display OrderDisables to change the order of display (search number order, ascending, descending).Once set, the display sequence is not changed. The display order will remain fixed at the order that is in effect when this setting is enabled.Default Verification Stamp (when the verification stamp unit is installed)Enable this to always affix the verification stamp on the original that has already been scanned using the automatic document feeder.Erase Width AdjustmentThis is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0&quot;) to 20 mm (1&quot;) in increments of 1 mm (1/8&quot;) for both Edge Clearance Width and Centre Clearance Width.Operation Settings - &quot;Enable/Disable Settings&quot; TabThis tab is used to configure items that are related to the Enable/Disable Settings for image send settings.Settings to Disable Registration Registration of addresses from the machine, Setting mode (Web version), and the PC can each be separately prohibited.Disable Registering Destination from Operation PanelDisables address control from the machine.Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)ContactsDisable Registering Destination on Web PageDisables to store the destination from Setting mode (Web version).Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)ContactsDisable Registration of ProgramDisables the use of address book for all programs.Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address SearchThis disables address control from the global address search.Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailDisabling of Forwarding via NetworkThis prohibits inbound routing.Settings to Disable Transmission These settings are used to disable the following transmission operations.Disable [Resend]This setting is used to prohibit the transmission that is activated by the [Send to addresses recently used] key on the action panel.Disable Selection from Address BookDisables the selection of destinations from the address book.Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPNetwork FolderDisable Direct EntryDisables the direct entry of destination address and others.Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailNetwork FolderScan Settings - &quot;Scan Settings&quot; Tab This tab is used to configure settings related to the image send function (Scan, etc.). The following settings are related to the scanner.Default Sender Set The information stored here is used if you do not specify [Reply to] in the Send Settings when performing Scan to E-mail.Sender NameEnter a default sender name (maximum of 20 characters).Reply E-mail AddressEnter a default reply address (maximum of 64 characters).If only the sender name is stored, it will not be used as sender information.Default Colour Mode Settings Select a default colour mode setting for both colour and black &amp; white in e-mail address, network folder and FTP. Specify &quot;Scanner Common&quot; unless E-mail is specified.Setting the &quot;Disable Change of Black &amp; White Setting in Auto Mode&quot; checkbox to disables black &amp; white settings from the base screen when the colour mode is set to Auto.Auto (Mono2, Greyscale*), Full Colour, Greyscale, Mono 2*When scanning a black and white original with the colour mode set to [Auto]Initial File Format Setting Specify the initial file format for sending a file in E-mail, Network Folder, or FTP. Specify &quot;Scanner Common&quot; unless E-mail is specified.File FormatPDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG*1, Compact PDF*2, 5, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*2, 5, Compact PDF/A*4, 5, Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*4, 5, Encrypt PDF, Encrypt/Compact PDF*3, 5, Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*3, 5, XPS*1&nbsp; When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [TIFF].*2&nbsp; When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF].*3&nbsp; When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [Encrypt PDF].*4&nbsp; When [Black &amp; White] is selected, the format is [PDF/A].*5&nbsp; When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installedB/WCompression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: Low, Medium, High.Bk Letter EmphasisSpecified Pages per FileGenerates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned.If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified.When &quot;JPEG&quot; is selected for the file type, [Specified Pages per File] cannot be selected.Compression Mode at Broadcasting Selects the compression mode for broadcasting using Scan to E-mail. The compression mode set here is used for all destinations regardless of their individual compression mode settings.Black &amp; WhiteMH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleLow, Medium, HighBk Letter EmphasisMaximum Size of E-mail Attachments To prevent the transmission of excessively large image files by Scan to E-mail, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image fileIf you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Network Folder) A limit can be set for the size of files that can be sent by Scan to FTP, and Scan to Network Folder. Limits that can be selected are 50 MB, 150 MB, and 300 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit, theIf you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].During broadcasting that includes e-mail destinations, the limit set in &quot;Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments&quot; precedes.Bcc SettingEnable BccEnable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery. Displays the [Bcc] key on the image send address book screen.Display Bcc Address on the Job Management ScreenDisplays Bcc addresses on the job management screen and address list tab.Disable Scan Function Specify this to disable remote PC scanning.Scan Settings - &quot;Default Address&quot; Tab A default address can be stored that makes it possible to transmit by simply pressing the [Start] key without specifying an address. Set the [Default Address Setting] to [Enable] to specify the default address.Only a single default address can be set for Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Network Folder.Add Selected Select an address that is to be used by default.Apply E-mail address of the user for login.The E-mail address of the login user is set as the default address.Select the following items based on your intended use.ItemDescriptionAllow CancelYou can cancel the E-mail address of the login user that is entered automatically. To cancel, tap the [Cancel] key on the action panel. Apply Home Directory of the User for LoginWhen this setting is selected, the default address is the home directory of the user that logged in.When the user logs in by internal authentication (authentication by the machine), the home directory setting of the user that logged in is configured in &quot;User Registration&quot; in &quot;User List&quot; in &quot;User Control&quot;. When the user logs Select From Address BookTo display you desired address book, narrow the search by alphabet or category with the list of [Index]. You can select the number of addresses that are to be displayed at a time with [Display Items].When you select the desired address name and tap the [Store] key, the selected address can be selected for the default address.Back to top ';
 body[370]='08-044.htm';
dai[370]='DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGS';
bun[370]='DOCUMENT FILING SETTINGSDOCUMENT FILING SETTINGSDocument Filing Settings Document filing settings are described below.Default Mode SettingsSpecifies which mode, Sharing or Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a file.Sort Method SettingSelects an order of display files stored in the Main Folder, Custom Folder, and Quick File Folder. Select one of the following settings:File NameUser NameDateAdministrator Authority SettingFor files and user folders that have a password, this setting allows the administrator password to be entered instead of the password when accessing the file or folder.Administrator can change passwords as needed.Delete All Quick FilesDeletes all files from the Quick File folder except for protected files.ItemDescriptionDelete NowTap this key to start deletion of all files immediately.Delete quick files at power upThis is used to automatically delete all files in the Quick File Folder (with the exception of protected files) when the [POWER] button is turned &quot;On&quot;.Image OrientationChanges the image orientation.Default Colour Mode SettingsSelects the default settings for black &amp; white and colour when Scan to HDD is used.The following settings can be configured.AutoFull Colour2 ColourGreyscaleMono2Default Exposure SettingsDefault exposure settings for document filing can be configured.Select [Auto] or [Manual].If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original.The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPhotoPrinted PhotoMapNo original type can be selected if the Initial Exposure Settings is set to [Auto].Initial Resolution SettingsOne of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.100&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 dpi150&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;150 dpi200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpi300&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;300 dpi400&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpiScan Complete Sound SettingAdjusts the volume of the beep that sounds when scanning ends. You can stop to sound it.Default Output TraySelects the default output tray for printing a file stored by Scan to HDD.The items that appear will vary depending the machine configuration.Disabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintWhen a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled.This function prevents date inconsistencies between the original data, output data and others.Batch Print SettingsWhen printing files by batch printing, this setting is used to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.Erase Width AdjustmentThis is used to set the default erase width for erase function.Specify a value from 0 mm (0&quot;) to 20 mm (1&quot;) in increments of 1 mm (1/8&quot;) for both Edge Clearance Width and Centre Clearance Width.Card Shot SettingsThis is used to set the default original size for the card shot function.Specify a value from 25 mm (1&quot;) to 210 mm (8-1/2&quot;) in increments of 1 mm (1/8&quot;) for both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the original.When you set the [Fit to Store Size] checkbox to , the [Fit to Store Size] key is always displayed on the card shot screen.Setting of store/delete after file printSelect whether or not to save or delete a file after printing.Scan to External Memory Device SettingDefault Colour Mode SettingsThe default colour mode can be set.Setting the &quot;Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode&quot; checkbox to disables black &amp; white settings from the base screen when the colour mode is set to Auto.Auto (Mono2, Greyscale*), Full Colour, Greyscale, Mono 2* When scanning a black and white original with the colour mode set to [Auto]Initial File Format SettingYou can set the initial file format to be saved in an external memory device.File FormatPDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG*1, Compact PDF*2, 5, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*2, 5, Compact PDF/A*4, Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*4, Encrypt PDF, Encrypt/Compact PDF*3, 5, Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*3, 5, XPS*1&nbsp; When [B/W] is selected, the format is [TIFF].*2&nbsp; When [B/W] is selected, the format is [PDF].*3&nbsp; When [B/W] is selected, the format is [Encrypt PDF].*4&nbsp; When [B/W] is selected, the format is [PDF/A].*5&nbsp; When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installedB/WCompression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: Low, Medium, High.Bk Letter EmphasisSpecified Pages per FileGenerates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned.If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified.When &quot;JPEG&quot; is selected for the file type, [Specified Pages per File] cannot be selected.Default Exposure SettingsDefault exposure settings for storing an original in an external memory device can be configured.Select [Auto] or [Manual].If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.Default Original Image TypeSelect the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original.The following settings can be configured.Text/Printed PhotoText/PhotoTextPrinted PhotoPhotoMapNo original type can be selected if the Initial Exposure Settings is set to [Auto].Initial Resolution SettingsOne of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.100&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;100 dpi150&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;150 dpi200&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;200 dpi300&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;300 dpi400&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;400 dpi600&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;600 dpiDisable Storing to External Memory DeviceStoring to external memory device is disabled.Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing You can set the initial file format of public PDF that is created when each job is executed.B/WCompression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)Colour/GreyscaleCompression Ratio: Low, Medium, HighCopy, Printer, Scanner, Scan to HDDSelect [Enable] and select the desired resolution. Set the [Apply the resolution at job execution] checkbox to to create a PDF for PC browsing with the resolution when each job is executed.Document Output Options The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored.ItemDescriptionPrintFor each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed.Scan SendFor each mode, select whether or not transmission of stored files is allowed.The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.Automatic Deletion of File Settings Time and folder settings can be configured to have files in specified folders (stored by document filing) automatically deleted at a specified time. Up to 3 settings can be stored to be automatically deleted.The procedure for using this function is as follows:(1) Select one of [Setting 1] to [Setting 3].(2) Set the time and date of automatic deletion.(3) Select the desired folder.(4) Specify whether or not to delete protected files and confidential files.(5) Enable the stored settings.ItemDescriptionScheduleSelect an automatic deletion cycle.Every Day: Auto deletion every day at the specified time.Every Week: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week.Every Month: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month.FoldersTo select the folder separately, select [Folder Select] and select the desired folder. To select all folders, including the folder currently being created, select [All Folders (Including folders registered hereafter)].Delete Protected FileEnable this setting to include protected files in the deletion.Delete Confidential FileEnable this setting to include confidential files in the deletion.Delete NowWhen this is executed with a folder selected, all files in the folder will be immediately deleted regardless of the date and time setting.Delete files at a specified time. (If this option is not selected, files are deleted when the machine has restarted in the auto power shut-off mode.)Files are deleted at a specified time even when Auto Power Shut-Off is enabled. If the checkbox is set to , files are deleted when the machine restarts after auto power shut-off.Back to top';
 body[371]='08-045.htm';
dai[371]='LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)';
bun[371]='LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)LIST PRINT (ADMINISTRATOR)List Print (Administrator) You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to.ItemDescriptionAdministrator Settings ListLists of the administrator settings for the following modes can be printed.CopyPrinterImage SendDocument FilingSecurityCommonAll Administrator Settings ListImage Sending Activity ReportThe following Image Sending Activity Reports can each be separately printed.Image Sending Activity Report (Scan)Data Receive/Forward ListThe following lists showing reception settings and forwarding settings can be printed.Document Admin ListWeb Settings ListThis prints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode (Web version).Metadata Set ListPrints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode (Web version).To specify One Sided or Two Sided Print, select &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [System Settings] → [Device Control] → [List Prints].Back to top ';
 body[372]='08-046.htm';
dai[372]='SHARP OSA SETTINGS';
bun[372]='SHARP OSA SETTINGSSHARP OSA SETTINGSSharp OSA SettingsThe following settings are related to Sharp OSA.You can use the Sharp OSA Settings if the machine has an External Account Module or an Application Communication Module.External Account SettingExternal Account ControlWhen this setting is enabled, the machine enters external totaling mode and the totaling function can be used via an external account application.Enable Authentication by External ServerWhen this setting is enabled, the machine enters external authentication mode. Access to the machine is controlled by the external application.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot; in &quot;BEFORE USING THE MACHINE&quot;.USB Driver Settings When installing the external account module or application communication module, set the driver of the USB device to be connected.External KeyboardSelect whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used.Card Reader/WriterSelect whether the internal or external driver for the IC card reader/writer driver is used.USB MemorySelect whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used.Level of EncryptionSelect the level of encryption for communication using the external driver. Select from none, AES-128 or AES-256.When the external driver is selected, the connected USB device is treated as not connected and cannot be used.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.To check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine, see &quot;USB-DEVICE CHECK&quot;.Job Priority Preference Set the playing speed of the animation in Sharp OSA applications. The following settings can be configured.Priority PrintingHalf TonePriority Animation PlayIf the [LCD Animation Playback] or [Balanced] is selected, the job (or print) process speed of the machine may drop. Select [Priority Printing] to increase the process speed of print jobs.Back to top ';
 body[373]='08-047.htm';
dai[373]='ENABLE / DISABLE SETTINGS';
bun[373]='ENABLE / DISABLE SETTINGSThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the inserter.ENABLE / DISABLE SETTINGSEnable/Disable Settings The following settings enables or disables certain functions.Printer Condition SettingsDisable Blank Page PrintDisables to print a blank page.User ControlDisabling of Printing by Invalid UserPrinting by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode (Web version), canOperation SettingsCancel Auto Clear TimerDisables the Auto Clear mode.Disabling of Job Priority OperationDisables raising priority for printing and sending jobs from the job management screen.Disabling of Bypass PrintingDisables bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the paper required for the job is not in any of the trays). * This option is ignored when paper runs out during the job.Disable Auto Key RepeatDisables the Auto Key Repeat function.Disabling of Clock AdjustmentDisables the date and time from being changed.Disabling of Covers/Inserts ModeDisables the use of the covers and inserts function.Device ControlDisabling of Document FeederUse this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.)Disabling of DuplexThis is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions.Disabling of Large Capacity CassetteThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the large capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of Tray Settings/Paper SettingsDisables the tray settings.Disabling of FinisherThis setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions.Disabling of Bypass-TrayThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the bypass tray. Disabling of InserterDisabling of OffsetDisables an offset.Disabling of StaplerThis setting is used to prohibit use of the stapler, such as when the stapler of the finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Disabling of PunchThis setting is used to prohibit the use of punch, such as when the punch module of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.Disabling of Folding UnitThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the folding unit.Disabling of Trimming ModuleThis setting is used to prohibit the use of the trimming module. Disabling of Stacker 1This setting is used to disable the stack tray of the primary high capacity stacker.Disabling of Stacker 2This setting is used to disable the stack tray of the secondary high capacity stacker.Disabling of Colour ModeWhen a colour-related problem has occurred and printing is not possible, the use of colour mode can be temporarily prohibited. Black &amp; white printing will still be allowed. Black &amp; white printing will still be possible. Once this setting is enabled, only a service technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact your dealer or authorised service representative to have a service technician cancel the settings and resolve the problem.Disabling of Master Machine ModeThis setting is used to prohibit tandem transmission. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)Disabling of Slave Machine ModeThis setting is used to prohibit tandem reception. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)Copy SettingsDisable Registration of ProgramDisables the program registration.Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex CopyDisables the use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies. The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of onDisabling of Auto Paper SelectionDisables the Auto Paper Selection function. When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document feeder does not take place.Disabling Registration of Custom ImageDisables the registration of custom images.Disabling sending while copyingDisables the Image Send function during copy.Printer SettingsProhibit Notice Page PrintingDisables to print a notice page.Prohibit Test Page PrintingDisables to print the test page. When this setting is enabled, &quot;Printer Test Page&quot; in Setting mode cannot be used to print test pages.Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper SelectWhen [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the bypass tray is excluded from the trays that can be selected. This is recommended when special paper is often placed in the bypass tray.Disabling of USB Memory Direct PrintDisables the function for directly printing of a file on a USB memory device.Disabling of Network Folder Direct PrintDisables direct printing from a network folder.Disabling sending while printingDisables the Image Send function during printing.Image Send SettingsDisable Switching of Display OrderDisables a change of display sequence (search number order, ascending, descending) in the address book and others. If set, the display is not sorted even when you tap the tab on the address book screen. The display orderDisable Scan FunctionIf the [PC Scan] checkbox is set to , the PC Scan function is disabled.Disable Registering Destination from Operation PanelDisables address control from the machine. Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)ContactsDisable Registering Destination on Web PageDisables to store the destination from Setting mode (Web version). Configure the setting for each of the following items:Group (Direct Entry)Group (Address Book)ContactsDisable All Program Item RegistrationDisables the use of address book for all programs.Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address SearchThis disables address control from the global address search. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailDisabling of Forwarding via NetworkThis prohibits inbound routing.Settings to Disable Transmission These settings are used to disable the following transmission operations.Disable Selection from Address BookDisables the selection of destinations from the address book. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPNetwork FolderDisable Direct EntryDisables the direct entry of destination address and others. Configure the setting for each of the following items:E-mailFTPNetwork FolderDocument Filing SettingsDisabling Text/Stamp printing at ReprintWhen a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled. This function prevents date inconsistencies between the original data, output data and others.Batch Print SettingsWhen printing files by batch printing, this setting is used to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.The Enable/Disable Settings control the same parameters as the enable/disable settings in other settings. The settings are linked together (changing one setting changes the other).Disable Storing to External Memory DeviceStoring to external memory device is disabled.Security Settings This setting is used to set the security enhancement functions.Hidden Pattern Print SettingDisables the direct entry of background pattern and others.Back to top ';
 body[374]='08-048.htm';
dai[374]='DATA BACKUP';
bun[374]='DATA BACKUPDATA BACKUPStorage Backup Address book information and user information stored in the machine can be saved to and retrieved from a USB memory device.Export Settings Exports data to a USB memory device. Select the appropriate data from the [Export Settings Type] and tap the [Execute] key to export the data. You can set a password if needed.Import Settings Imports data, that you have saved in the USB memory device by &quot;Export&quot; option, into the machine. Specify the data you want to refer and tap the [Execute] key. If a password was specified during the export operation, enter that password.Device Cloning Saves the machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines.Export Settings Exports data to a USB memory device. Select the appropriate data from the [Export Settings Type] and tap the [Execute] key to export the data. You can set a password if needed.Import Settings Imports data, that you have saved in the USB memory device by &quot;Export&quot; option, into the machine. Specify the data you want to refer and tap the [Execute] key. If a password was specified during the export operation, enter that password. The following data is not copied when device cloning is performed: List print Count and device status display items IP address of the machine, device name, administrator password, sender names for image send, and other information that is specific to the machine The settings specific to each hardware such as screen contrast, colour adjustment, and saddle stitch position adjustmentAddress Book Forward Forwards the address book of this machine directly to another multi-function peripheral.Contact your dealer or authorised service representative for advice on the machine for data importing.This function can be enabled when a USB memory device is installed.This function cannot be used while Setting mode is in use, while a job is being executed, or when there is a reserved job.Back to top ';
 body[375]='08-049.htm';
dai[375]='PRODUCT KEY';
bun[375]='PRODUCT KEYPRODUCT KEYProduct Key You must enter the machine product key to use the following advanced functions.Tapping or changes the display position of the numeric keys.Serial NumberThis displays the serial number that is required to obtain the product key.Barcode Font KitEnter the product key of the barcode font kit.E-Mail Alert and StatusEnter the product key of e-mail alert and status.Application Integration ModuleEnter the product key of the application integration module. Application Communication ModuleEnter the product key of the application communication module. External Account ModuleEnter the product key of the external account module.XPS expansion kitEnter the product key of the XPS expansion kit.For the product key to be entered, contact your dealer.Back to top ';
 body[376]='08-050.htm';
dai[376]='STORING / CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGS';
bun[376]='STORING / CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGSSTORING / CALLING OF SYSTEM SETTINGSStoring/Calling of System Settings You can reset the current Setting mode settings to the previously stored settings or to the factory default settings.Restore Factory Defaults Restores the current settings (you have selected in Setting mode) to the factory default settings. If you wish to create a record of the current settings before restoring, print the current settings by selecting [System Settings] in &quot;Setting mode (aWhen settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Store Current Configuration Stores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory.The stored settings will be retained even if the [POWER] button is turned off. To retrieve the stored settings, use &quot;Restore Configuration&quot;.Items not storedNetwork Settings: These are not stored as unexpected settings may cause damage to the network.Product Keys: Product Keys are not stored as reissue of keys may be necessary.Restore ConfigurationRestores the settings stored with &quot; Store Current Configuration&quot;.The current settings are replaced by the retrieved settings.Back to top ';
 body[377]='08-051.htm';
dai[377]='QUICK SETTINGS';
bun[377]='QUICK SETTINGSQUICK SETTINGSQuick Settings Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.DHCP/BOOTPUse this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the &quot;TCP/IP&quot;.If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.IPv4 AddressEnter the IP address of the machine.Subnet MaskEnter the IP subnet mask.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.IPv6 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.IPv6Enable this setting.DHCPv6Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to enter an IP address.Manual Address/Prefix LengthEnter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the &quot;TCP/IP&quot; below.In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol.If DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.Network Name SettingsDevice NameEnter a device name.Domain NameEnter the domain name.DNS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary DNS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary DNS server.Domain NameEnter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.SMTP SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.Reply E-mail AddressIf data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server. Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails. Usually, enter the e-mail address of the system administrator.Enable SSLIf is selected, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command.This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command.To allow SSL communication, set the &quot;Port Number&quot; to the same port number as the normal SMTP.SMTP AuthenticationIf is set, the SMTP server authentication is carried out.User NameEnter the user name.PasswordTo change the password, set the [Change Password] checkbox to and enter the new password.Connection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server.LDAP SettingsNameEnter the address book name.Default Address SettingEnters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree.Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = EveryoneEntries must be separated by semicolons or commas.LDAP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server.User NameEnter the account name for LDAP setting.PasswordTo change the password, set the [Change Password] checkbox to and enter the new password.AuthenticationSelect the authentication server from the drop-down list.KDC ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.RealmEnter the Kerberos realm.Enable SSLIf is set, the SSL encryption communication is enabled.Connection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the LDAP server.Public Folder / NAS Setting Set each option to [Prohibited] if the storage is not used.Back to top ';
 body[378]='08-052.htm';
dai[378]='GENERAL SETTINGS';
bun[378]='GENERAL SETTINGSGeneral SettingsGENERAL SETTINGSGeneral Settings Select the general network settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Print Status on StartupSelect this option to print out the status information during startup.Network SettingsDevice NameEnter a device name.Domain NameEnter the domain name.CommentEnter a comment.Reset the NIC This returns all &quot;Network Settings&quot; to the factory default settings.Back to top ';
 body[379]='08-053.htm';
dai[379]='PROTOCOL SETTINGS';
bun[379]='PROTOCOL SETTINGSPROTOCOL SETTINGS&quot;TCP/IP&quot; Tab To use the machine on a TCP/IP network, this setting must be enabled.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.IPv4 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.DHCP/BOOTPUse this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the &quot;TCP/IP&quot;.If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.RARPSet this option to use the RARP protocol.IPv4 AddressEnter the IP address of the machine.Subnet MaskEnter the IP subnet mask.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.IPv6 Settings When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.IPv6Enable this setting.DHCPv6Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address.Manual Address/Prefix LengthEnter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine.Default GatewayEnter the default gateway address.If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the &quot;TCP/IP&quot; below.In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol.If DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible.Ping Command Checks if the machine can communicate with the PC of the network.Specify the IP address of the desired PC and tap the [Execute] key. A message indicating a response by the PC or not is displayed.&quot;NetWare&quot; TabWhen settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.NetWare SettingsNetWareTo use the machine on a NetWare network, this setting must be enabled.Frame TypeSelect a frame type.Settings: 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, ETHER-IIOperation ModeSelect an operation mode.Settings: PSERVER, RPRINTERPrinter NameEnter the printer name.PSERVER SettingsPrint Server NameEnter a print server name.Login PasswordEnter the login password.To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Check IntervalEnter a job check interval.Bindery ModeSet this option to use the Bindery mode.File Server Name 1 to 8Enter a file server name.NDS TreeEnter the NDS tree name.NDS ContextEnter the NDS context.RPRINTER SettingsPrint Server Name 1 to 8Enter a print server name.Job TimeoutEnters a job timeout.&quot;EtherTalk&quot; TabWhen settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.EtherTalk SettingsEtherTalkTo use the machine on an EtherTalk network, this setting must be enabled.Zone NameEnter a zone name.Printer NameEnter the printer name.&quot;NetBIOS&quot; Tab When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.NetBIOS SettingsNBT/WINSTo use the machine on a NetBIOS network, this setting must be enabled.Back to top ';
 body[380]='08-054.htm';
dai[380]='SERVICE SETTINGS';
bun[380]='SERVICE SETTINGSSERVICE SETTINGS&quot;DNS&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure DNS settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.DNS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary DNS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary DNS server.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.This time is used until the connection to the DNS server is established according to the standard specifications.Domain NameEnter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.Dynamic DNS UpdatingSet this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server.Updating IntervalEnter an interval to update the DNS server.&quot;WINS&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure WINS settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.WINS SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address of primary WINS server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address of secondary WINS server.Scope IDEnter the scope ID.&quot;SMTP&quot; TabUse this tab to configure SMTP settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.SMTP SettingsPrimary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.Secondary ServerEnter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 25.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. This value is used for connection to the SMTP server and for data transmission according to the e-mail system specifications.Reply E-mail AddressIf data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server.Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails.Usually, enter the e-mail address of the system administrator.Enable SSLIf is selected, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command.This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command.To allow SSL communication, set the &quot;Port Number&quot; to the same port number as the normal SMTP.SMTP AuthenticationIf is set, the SMTP server authentication is carried out.If you use the Kerberos authentication, set the KDC server, port number, and realm on the Kerberos authentication settings page.User NameEnter the user name.PasswordEnter the password.To change the password, set [Change Password] to .POP before SMTPIf is set, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication.POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.POP Authentication: If is set, the authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User Name: Enter the user name for POP before SMTP communication.Password: Enter the password required for POP before SMTP communication. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Enable SSL: If set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled.This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command.To allow SSL communication, set the &quot;Port Number&quot; to the POP over SSL communication port number.To allow POP over TLS communication, set the &quot;Port Number&quot; to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication.Connection TestTap the [Execute] key to test the connection to the SMTP server.&quot;SNMP&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure SNMP settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.SNMP v1 SettingsSNMP v1 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv1 settings.Access MethodSet an access method.GET CommunityEnter the GET community name to fetch the device information using SNMP.SET CommunityEnter the SET community name required for SNMP setting.To change the SET community, set .TRAP CommunityEnter the community name to be used for the SNMP TRAP sent from the device.TRAP Target AddressEnter the IP address of the destination computer for SNMP TRAP communication.SNMP v3 SettingsSNMP v3 SettingsSet this option to use the SNMPv3 settings.User NameEnter the user name.Authentication KeyEnter the authentication key.Privacy KeyEnter the privacy key.Context NameThe context name is displayed.&quot;Kerberos&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure Kerberos settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Kerberos Authentication SettingsKDC ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the Kerberos authentication server. The default setting is port 88.RealmEnter the Kerberos realm.&quot;SNTP&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure SNTP settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.SNTP SettingsSNTPSet this option to use the SNTP protocol.SNTP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 123.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds.Synchronous IntervalEnter an interval to synchronize to the SNTP server.Synchronize Upon StartTo establish synchronization during machine startup, set to .Synchronize NowWhen tapped, the machine is synchronized with the SNTP server time.&quot;mDNS&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure mDNS settings.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.mDNS SettingsmDNSSet this option to use the mDNS settings.Service NameEnter a service name.Domain NameEnter the domain name.Priority ServiceSelect a service you use with the priority.Back to top ';
 body[381]='08-055.htm';
dai[381]='PRINT PORT SETTINGS';
bun[381]='PRINT PORT SETTINGSPRINT PORT SETTINGS&quot;LPD&quot; Tab Enter a profile expiring date.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.LPD SettingsLPDSet this option to use LPD.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 0 seconds.Use BannerSet this option to use the banner. The default setting is [Disable].&quot;RAW&quot; TabUse this tab to configure Raw print.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Raw Print SettingsRaw PrintSet this option to use RAW printing. The default setting is [Enable].Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 9100.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds.Use BidirectionalTo use bidirectional communication, set to .&quot;WSD&quot; Tab Use this tab to configure WSD print.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.WSD SettingsWSD PrintSet this option to use WSD printing.Use Multicast DiscoverySet this option to use multicast discovery.Back to top ';
 body[382]='08-056.htm';
dai[382]='LDAP SETTINGS';
bun[382]='LDAP SETTINGSLDAP SETTINGSLDAP Settings To enable the LDAP settings, select [Enable]. When [Disable] is selected, the LDAP Settings are disabled.Adding or editing a Global Address BookWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the setting screen for a global address book appears. When you tap a global address book name, the registration screen for that global address book appears. You can now edit it.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionNameEnter the address book name.Default Address SettingEnters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas.LDAP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server.Server TypeSelect the Default or Custom from the service type list. The default setting is Default.User ID PropertySet the user ID property. The default setting is &quot;uid&quot;.LDAP Search PropertySet the LDAP search property. The default setting is &quot;cn&quot;.E-mail Address SearchSet the e-mail address search. The default setting is &quot;mail&quot;.Search Open KeySets the open key search. The default setting is &quot;userCertificate&quot;.Pages Limit GroupSet the Storing Page Limit Group Search. The default setting is &quot;pagelimit&quot;.Authority GroupSet the Storing Authority Group Search. The default setting is &quot;authority&quot;.Favourite Operation GroupSet the Favourite Operation Group Search. The default setting is &quot;favourite&quot;.My FolderSet the My Folder Search. The default setting is &quot;myfolder&quot;.Card IDSets the card ID search. The default setting is &quot;cardid&quot;. Home Directory PathEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the home directory path.Use Login Name And Password at User Authentication.Set whether the login name / password for user authentication is used for the user name / password for home directory path authentication.User NameEnter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication.PasswordEnter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home directory path authentication.Custom Property 1 to 10Enter each custom property.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 389.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds.User NameEnter the account name for LDAP setting.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Authentication TypeSelect the authentication server from the drop-down list.Bind PrefixSet the Bind prefix. The default setting is &quot;uid&quot;.Server UsageSet the server application. Set the address book and user authentication.Enable SSLEnables the SSL encryption communication.Connection TestTap the [Execute] button, and the connection test is executed and its result is displayed.Deleting a Global Address BookTo delete a selected global address book, set the checkbox at the left of its name to and tap the [Delete] key.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Back to top ';
 body[383]='08-057.htm';
dai[383]='PUBLIC FOLDER / NAS SETTING';
bun[383]='PUBLIC FOLDER / NAS SETTINGPUBLIC FOLDER / NAS SETTINGPublic Folder / NAS Setting The &quot;public&quot; and &quot;shared&quot; folders of the MFP can be accessed as network folders from a network PC.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionpublicIf the [Use of Storage] is set to [Allowed], you can create a document filing data in the &quot;public&quot; folder.sharedIf the [Use of Storage] is set to [Allowed], you can use the &quot;shared&quot; folder as a network folder.Back to top ';
 body[384]='08-058.htm';
dai[384]='PROXY SETTING';
bun[384]='PROXY SETTINGPROXY SETTINGProxy Setting A network access via the proxy server is allowed.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionProxy Server AddressEnter the proxy server address.User NameEnter a user name to access the proxy server.PasswordEnter a password to allow access to the proxy server.Port NumberEnter the proxy server port number.Address without Using ProxySpecify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the Web browsing feature and Sharp OSA. When you enter multiple addresses, separate them with semicolons (;).Back to top ';
 body[385]='08-060.htm';
dai[385]='HTTP Access Settings';
bun[385]='HTTP Access SettingsHTTP ACCESS SETTINGSHTTP Access Settings The following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version).Number of Users who can Log-in at the Same TimeEnter a number of users who can access Setting mode (Web version) simultaneously.Auto Logout TimeEnter a time period to automatically log out after when no communication has been occurring with the machine.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.Back to top ';
 body[386]='08-061.htm';
dai[386]='VIEW LOGIN USER';
bun[386]='VIEW LOGIN USERVIEW LOGIN USERView Login User The user or users who have logged in to this machine are displayed.Current Login UsersThe currently logged in users are displayed.Log Out All UsersThe current login users are logged out.When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. To restart the machine, see &quot;TURNING ON OR OFF THE POWER AND RESTARTING THE MACHINE&quot;.It can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.Back to top ';
 body[387]='08-062.htm';
dai[387]='TEXT / IMAGE PRINTING';
bun[387]='TEXT / IMAGE PRINTINGTEXT / IMAGE PRINTING Text Settings (Stamp) Lists preset text that can be used by the Character Print function in the copy mode.Adding or editing pre-set text used on the print menuWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the pre-set text registration screen appears. Up to 30 network folders can be registered. When you tap a pre-set text name, the registration screen of this print menu appears. You can now edit it.Deleting a pre-set text used on the print menuTo delete a selected stamp, set the checkbox at the right of &quot;No.&quot; to and tap the [Delete] key.Custom StampLists the currently stored custom stamps. When you tap a file name on the list, the details of the custom stamp you tapped appear.Editing a Custom StampWhen you tap a custom stamp name, the registration screen for that custom stamp appears. You can now edit it.List of items for editingItemDescriptionFile NameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File PropertyTo protect the file, tap the checkbox to set to .Colour InformationSizeDateResolutionData SizeDisplays the file information.Deleting a Custom StampTo delete a selected custom stamp, set the checkbox at the left of its name to and tap the [Delete] key.Custom Watermark Lists the currently stored custom watermarks. When you tap a file name on the list, the details of the custom watermark you tapped appear.Editing a Custom WatermarkWhen you tap a custom watermark name, the registration screen for that custom watermark appears. You can now edit it.List of items for editingItemDescriptionFile NameEnter a file name using a maximum of 30 characters.File PropertyTo protect the file, tap the checkbox to set to .Colour InformationSizeDateResolutionData SizeDisplays the file information.Deleting a Custom WatermarkTo delete a selected custom watermark, set the checkbox at the left of its name to and tap the [Delete] key.Back to top ';
 body[388]='08-063.htm';
dai[388]='NETWORK SCANNER SETTINGS';
bun[388]='NETWORK SCANNER SETTINGSNETWORK SCANNER SETTINGSSubject Name Settings The subjects that can be set for E-mail transmission are listed.Adding or editing a subjectWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the subject registration screen appears. When you tap a subject, the registration screen for that subject appears. You can now edit it.Deleting a subjectTo delete a selected stamp, set the checkbox at the right of &quot;No.&quot; to and tap the [Delete] key.File Name SettingsAdding or editing a file nameWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the file name registration screen appears. Up to 30 network folders can be registered. When you tap a file name, the registration screen for that file name appears. You can now edit the stamp.Deleting a file nameTo delete a selected file name, set the checkbox at the right of &quot;No.&quot; to and tap the [Delete] key.Message Body Settings The message body text that can be set for E-mail transmission is listed.Adding or editing a message bodyWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the message body registration screen appears. Up to 30 network folders can be registered. When you tap a title of a message body, the registration screen for that message body appears. You can now edit it.Deleting a message bodyTo delete a selected message body, set the checkbox at the right of &quot;No.&quot; to and tap the [Delete] key.Administration Settings Administration settings related to the network scanner functions can be configured.Advanced SettingsIf the [Disable Selection of Reply-to.] is set to , you cannot select a reply-to address and the return destination of both &quot;Machine Address&quot; and &quot;Reply Address&quot; are used.File NamingAdds a character string of the checked box to the file name of the scanned image data.When sending data to the same destination two or more times, set the [Unique Identifier] to not to overwrite the previously sent data by the new one.Default SubjectEnter a subject of e-mail to send it during network scanner E-mail transmission.Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message BodyWhen an e-mail is sent, the job information is added to the mail text automatically.Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message BodyWhen an e-mail is sent, the mail footer is added automatically.Mail Footer RegistrationEnter the text to be printed as the mail footer.Back to top ';
 body[389]='08-066.htm';
dai[389]='DOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTION';
bun[389]='DOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONDOCUMENT ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONDocument Administration Function All of the transmitted image data (sent or received by facsimile or e-mail transfer) can be forwarded to any destination.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionForward Send DataSet a destination to forward the send data.E-mail/Network Folder/FTPSelect a forwarding type of the send image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book.You can enter an e-mail directly.Format: Select a format for data forwarding.Release SettingsReleases the destination settings.File FormatSelect a format for data forwarding.Back to top ';
 body[390]='08-067.htm';
dai[390]='METADATA ENTRY';
bun[390]='METADATA ENTRYMETADATA ENTRYMetadata Entry If the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications.The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata set or edit a stored metadata set.To enable the Metadata Delivery, select [Enable] in the [Metadata Entry]. When [Disable] is selected, the Metadata Delivery is disabled.Storing and editing metadata setsWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the metadata set registration screen appears. Up to 10 network folders can be registered.When you tap a metadata set name, the registration screen for that metadata set appears. You can now edit it.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionMetadata Set NameEnter a metadata name.Metadata Delivery DestinationSelect a destination where you wish to send the image and metadata file.Allow Custom FilenamesEnable or disable to edit the name of image file and XML file to be sent by the metadata send job.Address Type Allowing Metadata EntrySet the destination information to be used for metadata transmission.NameEnter a metadata name to be displayed on the touch panel.XML Tag NameEnter an XML tag name to be contained in the metadata set.Entry TypeDirect entry: Allows direct entry of each metadata from the soft keyboard or the numeric keypad.Metadata list: Allows a selection of metadata from the previously entered data list. You must enter optional values for metadata selection in the input area. Entries must be separated by commas or semicolons. Each option can be comprised of up to 70 charaInitial entry by default: Uses a default value as the first value of the entered metadata list.Expand Metadata AutomaticallyWhen the machine generates metadata automatically, the &quot;metadataSetName&quot;, &quot;userLoginId&quot; (if user authentication is used), &quot;pageSize&quot;, and &quot;imageMode&quot; are added to the metadata.To Be Used as DefaultThe current metadata set is used as the default.Deleting metadata setsTo delete a selected metadata set, set the metadata set checkbox to and tap [Delete] key.Back to top ';
 body[391]='08-068.htm';
dai[391]='EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS SETTINGS';
bun[391]='EXTERNAL APPLICATIONS SETTINGSEXTERNAL APPLICATIONS SETTINGSStandard Application Settings The standard application settings can be added and controlled.Adding or editing standard applicationsWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the registration screen for standard applications appears. Up to 8 network folders can be registered. When you tap a standard application name, the registration screen for that standard application appears. You can now edit iList of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionApplication NameEnter an application name.Application UI AddressSet an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.Expansion PlatformSet this option to use the expansion platform.Use Proxy ServerSet this option to use the proxy server.Data SizeSet the screen size of application on the X and Y coordinates.Display FormatSet the screen of application.Deleting standard applicationsTo delete a selected standard application, set the standard application checkbox to and tap the [Delete] key.External Accounting Application Settings An external account application can be added and controlled. Set the server name where you have installed the external accounting application.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionExternal Account ControlSpecifies whether or not to enable the totaling function using an external account application. If enabled, always enter the application name or Web service address.Set Authentication Server (Server 1)If the server is set, the external authentication mode is selected. Any access to the MFP is controlled by the application that you set on this page. If set, always enter the application name, application UI address, or Web service address of server 1. IfEnable Image Job LogThis item is displayed when you enter a product key of the &quot;Sharp Document Recorder&quot;.Server 1 to 4Select a server to enable it.Application NameEnter an application name.Application UI AddressEnter the URL of the login screen to be accessed first when the machine is turned on.Web Service AddressEnter the URL of the server or computer which sends commands and events by XML/SOAP protocol.TimeoutEnter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds.Back to top ';
 body[392]='08-069.htm';
dai[392]='WEB BROWSER SETTINGS';
bun[392]='WEB BROWSER SETTINGSWEB BROWSER SETTINGSWeb Browser Settings Configure settings related to a Web browser functions.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionHow to handle Cookie?Select how to handle a cookie if it is in a Web page.Disable URL EntryPrevents users from directly entering URL addresses.Disable Additional Edit of FavouritePrevents users from adding or editing favourites.Disable Registration/Edit of Home PagePrevents users from registering or editing an URL address of the home page.Disable Print from Web Browse ModePrevents users from printing from a Web browser or a PDF viewer that is displayed in a Web browser.Disable display of HistoryPrevents users from viewing the history of Web pages that were displayed.Use Proxy ServerShows a Web page via a proxy server.Always display Proxy Authentication DialogueShows the Proxy Authentication dialog if the &quot;Use Proxy Server&quot; is enabled.Back to top ';
 body[393]='08-070.htm';
dai[393]='USB DRIVER SETTINGS';
bun[393]='USB DRIVER SETTINGSUSB DRIVER SETTINGSUSB Driver Settings Set the USB driver to be connected to the machine. If some settings that requires the machine to be restarted are stored, a prompt appears to restart the machine.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionExternal KeyboardSelect whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboard is used.USB MemorySelect whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used.Card Reader/WriterSelect whether the internal or external device driver for the card reader/writer driver is used.Level of EncryptionSelect the level of encryption for communication using the external driver.Back to top ';
 body[394]='08-071.htm';
dai[394]='E-MAIL PRINT SETTINGS';
bun[394]='E-MAIL PRINT SETTINGSE-MAIL PRINT SETTINGSE-mail Print Settings When an e-mail is sent to the address of this machine, a file attached to this mail is printed out.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionE-MAIL PRINTSelect this option to use the E-mail printing.POP3 ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110.POP AuthenticationThe authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User NameEnter the user name. The special user account is required for e-mail printing.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to and enter the new password in the text box.Check IntervalEnter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes.Enable SSLIf set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow the POP over SSL communication, set the [Port Number]Connection TestTap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the POP3 server.Back to top ';
 body[395]='08-072.htm';
dai[395]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)';
bun[395]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (FTP)Setting for Print from the MFP (FTP) From the operator panel of machine, you can access the FTP server and select server data for printing.Adding or editing an FTP serverWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the FTP server registration screen appears. Up to 20 network folders can be registered. When you tap an FTP server name, the registration screen for that FTP server appears. You can now edit it.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionNameEnter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel.FTP ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the FTP server.DirectoryEnter the destination directory of the FTP file server.Enable User AuthenticationEnables user authentication. The user name and password are required to enter.User NameEnter the login user name for logging in the FTP file server.PasswordEnter the password required for logging in the FTP file server. To change the password, set [Change Password] to and enter the new password in the text box.Enable SSLEnables the SSL encryption communication.Deleting an FTP serverTo delete a selected FTP server, set the checkbox at the left of the FTP server name to and tap [Delete] key.Back to top ';
 body[396]='08-073.htm';
dai[396]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (SMB)';
bun[396]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (SMB)SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE MFP (SMB)Setting for Print from the MFP(SMB) Allows you to access the network folder from the machine operator panel, and to select network folder data for printing.Adding or editing a Network FolderWhen the [Add] key is tapped, the network folder registration screen appears. Up to 20 network folders can be registered. When you tap a network folder name, the registration screen for that network folder appears. You can now edit it.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionNameEnter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel.Folder PathEnter a path to the network folder.Enable User AuthenticationEnables user authentication. The user name and password are required to enter.User NameEnter the user name used for logging in the network folder.PasswordEnter the password required for logging in the network folder. To change the password, set [Change Password] to and enter the new password in the text box.Deleting a Network FolderTo delete a selected network folder, set the checkbox at the left of the network folder name to and tap [Delete] key.Back to top ';
 body[397]='08-074.htm';
dai[397]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE PC';
bun[397]='SETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE PCSETTING FOR PRINT FROM THE PCSetting for Print from the PC If the print settings data is loaded from the client PC to the FTP server of the machine, the print settings are stored in the machine automatically.List of Set Up ItemsItemDescriptionFTP PRINTEnable the FTP printing when data is moved to the FTP server of the machine. Enabled by default.Port NumberEnter a port number. The default setting is port 21.Use BannerEnable or disable a banner. Disabled by default.Back to top ';
 body[398]='08-075.htm';
dai[398]='ECO SETTING';
bun[398]='ECO SETTINGECO SETTINGEco Setting The machine\'s power consumption can be reduced by Eco Mode setting.The settings on the Energy Save can be collectively changed. Based on the degree in which to reduce the machine\'s power consumption, select &quot;Normal Mode&quot; or &quot;Eco Mode&quot;.To separately configure the eco settings, select &quot;Following the Power Management&quot;.Settings for Eco ModeItemDescriptionNormal ModeAllows easy machine operation with reduced power consumption.Eco ModeMinimizes the machine\'s power consumption.Following the Power ManagementThe separate power saving settings apply.Setting values that are applied to Eco Mode settingsSetting values applied by each mode is as follows.Energy SaveNormal ModeEco ModeEco ScanOn(Sending Modes Only)On(All Modes Except Copy)Auto Power Shut-Off TimerChange transition time by time of day.:AutoFix transition time.:On(1 min.)As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.OffOnPreheat Mode Setting1 min.1 min.Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat modeOnOnEach Energy Save settings in the Power Management Setting is not applied when Normal/Eco mode is used.Back to top ';
 body[399]='08-076.htm';
dai[399]='ECO SCAN SETTING';
bun[399]='ECO SCAN SETTINGECO SCAN SETTINGEco Scan Setting A non-print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD can be executed while the fusing unit is kept Off. This can be set for each mode.Set "Eco Scan Setting" to , and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting.The following modes and screens can be set.Home ScreenCopyImage SendDocument FilingSystem SettingsSharpOSAManual FinishingBack to top ';
 body[400]='08-077.htm';
dai[400]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS';
bun[400]='POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGSPOWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGSPower Management Settings The Auto Power Shut-Off can be enabled or disabled, and the Preheat Mode can be set.This function reduces your power costs, and at the same time helps conserve natural resources and reduce pollution.Preheat Mode Setting The time until Preheat Mode activates can be set to any number of minutes from 1 to 120.Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses after printing ends and no further operations are performed.Select the time that best suits the needs of your workplace.The panel display can be turned Off in the Preheat mode.Preheat mode cannot be disabled.As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode. When the machine completes a print job received from the PC, the machine immediately returns to the Auto Power Shut-Off mode.Fix transition time. The Auto Power-Off transition time is fixed.When this setting is enabled, the [Change transition time by time of day.] option is disabled.If the Auto Power-Off is disabled, the time you have set here is disabled.Change transition time by time of day. This function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period.When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time] option is disabled.Pages are counted for each paper size separately.When the power supply of the machine was off, there was no job during this time.The image transfer control settings are not changed.This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling. If both of them are enabled, the Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.Transition time to Energy Saving and Auto Power Shut-Off modesPatternTransition timeAverage outputs per hour*Mode1 (Job Start Priority1)After 1 hour1000-Mode2 (Job Start Priority2)After 30 minutes250-999Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1)After 5 minutes60-249Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)After the minimum time period-59Sleep Mode Power LevelLow Power :The machine switches to the power saving mode, but it takes some time to recover.Fast Wake Up :Compared with Low Power, the power value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster recovery.-*Factory default settingIt can be configured in Setting mode (Web version) only. It cannot be configured on the touch panel of the machine.Auto This function controls the power optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of machine based on job logs obtained during a certain time period.If the machine does not have the 4-week job log information, the machine enters the template2 (Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) between 8:00 and 18:00 hours). Then after that, it enters Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2).Manual You can set a pattern for each time band.The machine already has the 3-pattern template. The Energy Save pattern can be added to the &quot;Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4&quot;.Three-pattern templateTemplatePatternDescription of modeTemplate 1All &quot;Energy Save Priority 2&quot;The machine runs in the &quot;Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)&quot; all the time.Template 28:00-18:00 &quot;Energy Save Priority 1&quot;The machine runs in &quot;Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1)&quot; between 8:00 and 18:00, and in &quot;Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)&quot; at other times.Template 38:00-18:00 &quot;Job Start Priority 1&quot;The machine runs in &quot;Mode1 (Job Start Priority1)&quot; between 8:00 and 18:00, and in &quot;Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)&quot; at other times.Specific Date Operation SettingsYou can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the &quot;specific date&quot; and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date.The specific date operation is performed on the day configured as the specific date regardless of the setting on Auto Power-Off transition time (enabled or disabled).&quot;Specific Date&quot; tabUp to 7 specific dates can be configured. Configure specific dates, an energy saving pattern you want to apply, and the operation for the specific date if it falls on a holiday.ItemDescriptionDate SettingConfigure the date on which you want to operate the machine with a specific pattern.Select a day between 1 and 31 in Every Month or from End of Every Month.Applied Energy Saving OperationSelect an energy saving patten you want to apply.Use the &quot;Pattern&quot; tab to specify the details of the energy saving pattern.Operation for HolidayConfigure how the machine operates if the preset specific date falls on a holiday.Use the &quot;Holiday&quot; tab to specify the day as the holiday.If a specific date that is initially specified coincides with the one that is moved because it falls on a holiday, the setting for the former takes precedence.If specific dates of the same dates are configured, they are used in ascending order between 1 and 7 (specific date numbers).&quot;Pattern&quot; tabThis tab is used to configure the details of an energy saving pattern.ItemDescriptionEnergy Save OperationSelect a specific date pattern you want to specify.Change Pattern NameEnter a pattern name when you want to change the name of a specific date pattern.Pattern to Be ModeledSelect a source pattern when you create a pattern using a stored or preset pattern.Add new schedule.Add a schedule.&quot;Holiday&quot; tabSpecify a holiday. The day you specified as the holiday will not be a specific date.ItemDescriptionHoliday ListWhen you tap this option, the dates and days of the week for the holidays you have set for two years.Day of WeekUse this option to specify a holiday using a day of the week.Set PeriodUse this to specify a holiday using a date.&quot;Final Registered Time&quot; shows when the holiday that is stored with Set Period was stored.Back to top ';
 body[401]='08-078.htm';
dai[401]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTING';
bun[401]='POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGPOWER ON/OFF SCHEDULE SETTINGPower ON/OFF Schedule Setting The machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The &quot;Setting 1&quot;, &quot;Setting 2&quot; and &quot;Setting 3&quot; are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the saThe scheduling function does not support the power management settings in the Preheat Mode and Auto Power Shut-Off Mode.The preset power-off time is subject to the following restrictions:If the machine is running due to the current job execution or other reasons, the machine is turned off only after the job has finished.The machine cannot receive printer jobs.The machine can receive output jobs.If the power management setting is also enabled, the Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.If the same time is specified, settings are applied in the order of &quot;Setting 1&quot;, &quot;Setting 2&quot;, and &quot;Setting 3&quot;.The power is not turned off in the following cases:&quot;Automatic deletion when power is turned on&quot; is in progress.While the optimization of the hard disk is in progress or while a restart is in progress after the setting mode has been changed.The preset power on/off time is within one minute from when the setting is accepted.Back to top ';
 body[402]='08-079.htm';
dai[402]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUS';
bun[402]='E-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSE-MAIL ALERT AND STATUSStatus Message Selects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address.&quot;Standard&quot; tab Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.ItemDescriptionE-mail AddressEnter the destination e-mail address for transmission of machine status information. When you enter multiple addresses, separate them with semicolons (;) or a comma (,).Send NowWhen tapped, the status message is sent to the destination of the e-mail address list.Send on Schedule 1If checked as , an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule.Send on Schedule 2If checked as , an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule.SchedulingSelect a schedule to send E-mails.&quot;Advanced&quot; tabItemDescriptionBi-directional Status MessageBi-directional status messaging can be enabled.POP3 ServerEnter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server.Port NumberEnter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110.POP AuthenticationThe authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.User NameEnter the user name. The special user account is required for bi-directional e-mail status transmission.PasswordEnter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to .Check IntervalEnter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes.Enable SSLIf set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the &quot;Port Number&quot; toConnection TestTap the [Execute] key to test the connection to the POP3 server.Alerts Message Selects the E-mail Alert function settings. The E-mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to the administrator or dealer using e-mail. Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address lE-mail AddressEnter the destination E-mail address for alert message transmission. You can enter multiple addresses by separating them by a semicolon or colon. Example: aaa@abc.jp;bbb@xyz.comBack to top ';
 body[403]='08-080.htm';
dai[403]='JOB LOG';
bun[403]='JOB LOGJOB LOGJob Log Operation Deletes log of a job executed on the machine. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log. You can save the job log by selecting the [Job Log] in &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;.View Jog Log Views log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key.Back to top ';
 body[404]='08-081.htm';
dai[404]='CHANGE PASSWORD';
bun[404]='CHANGE PASSWORDCHANGE PASSWORDChange Password The administrator password can be changed. When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password. (It is recommended that you periodically change the administrator password.)Enter a password consisting of 5 to 255 characters, and tap the [Submit] key. Your setting is made valid only when the machine is turned On again.The user-level authentication password is required to add, edit or delete the destination. When you log on, enter &quot;user&quot; as the user name. Then, enter the user password that you have registered with this option. The administrator-level authenticIf you tap the [Submit] key without entering a password, the previously set value is assumed. Password protection is enabled by default. For the factory default administrator password, see &quot;ADMINISTRATOR/OTHERS (NOISE/MATERIAL EMISSION)&quot; in the &quot;Quick Start Guide&quot;.Back to top ';
 body[405]='08-082.htm';
dai[405]='PORT CONTROL';
bun[405]='PORT CONTROLPORT CONTROLPort Control Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Submit] key. The following ports can be configured.Server PortClient PortHTTPHTTPSFTP PRINTRaw PrintLPDIPPIPP-SSLTandem Output ReceivePC ScanRemote Operation PanelSNMPDTelnetNBT/WINSJCPRARPSMTPWSDUSB-Device Expansion (when Application Communication Module or External Account Module is enabled)Sharp OSA (when Application Communication Module or External Account Module is enabled)HTTPHTTPSHTTPHTTPSFTPFTPSSMTPSMTP-SSLPOP3POP3-SSLSNMP-TRAPNotify Job EndLDAPLDAP-SSLSMB/WINSSNTPmDNSTandem Output SendData Backup SendBack to top ';
 body[406]='08-083.htm';
dai[406]='FILTER SETTING';
bun[406]='FILTER SETTINGFILTER SETTINGFilter SettingYou can set the filter by an IP or MAC address to prevent an authorised access to the machine via a network. Set the IP or MAC address filter and tap the [Submit] key.IP Address Filter SettingsThis option sets an IP address. You can specify whether to allow or prohibit access to the machine from the IP address you set.MAC Address Filter SettingsThis option sets a MAC address. It allows access to the machine from the MAC address you set.Back to top ';
 body[407]='08-084.htm';
dai[407]='SSL SETTINGS';
bun[407]='SSL SETTINGSSSL SETTINGSSSL Settings SSL can be used for data transmission over a network. SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of information communicated over a network. Encrypting data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive information safely. Data encryption can beServer PortItemDescriptionHTTPSApply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.IPP-SSLApply SSL encryption to IPP communication.Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Setting mode (Web version) AccessWhen this setting is enabled, all communication that attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected to HTTPS.Client PortItemDescriptionHTTPS Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.FTPS Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication.SMTP-SSLApply SSL encryption to SMTP communication.POP3-SSLApply SSL encryption to POP3 communication.LDAP-SSLApply SSL encryption to LDAP communication.Level of Encryption The encryption strength can be set to one of three levels.Back to top ';
 body[408]='08-085.htm';
dai[408]='IEEE802.1X SETTING';
bun[408]='IEEE802.1X SETTINGIEEE802.1X SETTINGIEEE802.1X Setting IEEE802.1X authentication allows only authenticated devices to use network, and protect against network abuse by third parties. IEEE802.1X protocol defines port-based authentication for both wired and wireless networks. You can enable or disable IEEE802.1X authentication with this setting. The IEEE802.1X details can be set with Setting mode (Web version). Depending on the Web page settings, connection to the machine may not be allowed, or the settings may not allow prinBack to top ';
 body[409]='08-086.htm';
dai[409]='IPsec SETTINGS';
bun[409]='IPsec SETTINGSIPsec SETTINGSIPsec Settings IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and received safely without the need to configure settings for IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other higher-level application. This setting is oIt may take some time to reflect on the machine settings, and you cannot connect to the machine during this time.If the Setting mode (Web version) settings are not correctly selected, connection to the machine may not be allowed, or the settings may not allow printing, scanning, or Setting mode (Web version) display. If this is the case, disable the IPsec Settings oBack to top ';
 body[410]='08-087.htm';
dai[410]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT';
bun[410]='HIDDEN PATTERN PRINTHIDDEN PATTERN PRINT&quot;Normal Condition&quot; Tab Select Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The Hidden Pattern Print embeds a hidden text in the background on output sheets. If an output sheet is copied, the embedded text appears conspicuous, which helps prevent unauthorised copying.Default SettingsItemDescriptionHidden Pattern Print SettingA pattern print can be printed with this settings.Print ColourSelect a print colour.ExposureSelect an exposure.Font SizeSelect a font size.AngleSelect a character angle.Font StyleSelect the standard or italic character settings.Camouflage PatternSet a camouflage pattern.Print MethodSelect a character display pattern.PositiveNegativePrint Contents SettingItemDescriptionPre-Set WordAllows you to select a preset character string. The following character strings can be selected.DO NOT COPY, TOP SEACRET, Internal Use Only, Handle With Care, IMPORTANT, Copy Invalid, IMPORTANT, COPYPre-set TextSelect a stored preset character string. This setting is ignored if [Direct Entry] is enabled.DO NOT COPY, TOP SEACRET, Internal Use Only, Handle With Care, IMPORTANT, Copy Invalid, IMPORTANT, COPYInformation PrintingEnables simultaneous printing of the following information sets.Unit Serial Number, account job ID, login name/user number, number of copy control, date and timeDisable Direct EntryDirectly enter the desired text. This setting is ignored if [Pre-set Text] is enabled.&quot;Contrast&quot; TabUse this tab to manually specify the contrast of hidden pattern. The black, magenta, and cyan can be set in any of 9 levels.Custom Text Registration Stores the user-created print characters. Up to 30 user-created printer characters can be stored.Back to top ';
 body[411]='08-088.htm';
dai[411]='TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT';
bun[411]='TRACKING INFORMATION PRINTTRACKING INFORMATION PRINTTracking Information Print Prints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed. You can set a unit serial number, optional character string, date, and other information in the tracking information. ItemDescriptionTracking Information Print SettingSet this option to print the tracking information.Print InformationThe following information can be printed.Unit Serial Number, characters, account job ID, login name/user number, date and timeSelect the Print ColourSelect a print colour.Print PositionSet a print position on each page.Select the Job to PrintSet a job to print the tracking information.Back to top ';
 body[412]='08-089.htm';
dai[412]='INITIALIZE PRIVATE DATA / DATA IN MACHINE';
bun[412]='INITIALIZE PRIVATE DATA / DATA IN MACHINEINITIALIZE PRIVATE DATA / DATA IN MACHINEInitialize Private Data / Data in Machine Use this to batch-delete private data, such as address books and transmission logs, for each item to enhance security of the disposal or recycling of the machine.When this function has been executed, a notification on the completion of deletion is printed. The machine is then locked and can no longer be used.If you wish to use the locked machine, contact your dealer.The following pieces of data are deleted.All data in address books and related private dataAll data in user information All Job Data inside MachineProgramsPre-set TextJob logsSetting information on the system settings (initialized to the factory default)Back to top ';
 body[413]='08-094.htm';
dai[413]='DATA CLEARANCE SETTINGS';
bun[413]='DATA CLEARANCE SETTINGSDATA CLEARANCE SETTINGSData Clearance SettingsEnabling this function activates the following security functions on the machine.Use caution, as this function cannot be cancelled once enabled.The image data generated in each job is encrypted. You can automatically clear the encrypted data in the memory or on the hard disk drive after completing each job.If you enter the password below incorrectly three consecutive times, the input operation becomes locked for five minutes.Administrator password/user password to use when the user authentication function is not setPassword for confidential folders and files in document filingPassword for printing encrypted PDF for direct printing**This data cannot be used if you enter the password incorrectly three consecutive times.Password for FTP pull printTo enable these features, touch [OK] when a message for confirming whether or not to enable the features appears, and enter the same code as that shown on the "Security code input" screen. Touch the [Execute] key.Then restart the device.After restarting, you can select from one to seven times for the "Clearance Time Settings".A high clearance time setting will increase security, however, the time will take longer to clear. It is recommended that you set it to an appropriate setting according to your usage.Back to top ';
 body[414]='08-095.htm';
dai[414]='RELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATION';
bun[414]='RELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATIONRELEASE LOCK ON FILE / FOLDER OPERATIONRelease Lock on File / Folder OperationThis function is used to release document filing folders and files and encrypted PDF files, that are locked due to the entry of an incorrect password.Touch the [Release Lock on File/Folder Operation] key and then the [Release] key to release all locked items.After this is done, the items can be manipulated.When no items are locked, the [Release Lock on File/Folder Operation] key is greyed out.Back to top ';
 body[415]='09-001.htm';
dai[415]='HOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUAL';
bun[415]='HOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUALHOW TO USE THE USER\'S MANUALOverviewThis section explains how to use the User\'s Manual.A desired function can be displayed by switching the mode tab and then selecting the title. It can also be displayed from the contents, index, or search.Click a tab of the mode you want to seeTap the item that you want to see from the menu on the left of the screenIf the menu items are opened, click the item to view its contents to select desired items.Contents, Search, Index FunctionsA target function can be displayed using the Contents, Search, or Index function.Display from ContentsClicking the [CONTENTS] tab displays a list of contents of the User\'s Manual. Click the item you want to see.Search and DisplayEnter a word to be searched, then click the [SEARCH] button to display the search result screen. Click the item you want to see.Display from IndexClicking the [INDEX] tab displays the index screen. Click the item you want to see.Meanings of icons used in the User\'s ManualThis alerts you to a situation that could result in death or serious personal injury. This alerts you to a situation that could result in personal injury or damage to properties.This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of machine damage or failure.This supplements function or operation procedure.This explains a restriction of function or operation procedure.This explains how to stop or correct an operation.This describes a routine work relevant to setting mode.Indication of setting mode (for administrators) This machine provides &quot;Setting mode&quot; for administrators. The mode allows the administrator to change or register default values of each function, and configure network settings.When setting mode is required to use this machine, this manual describes a procedure as shown in the following examples.Follow the arrow marks to tap or click menu items and select the proper item.To set Rotation Copy:In &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot;, select [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] → [Rotation Copy Setting].To edit the home screen list:In &quot;Setting mode (Web version)&quot;, select [User Control] → [Favourite Operation Group List] → [Home Screen List]. (Administrator rights are required.)Descriptions in the manualScreens or icons shown in the User\'s Manual may differ from the actual ones used on this machine.For how to install the drivers and software described in the User\'s Manual, consult the Software Setup Guide.For matters related to operating systems, consult the manual of the operating system or refer to relevant help function as necessary.The User\'s Manual provides the explanations of screens and procedures based on Windows 7 &reg;. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.The User\'s Manual provides the explanations of screens and procedures based on Mac OS X v10.8 in the case of a Mac OS X. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.Wherever &quot;MX-xxxx&quot; appears in the User\'s Manual, please substitute your model name for &quot;xxxx&quot;.This manual contains explanations of the PPD driver. However, please note that the PPD driver are not available and do not appear on the software for installation in some countries and regions.In this case, please install the English version if you want to use these drivers.Although we have carefully checked the content of this manual, please contact your authorised service representative should you notice any errors or have any questions about this manual.This product was shipped after being subjected to our strict quality control and inspection process. However, if you notice any product defects or abnormalities, please contact your dealer or authorised service representative.Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any failures that occur due to incorrect operation of the product and its options by the customer or a third party, or for any damage that occurs due to the failures.For purposes of improvement, the contents of the User\'s Manual are subject to change without notice.The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.In general, the explanations provided in the User\'s Manual are based on the assumption that the large capacity trays, saddle finisher, and punch module have been installed on the MX-6500N/MX-7500N. However, some descriptions assumes an installation of perThe specifications or descriptions may differ depending on the region where the product is used or the type of the product.Back to top';
 body[416]='09-002.htm';
dai[416]='USER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD';
bun[416]='USER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOADUSER\'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD If you wish to view the User\'s Manual on your PC, download it from this machine.If the machine is not connected to the network, you cannot download the User\'s Manual. For more information, consult a network administrator.OperationStart the Web browser on the PC, and enter the IP address of the machine Check the IP address of the machine with the network administrator.Recommended Web browserInternet Explorer: 6 or laterFirefox: 3.6 or laterSafari: 4.0 or laterDepending on the machine settings, user authentication may be required to display the setting mode (Web version). For password and other information required for user authentication, contact the machine administrator.Click [Operation Manual Download] on the menuSelect the language you wish to download Select [User\'s Manual]Click the [Download] buttonExpand the &quot;User\'s Manual&quot; you have downloaded in step 4 If you use Windows, right-click the downloaded &quot;User\'s Manual&quot;, and select [Expand All] from the menu.If [Expand All] does not appear in the menu, use any zip application to expand the &quot;User\'s Manual&quot;.If you use Macintosh, double-click the &quot;User\'s Manual&quot;.Follow the instructions that appear in the Deployment Wizard to expand the &quot;User\'s Manual&quot;Open the &quot;User\'s Manual&quot; folderDouble click &quot;index (.htm)&quot;&quot;User\'s Manual&quot; appears. Depending on your Web browser, a warning message may appear in the information bar or dialog box to indicate that your Web browser has restricted viewing of this file to help protect security.In this case, release the restricted viewing of your Web browser. The &quot;User\'s Manual&quot; is not properly displayed unless you release the restriction.For more information, please refer to your Web browser\'s help file or consult your Web browser manufacturer.Back to top ';
 body[417]='09-003.htm';
dai[417]='CANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGS';
bun[417]='CANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGSCANCELLING OPERATION AND RESETTING SETTINGSOverviewTo clear and initialize all settings:Tap the [CA] keyTo cancel printing or transmission:Tap the [Cancel Print] or [Sending Cancelled] keyTo cancel job:Remove the pending jobs in the [Job Management] screenSTOPPING/DELETING A COPY JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVEDCANCELLING THE CURRENTLY COMMUNICATING OR RESERVED JOBSTo clear entered numeric values:Tap the [C] keyBack to top';
 body[418]='09-004.htm';
dai[418]='COPY PROBLEMS';
bun[418]='COPY PROBLEMSCOPY PROBLEMSOverview If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [POWER] button and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. A When the background colour of the job management display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or receivedProblemPoint to checkSolutionCOPYING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. Check with your administrator.When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings. Check with your administrator.AUTO SELECTION OF COLOUR MODE DOES NOT TAKE PLACE CORRECTLYAre you scanning one of the following types of originals?When Black &amp; White cannot be selected:Are there colours or colouring in the paper?When Colour cannot be selected:Is the colour in the original very light?Is the colour in the original very dark, almost black?Is only a very small area of the original coloured?When the colour mode is set to &quot;Auto&quot;, the machine detects whether the original is black and white or colour when the [Colour Start] key is tapped. However, when an original of a type as shown on the left is used, automatic detection may not givIn this event, specify the colour mode manually.IMAGE ROTATION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEDid you select the paper size or copy ratio manually?Copy using automatic paper selection and automatic ratio selection.Are you copying using settings that do not allow rotate copying?Rotate copying can generally be combined with other modes as required, however, some combinations are not possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear on the touch panel.Is &quot;Rotation Copy Setting&quot; disabled in the setting mode?Check with your administrator.If you are an administrator, enable [Rotation Copy Setting].> &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [System Settings] → [Copy Function Settings] (Tab) → [Rotation Copy Setting] → [Rotation Copy';
 body[419]='09-005.htm';
dai[419]='PRINTER PROBLEMS';
bun[419]='PRINTER PROBLEMSPRINTER PROBLEMSOverview If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [POWER] button and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. A When the background colour of the job management display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or receivedProblemPoint to checkSolutionPRINTING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEIs your PC connected correctly to the machine?Make sure that the cable is connected securely to the LAN connector or the USB port of your PC and that of the machine.If you are connected to a network, make sure that the LAN cable is securely connected to the hub as well.SIDE AND BACKIs the machine connected to the same network (LAN, etc.) as your PC?The machine must be connected to the same network as your PC.If you do not know which network the machine is connected to, ask the network administrator.Is the IP address selected correctly?(Windows)Check the IP address setting.If the machine does not have a permanent IP address (the machine receives an IP address from a DHCP server), printing will not be possible if the IP address changes.To check the IP address of this machine, select &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [System Settings] → &quot;All Custom Setting List&quot;, and print the setting. If the IP address is changed, reconfigure the port setting for the printer driver.> &quot;Setting mode&quot; → [System Settings] → [List Print (User)] → [All Custom Setting List].See also the Software Setup Guide.If the IP address changes frequently, it is recommended that a permanent IP address be assigned to the machine.> &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Network Settings]';
 body[420]='09-007.htm';
dai[420]='IMAGE SEND PROBLEMS';
bun[420]='IMAGE SEND PROBLEMSIMAGE SEND PROBLEMSOverview If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [POWER] button and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. A When the background colour of the job management display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or receivedProblemPoint to checkSolutionTRANSMISSION DOES NOT TAKE PLACEDid you select the correct destination? Is the correct information (e-mail address or FTP server information) stored for that destination?Make sure that the correct information is stored for the destination and that the destination is correctly selected.If delivery by e-mail (Scan to E-mail) is unsuccessful, an error message such as &quot;Undelivered Message&quot; may be sent to the designated administrator\'s e-mail address. This information may help you determine the cause of the problem.Does the image file exceed the e-mail attachment limit set in the setting mode (administrator)?Check with your administrator.If your administrator has set a limit on the size of transmitted files, a file that exceeds the limit cannot be transmitted.Did the image file exceed the file attachment size limit of your mail server?(When Scan to E-mail is used)Reduce the size of the file attachment (reduce the number of pages to scan) for one e-mail transmission.The size of the file can also be reduced by scanning using a lower resolution setting. Ask your mail server administrator (or Internet service provider, etc.) what the file size limit is for one e-mail transmission.Has the folder on the destination computer been set as a shared folder so that files can be sent to it?(When using Scan to Network Folder)If the destination folder is not configured as a shared folder, select &quot;share&quot; in the folder properties.If the folder was moved or otherwise changed, the &quot;share&quot; setting may have been cancelled.Is [IPsec Settings] enabled on the machine?(When using Scan to Network Folder)Check with your administrator.When [IPsec Settings] is enabled in the setting mode, scanning to a shared folder may not be possible in your PC environment.> &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [Security Settings] → [IPsec Settings]';
 body[421]='09-008.htm';
dai[421]='PROBLEMS ON DOCUMENT FILING';
bun[421]='PROBLEMS ON DOCUMENT FILINGPROBLEMS ON DOCUMENT FILINGOverview If you are unable to solve a problem using the solutions in this manual, press the [POWER] button and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn the main power switch to the &quot;&quot;position. A When the background colour of the job management display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not grey, do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug. This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or receivedProblemPoint to checkSolutionDOCUMENT FILING DOES NOT TAKE PLACEDid you enable document filing in the printer driver?Enable document filing.In print mode, enable document filing on the [Job Handling] tab of the printer driver.Have functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode.When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.A FILED DATA CANNOT BE PRINTEDHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.A JOB CANNOT BE STORED IN A CUSTOM FOLDERDo the custom folders created with the machine appear in &quot;Folder Information&quot;?(When printing)Click the [Get Folder Name] button in the document filing save screen of the printer driver to call up the custom folders that have been created on the machine.Does the custom folder have a password?Enter the password configured in the machine in the document filing save screen.A STORED FILE HAS DISAPPEAREDDid you tap the [Print and Delete the Data] key to print a stored file?Tap the [Print and Save the Data] key to print again.If you print the file by tapping the [Print and Delete the Data] key, the file is automatically deleted after being printed.The file property can be set to [Protect] to prevent the file from being easily deleted.Has automatic deletion of document filing files been enabled?If files that you need have been deleted, consult the administrator of the machine.When [Automatic Deletion of File Settings] is enabled in the setting mode, the files in the specified folders are periodically deleted. (Even when the file property is [Confidential] or [Protect], the file may be deleted.)> &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Automatic Deletion of File Settings].';
 body[422]='09-009.htm';
dai[422]='GENERAL PROBLEMS';
bun[422]='GENERAL PROBLEMSGENERAL PROBLEMSOverviewProblemPoint to checkSolutionSPECIFIED MACHINE FUNCTIONS CANNOT BE USEDHave functions been disabled by the administrator?Check with your administrator.Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode. When user authentication is enabled, the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings.THE OPERATION PANEL CANNOT BE USEDIs the main power indicator lit?If the main power indicator is not lit up, turn the machine\'s power on.Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted in the power outlet, switch the main power switch to the &quot;&quot; position, and press the [POWER] button to turn on the power.Did you just power on the machine?Wait until a message appears indicating that the machine is ready.After the [POWER] button is turned on, the machine requires some time to complete warmup operation. During warmup operation, functions can be selected, but a job cannot be run.Is the [Power Save Mode] button blinking?Auto Power Shut-Off mode has activated. To return the machine to normal operation, press the [Power Save Mode] button.AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMERIs a cover open or a device separated from the machine?Read the message and take appropriate actions.A warning message will appear when a cover is open or a device is separated from the machine.Did login fail three times in a row?After operation unlocks, log in using the correct user information.When [A Warning when Login Fails] is enabled in the setting mode and login fails 3 times in a row, a warning will be displayed and user authentication operation will lock for 5 minutes. (If you do not know your user information, contact your administrator> &quot;Setting mode (administrator)&quot; → [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [A Warning when Login Fails]';
 body[423]='09-010.htm';
dai[423]='ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG';
bun[423]='ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOGITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOGOverview The machine records the performed jobs as logs.The main information recorded in the job log is described below.To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording.In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.No.&nbsp;Item nameDescription1Main itemsJob IDThe job ID is recorded. Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum of 999999, after which the count resets to 1.2account-job-idThe job ID used in the OSA is recorded. It is recorded regardless of whether or not the OSA is present.3Job ModeThe job mode type, such as copy or print is recorded.4Computer NameThe name of the computer that sent a print job is recorded.*5User NameThe user name when the user authentication function is used is recorded.6Login NameThe login name when the user authentication function is used is recorded.7Card IDThe card ID when it is used for an authentication process is recorded.9Charge Code 1Charge code 1 is recorded.10Charge Code 2Charge code 2 is recorded.11Starting Date &amp; TimeThe date and time the job was started are recorded.12Completing Date &amp; TimeThe date and time the job was completed are recorded.13Black &amp; White Total CountFor a print job, the total count is recorded. For a send job, the number of transmitted black &amp; white pages is recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total number of pages is recorded. For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored bl14Full Colour Total CountFor a print job, the total count of full-colour pages is recorded. For a send job, the number of transmitted full-colour pages is recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total number of pages is recorded. For a save job, the number of s153-Colour Total CountThe total count of trio-colour pages is recorded.162-Colour Total CountFor a print job, the total count of two-colour pages is recorded. For a save job, the number of saved two-colour pages is recorded.17Single Colour Total CountThe total number of pages in a print job that have been printed using a single colour is recorded.18Count according to sizeCounts by original/paper size in colour mode and black &amp; white mode are recorded.19Invalid Paper Count (Black &amp; White)The black &amp; white invalid sheet count is recorded.20Invalid Paper Count (Colour)The colour invalid sheet count is recorded.21Number of Reserved SetsNumber of specified sets or reserved destinations is recorded.22Number of Completed SetsNumber of completed sets or number of destinations to which transmission was successfully completed is recorded.23Number of Reserved PagesNumber of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded.24Number of Completed PagesNumber of completed pages of a set is recorded.25ResultThe result of a job is recorded.26Error CauseWhen an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded.27Print Job Related ItemOutputThe output mode of a printed job is recorded.28StapleThe status of stapling is recorded.29 Staple Count The staple count is recorded. 30PunchThe status of punching is recording.31Punch CountThe punch count is recorded.32FoldA job that uses the paper folding function is recorded.33Fold CountNumber of folded pages is recorded.34Saddle FoldA job that uses the saddle fold function is recorded.35Saddle Fold CountThe saddle fold count is recorded.37Printer ToneThe tone used for a print job is recorded.38Image Send Related ItemAddressAddress of an image send job is recorded.39Sender NameSender name of an image send job is recorded.40Sender AddressSender address of an image send job is recorded.41Transmission TypeTransmission type of an image send job is recorded.42Administrative Serial NumberAdministrative serial number of an image send job is recorded.43Broadcast numberBroadcast number of an image send job is recorded.44Entry OrderReservation order for broadcast transmission of an image send job is recorded. This is used to link communication and printing when recording multi polling jobs.45File FormatFile format of an image send job is recorded.46Sign E-mailWhether a digital signature is sent with an E-mail is recorded.47Encry.Whether a digital signature is made by E-mail is recorded.48Compression Mode/Compression RatioCompression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image send job is recorded.49Document Filing Related ItemDocument FilingStatus of document filing is recorded.50Storing ModeDocument filing storing mode is recorded.51Common FunctionalityColour SettingColour mode selected by user is recorded.52Special ModesSpecial modes selected when the job was executed is recorded.53File NameThe stored file name is recorded.*54Data Size [KB]The size of a file is recorded.55Detailed ItemsOriginal SizeSize of scanned original is recorded. For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file is recorded.56Original TypeOriginal type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings screen is recorded.57Original CountNumber of scanned original sheets is recorded.58Paper SizeFor a print job, the paper size is recorded. For a send job, the transmitted paper size is recorded. For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file is recorded.59Paper TypeThe paper type used for printing is recorded.60Paper SettingsThe paper settings specified in &quot;Paper Type&quot; is recorded.61Duplex SetupThe duplex setting is recorded.62ResolutionThe scanning resolution is recorded.63Machine ItemModel NameThe model name of the machine is recorded.64Unit Serial NumberThe serial number of the machine is recorded.65NameThe name of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded.66Machine LocationThe installation location of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded. Back to top ';
 body[424]='09-033.htm';
dai[424]='REQUESTING REPAIR';
bun[424]='REQUESTING REPAIRREQUESTING REPAIROverview Before requesting repair, read &quot;COPY PROBLEMS&quot;, &quot;PRINTER PROBLEMS&quot;, &quot;IMAGE SEND PROBLEMS&quot;, &quot;PROBLEMS ON DOCUMENT FILING&quot;, and &quot;GENERAL PROBLEMS&quot;. Nevertheless, if a particular problem persists, stop usingProduct nameDigital full-colour multifunction machineModelMX-6500N or MX-7500NProblem status (Enter as in details as possible.)&nbsp;Do not try to repair it by yourself. It is very dangerous.';
 body[425]='09-034.htm';
dai[425]='IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES';
bun[425]='IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGESIF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGESOverview When the machine is transferred, the internal toner cartridge needs to be taken out. Please contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area before you change your place of residence.';
 body[426]='09-035.htm';
dai[426]='MAINTENANCE';
bun[426]='MAINTENANCEMAINTENANCEOverview When the maintenance execution time is approaching, a message will appear on the touch panel. When the message is displayed, contact your dealer or authorised service representative in your area as soon as possible.';
 body[427]='09-036.htm';
dai[427]='MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM';
bun[427]='MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEMMAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEMOverview We provide two types of optional maintenance services to maintain the performance and functions of this product: the Counter Service System and the Spot Service System.For service system details, contact the dealer and select the most appropriate service.';
 body[428]='09-037.htm';
dai[428]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES';
bun[428]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSESMINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSESOverviewIn order to ensure our maintenance services, we will retain performance parts for this product for seven (7) years after production is discontinued.Performance parts refers to parts that are required to maintain the functions of this product.';
 body[429]='09-038.htm';
dai[429]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES';
bun[429]='MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIESMINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIESOverview We will retain supplies of this product for seven (7) years after it has been discontinued.';
 body[430]='09-040.htm';
dai[430]='LICENCE INFORMATION';
bun[430]='LICENCE INFORMATIONLICENCE INFORMATIONInformation on the Software License for This ProductSoftware compositionThe software included in this product is comprised of various software components whose individual copyrightsare held by SHARP or by third parties.Software developed by SHARP and open source softwareThe copyrights for the software components and various relevant documents included with this product that weredeveloped or written by SHARP are owned by SHARP and are protected by the Copyright Act, international treaties,and other relevant laws. This product also makes use of freely distributed software and software componentswhose copyrights are held by third parties. These include software components covered by a GNU General PublicLicense (hereafter GPL), a GNU Lesser General Public License (hereafter LGPL) or other license agreement.Obtaining source codeSome of the open source software licensors require the distributor to provide the source code with the executablesoftware components. GPL and LGPL include similar requirements. For information on obtaining the source codefor the open source software and for obtaining the GPL, LGPL, and other license agreement information, visit thefollowing website:http://sharp-world.com/products/copier/source/download/index.htmlWe are unable to answer any questions about the source code for the open source software. The source code forthe software components whose copyrights are held by SHARP is not distributed.Software CopyrightsCopyright (c) 2000 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.The name &quot;Carnegie Mellon University&quot; must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For permission or any other legal details, please contactOffice of Technology TransferCarnegie Mellon University 5000 Forbes Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890(412) 268-4387, fax: (412) 268-7395tech-transfer@andrew.cmu.edu4.Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:&quot;This product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.edu/computing/).&quot;CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ORCopyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska H&ouml;gskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific licence from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a licence before eWITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright noticTHIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED &quot;AS IS&quot; AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.Individual source code files are copyright MIT, Cygnus Support, OpenVision, Oracle, Sun Soft, FundsXpress, and others.Project Athena, Athena, Athena MUSE, Discuss, Hesiod, Kerberos, Moira, and Zephyr are trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). No commercial use of these trademarks may be made without prior written permission of MIT.&nbsp; &quot;Commercial use&quot; means use of a name in a product or other for-profit manner. It does NOT prevent a commercial firm from referring to the MIT trademarks in order to convey information (although in doing so, recognition of their trademark statusOpenSSL Licence---------------Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: &quot;This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)&quot;4.The names &quot;OpenSSL Toolkit&quot; and &quot;OpenSSL Project&quot; must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.5.Products derived from this software may not be called &quot;OpenSSL&quot; nor may &quot;OpenSSL&quot; appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.6.Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: &quot;This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)&quot;THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT &quot;AS IS&quot; AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEThis product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).Original SSLeay Licence---------------Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SCopyright remains Eric Young\'s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of aRedistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:1.Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.3.All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: &quot;This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)&quot; The word \'cryptographic\' can be left out4.If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: &quot;This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)&quot;THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG &quot;AS IS&quot; AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR ORThe licence and distribution terms for any publically available version orderivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply becopied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]D3DES Licence---------------Copyright (c) 1988,1989,1990,1991,1992 by Richard Outerbridge. (GEnie : OUTER; CIS : [71755,204]) Graven Imagery, 1992.Back to top';
 body[431]='09-041.htm';
dai[431]='CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODS';
bun[431]='CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODSCONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODSConsumable TypesYou should use our recommended copy paper and label paper. Please consult your dealer for details. You should use our specified toner cartridges, staple cartridges, and transparency films.Product nameModel nameRemarksTransparency film A4 (special paper)S4BG68100 sheets (10 sets per box)Staple cartridge (for finisher or saddle finisher)MX-SCX2Approx. 5,000 staples&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3Staple cartridge (for saddle stitch unit of saddle finisher)AR-SC3Approx. 2,000 staples&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3MX-SCX1Approx. 5,000 staples&nbsp;&times;&nbsp;3Handling Toner and Toner Cartridge, and in Case of EmergencyHandlingDo not throw toner or toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may splatter and cause burns. Further, do not forcibly open a toner cartridge. Toner dusts may leak. In this case, avoid dust inhilation or skin contact.StorageStore toner or toner cartridge in a cool and dark place that is not sealed or containing flame. Store toner or toner cartridge out of reach of small children. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally, not setting upvertically, being careful not to invIn case or emergencyIf you inhale the dusts:Move to a location with clean air, and gargle with a large amount of water. If you have symptoms such as a cough, consult a doctor.If toner adheres to the skin:Clean skin with a soap, and rinse away toner with water.If toner enters the eyes:Immediately rinse away toner with flowing water. If you have a pain, consult a doctor.If toner is swollowed:Rinse out your mouth, and drink one or two glasses of water. If necessary, consult a doctor.Caution:Do not store a toner cartridge in a place in which the temperature is 40 degrees Celsius or more. If it is stored in a high-temperature place, toner in a cartridge may be hardened.Store toner cartridges pr waste toner box out of reach of small children.Other Consumable Storage MethodsStore consumables in a place that satisfies the following conditions.A clean and dry placeA place with a stable temperatureA place not exposed to direct sunlightPut copy paper in a bag, and store it on a flat place.If you do not put paper in a bag or you set up paper for storage, curling or moisture absorption occurs, resulting in a paper jam. Be sure to put the rest of paper in a bag, and close the top of the bag for storage, otherwise paper curling or moisture abBack to top ';
 body[432]='09-042.htm';
dai[432]='RECYCLING RESOURCES';
bun[432]='RECYCLING RESOURCESRECYCLING RESOURCESRecycled paper with waste paper pulp compoundedThis machine is capable of using recycled paper made of compounded waste-paper pulp. However, various type of paper are commercially available, some of which cannot be used on the machine. Before using any paper, consult the dealer or authorised service rWe Thank You for Your Co-operation in Recycling Used Products.Sharp collects used products to help preserve the Earth&rsquo;s environment and the effective use of of its resources, promoting the reuse or recycling of products and parts. To have used products collected, contact your dealer or the authorised service rWe thank you for your co-operation in recycling used cartridges.Sharp collects used cartridges to help preserve the Earth&rsquo;s environment and the effective use of of its resources, promoting the recycling of them. Please give the used cartridges to your maintenance staff.Collecting and Recycling Used Photoconductive Drums or Photoconductive Drum CartridgesSharp offers a material recycling system to collect used photoconductive drums or photoconductive drum cartridges from customers and reprocess them back into raw materials by using a recycler in each region. Please pass the used photoconductive drums or pBack to top ';
 body[433]='09-043.htm';
dai[433]='TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS';
bun[433]='TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTSTRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTSOverviewThe following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and accessories.Microsoft&reg;, Windows&reg;, Windows&reg; XP, Windows Server&reg; 2003, Windows Vista&reg;, Windows Server&reg; 2008, Windows&reg; 7, Windows&reg; 8, Windows Server&reg; 2012 and Internet Explorer&reg; are registered trademarks or trademarks of MicrosoftPostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Adobe and Flash are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.Mozilla&reg;and Firefox&reg;are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation in the U.S.A. and other countries.IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.NEC, PC-9821, and PC98-NX are registered trademarks or trademarks of NEC Corporation.Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.Sharp OSA is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.RealVNC is a trademark of RealVNC Limited.All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.The built-in fonts of this printer use MicroType<sup>&reg; font compression technology of Monotype Imaging, and also use the scalable font rendering subsystem of UFST<sup>&reg; (Universal Font Scaling Technology) of MonotBack to top ';
 body[434]='09-044.htm';
dai[434]='SOFTWARE LICENCE';
bun[434]='SOFTWARE LICENCESOFTWARE LICENCEPLEASE READ THIS LICENCE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENCE.1LicenceThe application, demonstration, system and other software accompanying this Licence, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other media (the &quot;Software&quot;) and related documentation are licenced to you by SHARP. You own the disk on which t2RestrictionsThe Software contains copyrighted material, trade secrets and other proprietary material which is owned by SHARP and/or its Licensors and in order to protect them you may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a h3TerminationThis licence is effective until terminated. You may terminate this Licence at any time by destroying the Software and related documentation and all copies thereof. This Licence will terminate immediately without notice from SHARP and/or SHARP&rsquo;s Lice4Export Law AssurancesYou agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported outside the United States except as authorised and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United St5Government End UsersIf you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the United States Government, the following provisions apply. The Government agrees:(i)if the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD), the Software is classified as &quot;Commercial Computer Software&quot; and the Government is acquiring only &quot;restricted rights&quot; in the Software and its documentation as that term(ii)if the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the United States Government other than DoD, the Software is classified as &quot;Commercial&quot; that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 and as &quot;Commercial Computer Software&quot; that term is6Disclaimer of Warranty on SoftwareYou expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk. The Software and related documentation are provided &quot;AS IS&quot; and without warranty of any kind and SHARP and SHARP\'s Licensor(s) (for the purpose of provisions 6 an7Limitation of LiabilityUNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SHARP BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF SHARP OR A SHARP AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVEIn no event shall SHARP\'s total liability to you for all damages, losses, and causes of action (whether in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise) exceed the amount paid by you for the Software.8Controlling Law and SeverabilityFor a portion of the Software related with Apple Macintosh and Microsoft Windows, this licence shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of California and Washington, respectively. If for any reason a court of competent j9Complete AgreementThis Licence constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and related documentation, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject matter.Back to top ';
